Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
2000-060 Water Fluoridation System Agreement with Apollo, Inc.
i C , i ,- R 1 :4'. ',- • - --,' t,' ,...*?,,,, -"E.1- ;1-:`,Teia".:+r •A".• 01 *, Aientlieketitinkr ' ..'' -rili 1 C ity of Y 1 Engineering Division 1 . I Water Fluoridation System 1 City Project No. 1896 1 1 __......,........,, 1. I YA 1 i4 IiA 1 • s 1 r r i ' N. '' '', , I., 1 L. \ ' \ r I I Construction Contract Specifications & Bid Do •. ents 1 AZ I 129 North Second Street August 200 1 Phone (509) 575 -6111 1 Yakima, WA 98901 b Fax (509) 576 -6305 I CITY OF YAKIMA Yakima, Washington CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR: CITY OF YAKIMA WATER FLUORIDATION SYSTEM . CONTENTS: Bid Documents Invitation to Bid Proposal Form Proposal Signature Sheet Bid Bond Form Non - Collusion Declaration Subcontractor List Bidders Check List Nondiscrimination Provision Women and Minority Business Enterprise Policy Resolution D-4816 Affirmative Action Plan Pre -Award Information MBE/WBE Form Contract Documents Contract Form Performance Bond Form Insurance Form Minimum Wage Affidavit Form Prevailing Wage Rates Benefit Code Key Specifications Standard Specifications Technical Specifications Appendix A — Process Description Appendix B — List of Pipes and Fittings for Replacement in Pump Room Appendix C - Geotechnical Report Plans & Details Reference Plans by Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, October 2000 City Engineering Office Yakima, Washington October 2000 00601T01 EG f CC( :'r BUSINESS OF THE CITY COUNCIL YAKIMA, WASHINGTON AGENDA STATEMENT Item No.. 1 For Meeting Of 10/15/02 ITEM TITLE: Final Contract Payment for City of Yakima Water Fluoridation System SUBMITTED BY: unity & Economic Development — Engineering Division CONTACT PERSON /TELEPHONE: K. W. Adams, P.E., City Engineer I' t, 575 -6096 SUMMARY EXPLANATION: This project consisted of a chemical building with heating and ventilation, a fluoride storage tank, a secondary containment tank and a chemical feeding system. Also included supply and installation of fluoride monitoring equipment in the Water Treatment Plant building and in the Gleed Water Pump Station. Plumbing improvements, installation of the fluoride injector and replacement of an owner supplied water meter was also provided. Final inspection for this project was made and the recommendation is that the project be accepted. This Council action is to accept the project and approve the final estimate. Retainage will be held 30 days after Council approval. Contractor: Apollo, Inc. Contract Award: 8/17/01 Contract Cost: $319,768.96 Amt. This Payment: -0- The above total contract cost is for construction only and does not include engineering and other costs. Resolution Ordinance Other (Specify) Final Estimate Contract Mail to (name and address): Phone: Funding Source Domestic Water Improvement APPROVED FOR SUBMITTAL: j City Manager STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Accept the project and approve the attached final estimate. BOARD /COMMISSION RECOMMENDATION: COUNCIL ACTION: Standard Motion V -B was adopted. AMILATIVIV .L1F1CATE FOR PAYMENT, AIA DOCUMENT 2 CUST: CITY OF YAKIMA JOB:NACHES RIVER WATER TREATMENT APPLICATION NO: 9 Page: 1 129 NORTH SECOND STREET C/O APOLLO, INC. INVOICE NO : 1752- A150 6390 U.S. - HWY 12 PERIOD ENDING : 06/30/02 YAKIMA WA 98901 YAKIMA, WA 98908 FROM: APOLLO, INC. ARCHITECT :CITY OF YAKIMA CONTRACT NO: P.O. BOX 7305 129 NORTH SECOND STREET CONTRACT DATE: 08/17/01 KENNEWICK, WA 99336 JOB DESCRIPTION :YAKIMA FLUORIDATION SYSTEM b CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT' CHANGE ORDERS ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $ 312,468.00 TOTAL CHANGE ORDER AMOUNT $ 7,460.85 PREVIOUS TOTAL 7,460.85 .00 TOTAL CONTRACT INCLUDING CHANGE ORDERS $ 319,928.85 CURRENT AMOUNT COMPLETED TO DATE $ 319,928.85 RETAINAGE - .00 % OF WORK COMPLETED $ .00 Number Date .00 o OF STORED MATERIAL COMPLETED TO DATE LESS RETAINAGE $ 319,928.85 PREVIOUS AMOUNT BILLED $ 303,780,51 SALES TAX $ 36 CURRENT AMOUNT DUE $ .._.16,160.49 AMOUNT REMAINING $ .00 TOTALS TO DATE 7,460.35 .00 /` NET AMOUNT 7,460.85 The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, informatiom and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current pay- ment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: State of County of Subscribed and sworn to before me this date of ,20_ Notary Public: By: �` � DATE: My Commision expires: ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on -site observations and the data comprising the above application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. AMOUNT CERTIFIED $ ARCHITECT: By :, Date: This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. su 3 0 z0P2 (' nt J« ) DELTA DENTAL' I - _- - - Washington Dental Service Foundation � i 1 2 July 8, 2002 != Anne Napier Caffery President /CEO Yakima Valley Memorial Hospital Foundation 2701 Tieton Drive Yakima, WA 98902 Dear Ms. Caffery: We have been informed by the City of Yakima that they began community water fluoridation in April 2002, following certification of the system by the Washington State Department of Health. We would like to congratulate the Memorial Foundation and the City of Yakima on the completion of this important health improvement project. At this time, we are sending the final payment of the Washington Dental Service Foundation grant to support the implementation of community water fluoridation in Yakima. Enclosed is a check for $59,937, which combined with our pre- completion payment of $119,875 in November 2001, completes our agreement to provide financial assistance of $179,812 to the citizens of Yakima to assist with the implementation of a water system that is optimally fluoridated to reduce oral health disease in the community. As mentioned previously and in our grant agreement, the Foundation requires the organization to which a grant was made to send a receipt for grant funds immediately. For your convenience, you may sign the second page of this letter and return it in the enclosed postage -paid envelope. We also look forward to receiving the City's final report that covers an accounting of expenses covered by the grant funds and a project evaluation by September 1, 2002. The Washington Dental Service Foundation became involved with the fluoridation project back in the fall of 1997, with the goal of assisting the Yakima County Children's Oral Health Coalition with its efforts to reduce the rate of cavities and oral health disease in Yakima County. The coalition and the Yakima community are well on the way to achieving this important goal with the implementation of the City's community water fluoridation adjustment and the Washington Dental Service Foundation has been pleased to support other projects, such as the Mom & Me Program, that will help achieve our mutual prevention goals. w - ._ W � f Anne Napier Caffery Page Two July 8, 2002 As you know, the fluoridation project would not have been possible without the countless hours of support and energy given to the process by all the supporters of community water fluoridation in Yakima, including (but not limited to) Russell Maier and the Yakima County Children's Oral Health Coalition, Pat Brown, DSHS, John Vornbrock, Gail Weaver and Yakima Memorial Hospital, Doran Riehi, DDS, Emily Firman and all the volunteers from the Yakima Citizens for Healthy Teeth. A special word of thanks to you and your staff, especially Rhonda Stone, for all the hard work and persistence on this project through the years. It has been a long journey, but well worth the effort. Sincerely, ,- J Tracy E. Garland President and CEO Enclosure cc: Karen Roberts, City Clerk, Yakima Dave Brown, Water and Irrigation Department, Yakima Russell Maier, MD Gail Weaver Received by: Signature Date ** *Please sign and return a copy to confirm receipt of check.*** r( (\( Fluoride Grant Status Granting Agency Amount of Grant Amount in Hand Washington Dental Service Foundation $179,812.00 Washington Dental Service Foundation $30,000.00 $30,000.00 Memorial Hospital $10,000.00 $10,000 00 Memorial Foundation $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Rotary of Yakima $2,000 00 $2,000 00 Total $231,812.00 $52,000.00 GRANT FUNDS SECURED TO DATE Re: Fluoridation System Date: November 1, 2001 Information re: Costs provided by Dave Brown, Aug. 14, 2001: Apparent low bid [for fluoride system] was $337,152.97 Engineering Design Cost was $65,792.62 City spent this money last year First Year Chemical will be about $25,000.00 This could be reduced some as we only need two months worth Total cost including expenses to -date $427,945.59 Committed grant funds $256,000 00 Hopeful grants $67,000.00 Total grants $323,000.00 Grants Short $104,945 59 Available funds from City $113,000 00 Information re: Grants provided by Rhonda Stone, Sept. 28, 2001: WA Dental Service Fnd. /Gr 1 $179,812 secured The Memorial Foundation $ 10,000 secured Memorial Hospital 10,000 secured WA Dental Service Fnd. 30,000 secured Lorene Petrie Trust 30,000 NO (inquiry made /declined) Paul Allen Charitable Fnd. 30,000 NO (application submitted /declined) Bill and Melinda Gates Fnd. 30,000 NO (letter of inquiry submitted /declined) Providence Foundation 10,000 NO (direct contact made /declined) Sisters of Providence NO Rotary of Yakima 2,000 secured (reduced from $10,000 request) United Way 10,000 NO (application submitted /declined) Washington State Legislature $100,000 NO (legislators pursuedunsuccessful) Group Health Fnd. / Fluoride supply $ 27,000 NO (application submitted /declined) FUNDING SYSTEM COST Grants Secured: $231,812 Apparent Low Bid: $337,152.97 City Contribution: 113,000 Engin. /1 Yr. Chem.: 90,792.62 TOTAL 344,812 TOTAL $427,945.59 SHORTFALL: $ 83,133.59* *NOTE. In April 2001, when we reported a potential $75,000 shortfall, estimated costs were $418,000 -- $9,945.59 less than actual costs reflected above under "System cost" Alternative Funding Sources Suggested Earlier: Kiwanis $ 5,000 Unknown Foundation Northwest (Spokane) $10,000 Would take 6 -12 months /unlikely with system completed. Funding Ideas Suggested by Others: YMCA -YWCA Does not fund this type of project Lions Club Unknown Masons Unknown Junior League Next grant award Jan. 2002; Formal program limits gifts to $2,500 ADDENDUM NO. 1 TO THE BID DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CITY OF YAKIMA, WA for City of Yakima Fluoridation System BID OPENING: August 14, 2:00 p.m., City Hall Council Chambers TO THE ATTENTION OF ALL BIDDERS AND PLAN HOLDERS: The Bid & Contract Documents shall be modified as follows: SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENT SEALER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. A clear water repellent sealer application to vertical surfaces of exposed above grade exterior concrete where indicated and all exterior and interior concrete masonry units (CMU) surfaces that are not painted. B. Locations For Clear Water Repellent Sealer: 1. Generator Building: Interior and exterior exposed CMU and concrete vertical surfaces. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03310: Reinforcing Steel, Cast -In -Place Concrete and Concrete Finishes 2. Section 04220: Concrete Masonry Unit 3. Section 07900: Joint Sealants 4. Section 09900: Painting 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. Include Material Infoiniation Sheet for all products. 2. Manufacturer's five -year warranty for Water Repellent Sealer. 07190-1 Water Repellent Sealer 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Apply water repellent sealer by a licensed Waterproofing Specialty Contractor exclusively engaged in applying waterproofing materials, sealers and sealants. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the 1997 Uniform Building Code (UBC) and referenced Uniform Building Code Standards C. Trade Association Recommendations: 1. Comply with recommendations on waterproofing contained in the "Masonry Design Manual" published by the Masonry Industry Advancement Committee. 2. Comply with the Portland Cement Association recommendations for waterproofing architectural concrete. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in labeled unopened containers. B. Store all material on raised platforms protected from moisture and from contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades whose work may be damaged by sealer application. B. Protect glass and other finished surfaces with polyethylene sheeting taped in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALER A. Matenal: 1. Waterbased, penetrating clear water repellent sealer designed for lightweight concrete block and architectural concrete. 2. Not less than 18% solids content. 3. Manufacturer: HYDROZO Enviroseal Double "7" H.D, by ChemRex Inc. or equal. Specifier knows of no equal. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Water vapor transmission, ASTM E 96; Results: 80% minimum as compared to untreated samples. 2. Percent reduction of leakage, ASTM E 514 -90; Results: CMU walls 98.9% (minimum). 3. Percent Active Ingredients - no less than 18 %. 4. V.O.C. content; less than 400 grams /liter. 5. Density; 8.3 +/- 0.1 lb. /gal. 07190 -2 Water Repellent Sealer 6. Flash Point: ASTM D 3278 -82; Results: Greater than 212 degrees F. 7. Water Repellency Test: ASTM C 140; Results: 98.5% (minimum). 8. Depth of Penetration: Up to 3/8" (depending upon substrate). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF CLEAR SEALER A. Apply sealer after concrete and masonry has cured at least 30 days, and after the concrete and the masonry has been cleaned. B. Prior to applying sealer clean down all masonry and architectural concrete by scrubbing with water and masonry or concrete cleaner and bristle brushes. C. Inspect surface for cracks. Rout out all cracks 5 mils and wider and fill with a high performance joint sealant having a 20 -year life expectancy and recommended by the water repellent sealer manufacturer for use on substrates to be sealed with his sealer. Perform joint sealant work in accordance with Section 07900. D. Spray -Apply Sealer: Use airless spray equipment with recirculating type pump and perforated T -bar applicator recommended by the sealer manufacturer. DO NOT USE pressure pot spray equipment. Operate at lowest possible pressures, 20 psi maximum. Do not allow fogging or bounce -off except on tension break coat. E. Protect surfaces that are not to be coated. Cover all items not scheduled to receive the sealer, such as anodized aluminum, doors, louvers, and equipment with polyethylene sheeting; continuously seal all edges with tape. F. Apply sealer material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the density, porosity and texture of concrete and/or concrete block used. Apply enough sealer so the masonry surface appears unifoiinly wet, for each coat, for from two to five hours after application. 1. Rate of Application: Coverage as recommended by the manufacturer for porous concrete block but coverage shall not exceed 40 square feet per gallon for the first coat and 70 square feet per gallon for the second coat. 2. First Coat: Apply the first coat in two passes: the first pass, a light spray to break surface tension; the second pass, a full flood coat applied in an overlapping pattern producing a 12 -inch rundown. 3. Second Coat: After 48 hours, apply a flood coat in an overlapping pattern producing a 12 -inch rundown. END OF SECTION 07190 -3 Water Repellent Sealer Memo To: Plan Holders, Water Fluoridation System Project 1896 From: Dave Brown, Water /Irrigation Engineer Date: August 10, 2001 Re: August 9, 2001 Pre -Bid Conference Questions Question #1: What is the definition of WALTRANS on page 03310 -2 2.02 A. & 3.01 A.? Answer: WALTRANS is Washington State Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction. Question #2: Are the footings and the floor slab intended to be a monolithic pour? (Plans page S -2) Answer: They may be poured separately. See Sheet S1,Number 8D: "Wherever construction joints are required but not shown, submit details for review prior to starting work on forms or reinforcing ". Question #3: What material should the replacement pipe be? (Plans page M-4 Detail 1 and Appendix B of the specifications) Answer: Schedule 40 Galvanized Iron Pipe. Question #4 Is the Acoustement Thermal Insulation (Spray Applied Cement Plaster) to be applied to the CMU only? (Plans page A -1 Sections 1 & 2) (Specifications Section 09210) Water /Irrigation Division; 509- 575 -6204; Fax 509 - 575 -6187 dbrown @ci.yakima.wa.us Answer: The Acoustement Thermal Insulation (Spray Applied Cement Plaster) shall be applied to all portions of the vertical interior walls. Question #5 Should the Bond Beams be every 3' 0" or every 4" 0 "? (plans page S -1 Note 2) Answer: Bond Beams shall be placed as per Plans page S -1 Note 2. • Page 2 - BIDDOCUMENTS Invitation to Bid ❑ Proposal Form ❑ Proposal Signature Sheet ❑ Bid Bond Form ❑ Non - Collusion Declaration ❑ Subcontractor List ❑ Bidder's Check List ❑ Nondiscrimination Provision = Women and Minority Business Enterprise Policy ❑ Resolution D -4816 ❑ Affirmative Action Plan ❑ Pre -Award Information ❑ MBE/WBE Form ❑ October 2000 006017.01 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that sealed bids will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Yakima, 129 North 2nd Street, Yakima, Washington, 98901 of Yakima, until 2:00 P.M. on August 14, 2001 and will then and there be opened and publicly read for the construction of CITY OF YAKIMA WATER FLUORIDATION SYSTEM CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 1896 The project consists of the following work including but not limited to: This project includes all labor, materials, and equipment for the construction of a water fluoridation system. The system includes a chemical building with heating and ventilation, a fluoride storage tank, a secondary containment tank and a chemical feeding system with all appurtenances and piping. Associated work includes supply and installation of fluoride monitoring equipment in the Water Treatment Plant building and in the Gleed Water Pump Station. Additional work in the Water treatment Plant building includes plumbing improvements, installation of the fluoride injector and appurtenances and replacement of an owner supplied water meter. Programming of instrumentation and controls associated with this project is not the Contractor's responsibility. The extent of the work is shown and described in the Plans and Specifications for the City of Yakima Water Fluoridation System, Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, dated October 2000. Plans and specifications may be obtained at the Office of the City Engineer located at 129 North 2nd Street upon payment of the amount of $50.00 for each set, non refundable. Each bid or proposal must be accompanied by cash, bond, or a certified check, payable to the order of the City Treasurer of the City of Yakima, for the sum of not less than 5% of said bid or proposal and none will be considered unless accompanied by such deposit, to be forfeited to the City of Yakima in the event the successful bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into a contract with the City for the making and construction of the aforesaid improvement. All bids or proposals must be in writing, sealed, and filed with the City Clerk on or before the day and hour mentioned. A pre -bid conference will be held at Naches River Water Treatment Plsnt, 6390 U. S. Highway 12, Yakima, Washington 98908 (509) 575 -6177 at 2:00 p.m. on August 9, 2001. The conference will feature project discussion, DBE Contractor participation, and the Affirmative Action Plan. The City of Yakima in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000 -4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color or national origin in consideration for an award. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and proposals. DATED this 25 day of July, 2001 (SEAL) KAREN ROBERTS CITY CLERK PUBLISH: July 30, 2001 August 6, 2001 PROPOSAL To the City Clerk Yakima, Washington This certifies that the undersigned has examined the location of CITY OF YAKIMA FLUORIDATION SYSTEM CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 1896 and that the Plans, Specifications, and Contract governing the work embraced in this improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work, is understood. The undersigned hereby proposes to undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement, or as much thereof as can be completed with the money available, in accordance with the said Plans, Specifications, and Contract, and the following schedule of rates and prices. NOTE: Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and total amount of bid shall be shown and shall be written in ink or typed. Show unit prices in figures only. Figures written to the right of the dot (decimal) in the dollars column shall be considered as cents. October 2000 006017.01 Proposal 1 UNIT PRICE BID SCHEDULE (NOTE: Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and total amount of bid must be shown.) CITY OF YAKIMA CITY OF TAKIMA WATER FLUORIDATION SYSTEM City of Yakima Project No. 1896 Base Bid Description of Base Bid Item Bid Item Item (Based Bid Item Price to be written in words) Price 1 Mobiliz -tion , p 7 it LA 14 At: .4g1 # . St _A Il .. h I ,...,. .A c AMEN 1 , 1 %Al doll $ f �" a (words) (figures) 2 Demobiliz tion dollars $ 7q 7. (words) (figures) 3 Si - Work A. '. r a slei / dollars '• 4 27 words fi• ures 4 Fluoride Building including concrete, CMU walls, insulation, do��� HVAC, g� ing a �t�l ci G • ding col; other • •en� pt � , 9 ,t .I ' 1 1J O A /AI mi ma dollars $ l C� (words fi. u res 5 Piping and valves including metering pum• appurtenances, injector an• pipe supports / 7� Ojs TAY J . /ice A'' /' / / '. '.'`_/ dollars $ 217, �C' 9•00 (words) (figures) 6 Electrical work associated with the new fluoride building and improvements inside ` the existing Water Plant and the Gleed Py m tatio 7 4 (Al h ( �'ec J dollars $34' SOS• Q (words) (figures) 7 Miscellaneous Equipment (excluding Base Bid Items) One., dollars $ 1, 00 (words) (figures) 8 Furnish all Major Instruments and Equipment as listed below (Ma'.,- •uipm-nt Sc fdule) for the I mp surn •n o i / -'1 , )e:►tJ J > /l 0 I _ ' . -n �°J� dr .. ' F / A dollars $ 5��, . 0 (words) (figures) October 2000 Bid Documents 006017.01 Proposal 2 Sub Total Base Bid iTti! l . ,11;�1'Rili l��Y" i.'r► l�T�Ci ., • ••' I e li dollars $ Reg (Words)( q� (�ufes) 7.9 °A) State Sales Ta D A O. i ! S [C 'f V tea ( �7 dollars •rds fi. ures Grand Total Base Bid 14 ? Wilifiellifflif.M2iiihnairli •% ; Zlil 71 W 17 "" W'.W dollars $ 33Z f (words) (figures) Lowest Bidder will be determined on the basis of Base Bid and the Owner - accepted Alternates(s). The Bidder will submit bid amounts for the following Owner - selected major equipment. Owner - selected equipment is shown on the Major Equipment Schedule below. If the Bidder submits proposals for furnishing substitute or Proposed Equivalent ( "or equal ") equipment or systems, the substitute proposed shall be equal in quality, construction, function, performance and efficiency to the Owner - selected items. Alternatives to the base bid items shall include the cost of all necessary modifications to foundations, structures, piping, electrical service and controls to provide a complete, installed functioning unit equal to the first specified item in accordance with the General Conditions. Selection of Proposed Equivalent equipment or material will be at the sole option of the Owner and will be made after award and execution of the contract and upon the basis of a written change order. In the event that "or equal" equipment is accepted by the Engineer or Owner, the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by Change Order in the amount of the price differential quoted by the Bidder in the space provided on this list. Any schedule delays caused by selection of an "or equal" or substitute other than the Owner - selected item(s) in the Major Equipment Schedule will not constitute grounds for a contract adjustment. Major Equipment Schedule Section 13416 Description: Chemical Storage Tanks (T1 and T2) Quantity: 1 Item Manufacturer Model Amount Bid A Poly Processing Company /9 Section 13200 Description: Secondary Containment Tank Quantity: 1 Item Manufacturer Model Amount Bid A Edwards Fiberglass, Inc. /315-71,40 B Xerxes Corporation October 2000 Bid Documents 006017.01 Proposal 3 Section 17110 Description: Fluoride Sensor and Analyzer Quantity: 2 Item Manufacturer Model Amount Bid A Foxboro / r / ((,, . too Section 11240 Description: Chemical Feed Equipment Quantity: 1 Item Manufacturer Model Amount Bid A Wallace and Tiernan B Penn Process Hydroflo Section 11216 Description: Transfer Pump Quantity: 1 Item ( Manufacturer Model Amount Bid A Ansimag U,141YACki eryi 4, Total of Lowest Priced Owner -Named Manufacturers (Exclusive of Bidder Proposed or Equal Manufacturers) 147 310- Listed on the Major Equipment Schedule, j 1 Exclusive of Washington State Sales Tax 4 Lowest Bidder will be determined on the basis of Base Bid. October 2000 Bid Documents 006017 01 PROPOSAL SIGNATURE SHEET CITY OF YAKIMA FLUORIDATION SYSTEM CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 1896 Receipt is hereby acknowledged of addendum(s) No ! , and tAr (Bidder) PROPOSAL MUST BE SIGNED B �. ..► '-- A2/671/5 / 2001 uthorize Official) / 0 / / ,4- D dht Address /l `7/ /& & Ji GA,A 33 / 0 4 1 (Phone Number) (Fax Number) (Washington State Registration Number) NOTE: (1) If the bidder is a co- partner ship, so state, giving firm name under which business is transacted. (2) If the bidder is a corporation, this proposal must be executed by its dully authorized officials (3) If no bid is submitted, kindly mark "NO BID" and return to: Yakima City Clerk Yakima City Hall 129 Nort5h Second Street Yakima, WA 98901 I I BID BOND FORM Herewith find deposit in the form of bl certified check, cashiers check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of $ ,,._ ...m hich amount is not less than five percent of the total bid. '+ Sign Her+E« .a.. ... ...mu. e as �.d.. .a v . ,. ..ww w«�nYU r., Yr■Y.. « +— .•-. -. ... .. .,.. .... .. .. .e swYr Y g BID BOND I KNOW ALL MEN SY THESE PRESPNT$» That we Apollo, Inc . 0 principal, 1111 end United States 'Fidelity' idelit and Guarant co. as Surety, am held and firmly bound unto the City of Yakima, as Obligee, in the penal sum of 5% of Total Bid Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themseiv = -. , their heirs, executors, administrakirs, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. I The condition of this obligation is such that it the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for Water F l our id a t i o n Sy s t e m .. according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee In a w b rdance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or I Sureties app by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in - . of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the OM - the penal am. - of the d a : = t specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise It shall be and remain in full force and e ' .. and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS _. 14t. A fr , ' ug 2001 , Principal I 7 • Kenn t J. Su Fr h ck, Attorney -in -Fact 10 Received return of deposit in the surn of I . a.. . 01 0 VW Snail POWER OF ATTORNEY Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Lrsurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Power of Attorney No. 21742 Certificate No. 7 �t v 0 S C : ate ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the la ws of the State of New York, and that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Kenneth J. Frick, Donna S. Martinez, Ashley T. Miller and Howard S. Underwood Yakima Washington of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to .be signed and sealed this 14th day of April , 2000 Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company s ,suwrr d al {�,� roc *,a i k , } ,`.,a+ xs . 4 ow 4 i .ti ty 0 y 4 o � � <CO0.PORATe ty, € 1,f O p0.POkAT f ' 1� I NC � JOHN F PHINNEY, Vice President �Y` G ��a{ n 1927 1,t + — ms ; a ',-.% t rf0 1977 1 g S * �`SE11L�o% ; < 9 5 1 N��OFnE 9 * ... � � s�sNr'�r ' `- 5,..... ''* l AtN �'b /d . . ....0 4 ~ .t�/ 94' / � "��2./.l State of Maryland City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary On this 14th day of April , 2000 , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F Phinney and Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty hrsurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of said Companies, and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. <r., •0 J ; / t In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal � � V8 "Z 2 My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. pyEaTV `P REBECCA EASLEY - ONOKALA, Notary Public 86203 Rev 7 -2000 Printed in U S.A. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. r'aul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, undcrtheirre respective designations. �Yc�uvc ucarguauuns. Tire signatuie of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attorney(s) -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached, and RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attorney(s) -in -Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s) -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 14 t h day of Aug . 2 0 01 Slr9E'Ty 41"4:4144% �,.N iN J py IHSUgq., 050YA� ,;pH. .... IA g'' lryr p L S p � . , CO PPO RAJt - .�pPYORATf: A i W {,, A)RATED'q w y92a ul t, SEAL ''' SBA.L.� 1 .n 18 1977 1951 4 . q�, t * 7 S` J 2 Y( oFh ea !S r fs tH1 r p� Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1 -800- 421 -3880 and ask for the Power of Attorney clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number, the above - named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. NON - COLLUSION DECLARATION I, by signing the proposal, hereby declare, under penalty of perjury under the laws of the United States, that the following statements are true and correct: 1. That the undersigned person(s), firm, association, or corporation has (have) not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the project for which this proposal is submitted. 2. That by signing the signature page of this proposal, I am deemed to have signed and have agreed to the provisions of this declaration. NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS To report bid rigging activities, call: 1- 800 -424 -9071 The U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) operates the above toll -free "hotline" Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. eastern time. Anyone with knowledge of possible bid rigging, bidder collusion, or other fraudulent activities should use the "hotline" to report such activities. The "hotline" is part of USDOT's continuing effort to identify and investigate highway construction contract fraud and abuse and is operated under the direction of the USDOT Inspector General. All information will be treated confidentially and caller anonymity will be respected. October 2000 006017.01 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST Prepared in compliance with RCW 39.30.060 To be Submitted with the Bid Proposal CITY OF YAKIMA FLUORIDATION SYSTEM CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 1896 The following listed bid items (listed in numerical order) for this project have been proposed for subcontracting to subcontractors as indicated for: Subcontractor Name Vat lei O Item Numbers (e Subcontractor Name '° _ - 0\..3- 0 Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers p (.,A) y� Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Bid item umbers to be performed by the prime contractor Pri e Contractor Name e Item Numbers \ ?. °I u October 2000 006017.01 BIDDER'S CHECK LIST The bidder's attention is especially called to the following forms which must be executed, as required, and submitted on the form bound in the Contract Documents: A. PROPOSAL The unit prices, extensions, and total amounts bid must be shown in the space provided. B. PROPOSAL SIGNATURE SHEET To be filled in and signed by the bidder. C. BOND ACCOMPANYING BID This bid form is to be executed by the bidder and surety company unless bid is accompanied by a certified check. The amount of this bond shall be not less than 5% of the total amount bid and may be shown in dollars or on a percentage basis. D. BIDDERS DATA FORM To be completed and submitted with bid. E. SUBCONTRACTOR LIST This form must be filled in. Failure to provide this information will render the bid non- responsive. F. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN The bidder's certification on page 4 of "Requirement - An Affirmative Action Plan" must be filled in and signed by the bidder. Failure to submit the certification will render the bid non - responsive. The following forms are to be executed after the Contract is awarded: A. CONTRACT This agreement to be executed by the successful bidder. B. PERFORMANCE BOND To be executed by the successful bidder and his surety company. C. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Refer to attached informational Certificate of Insurance and Additional Insured Endorsement. October 2000 006017.01 NON - DISCRIMINATION PROVISION During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin. (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies involved as provided in Executive Order No 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law (7) The contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders 01 the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance Provided however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States." October 2000 006017 01 CITY OF YAKIMA WOMEN AND MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLICY It is the policy of the City of Yakima that women and minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of work relating to the City's activities. To this end, the City is committed to take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations to ensure women and minority business enterprises the maximum opportunity to compete for and to perform contracts. In order to enhance opportunities for women and minority businesses to participate in certain contractor opportunities with the City of Yakima, and as a recipient of federal and state financial assistance, the City is committed to a women and minority business enterprise utilization program. The City is determined to maximize women and minority business opportunities through participation in the competitive bidding process through women and minority business enterprise affirmative action programs administratively established by the City Manager and monitored and implemented in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations. All women and minority business enterprise programs shall include specific goals for participation of women and minority businesses in City projects of at least ten percent (10 %) of the total dollar value of City contract over $10,000. Goals shall be reviewed and updated annually by the City Manager for applicability and to ensure that the intent of this policy is accomplished. This statement of policy will be widely disseminated to all managers, supervisors, minorities and women employed by the City of Yakima as well as to contractors, vendors, suppliers, minorities and women who may seek the City's procurement and construction contracts related to the women and minority business enterprise programs. Contractors associations will be made aware of construction projects affected by this policy through all available avenues to assure that plans /specifications, bid forms and invitations to bid are as widely distributed as possible. October 2000 006017.01 RESOLUTION NO. D " 1 18 1 6 A RESOLUTION adopting a "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" for the City of Yakima. WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is the recipient of federal and state assistance which assistance carries with it the obli- gation of contracting with Women And Minority Business Enter- prises for the performance of public works, and WHEREAS, it is the intention of the City of Yakima that Women And Minority Business Enterprises shall have the maximum practicable opportunity to participate in the performance of such public works, and WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is determined to maximize Women And Minority Business Enterprise opportunities for parti- cipation in its competitive bidding process through the adoption of the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" statement attached hereto, now, therefore, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF YAKIMA: The City Council hereby adopts the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy ", a copy of which is attached hereto and by reference made a part hereof. '��QQ 9 • ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL this �, $ L_ day of 0 c- A..t._.- , 1983. '' Ci li yvv., A. Ci re A Atv„).-t 1 3Nctit_Q Mayor ATTEST: 7 ' ) L Cit Clerk October 2000 006017 01 CITY OF YAKIMA AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN The bidders, contractors and subcontractors will not be eligible for award of a contract under this Advertisement for Bids unless it certifies as prescribed, that it adopts the minimum goals and timetable of minority and women workforce utilization and specific affirmative action steps as set forth by the City of Yakima. This is directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization by means of applying good faith efforts to carrying out such steps. However, no contractor or subcontractor shall be found to be in noncompliance solely on account of its failure to meet its goals within its timetables, but such contractor shall be given the opportunity to demonstrate that it has instituted all of the specific affirmative action steps specified by the City of Yakima, and has made every good faith effort to make these steps work toward the attainment of its goals, all to the purpose of expanding minority and women workforce utilization on all of its projects in the City of Yakima, Washington. In all cases, the compliance of a bidder, contractor or subcontractor will be determined in accordance with its respective obligations under the terms of these Bid Conditions. All bidders and all contractors and subcontractors performing or to perform work on projects subject to these Bid Conditions hereby agree to inform their subcontractors of their respective obligations under the terms and requirements of these Bid Conditions, including the provisions relating to goals of minority and women employment and training. Specific Affirmative Action Steps Bidders, contractors and subcontractors subject to this contract must engage in affirmative action directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization, which is at least as extensive and as specific as the following steps: a. The contractor shall notify community organizations that the contractor has employment opportunities available and shall maintain records of the organizations= response. b The contractor shall maintain a file of the names and addresses of each minority and women worker referred to him and what action was taken with respect to each such referred worker, and if the worker was not employed, the reasons therefore. If such worker was not sent to the union hiring hall for referral or if such worker was not employed by the contractor, the contractor =s file shall document this and the reasons therefore. c. The contractor shall promptly notify the City of Yakima Engineering Division an Contract Compliance Officer when the union or unions with whom the contractor has collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the contractor a minority or woman worker sent by the contractor or the contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded him in his efforts to meet his goal. October 2000 006017.01 d. The contractor shall participate in training programs in the area, especially those funded by the Department of Labor. A_ _ The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy within his own organization by including it in any policy manual; by publicizing it in company newspapers, annual reports, etc., by conducting staff, employee and union representatives = meetings to explain and discuss the policy; by posting of the policy; and by specific review of the policy with minority employees. f. The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy externally by informing and discussing it with all recruitment sources; by advertising in news media, specifically including minority news media; and by notifying and discussing it with all subcontractors and suppliers. g. The contractor shall make specific efforts and constant personal (both written and oral) recruitment efforts directed at all minority or women organizations, schools with minority students, minority recruitment organizations and minority training organizations, within the contractor =s recruitment areas. h. The contractor shall make specific efforts to encourage present minority employees to recruit their friends and relatives. i. The contractor shall validate all man specifications; selection requirements, tests, etc. j. The contractor shall make every effort to promote after school, summer and vacation employment to minority youth. k. The contractor shall develop on- the -job training opportunities and participate and assist in any association or employer group training programs relevant to the contractor =s employee needs consistent with its obligations under this bid. I. The contractor shall continually inventory and evaluate all minority and women personnel for promotion opportunities and encourage minority and women employees to seek such opportunities. m. The contractor shall make sure that seniority practices, job classifications, etc., do no have a discriminatory effect. n. The contractor shall make certain that all facilities and company activities are non- segregated. o. The contractor shall continually monitor all personnel activities to ensure that his EEO policy is being carried out. p. The contractor shall solicit bids for subcontracts from available minority and women subcontractors, engaged in the trades covered by these Bid Conditions, including circulation of minority and women contractor associations. q Non cooperation: In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a October 2000 006017.01 reasonable flow of minority and women referrals within the time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreements, the contractor shall, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin, making full efforts to obtain qualified and /or qualifiable minorities and women. (The U.S. Department of Labor has held that it shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority or women employees.) In the event the union referral practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246 and 23 CFR Part 230 as amended, and the Standard Specifications, such contractor shall immediately notify the City of Yakima Engineering Department or the City of Yakima Compliance Officer. October 2000 006017.01 BIDDERS CERTIFICATION A bidder will not be eligible for award of a contract under this invitation for bids unless such bidder has submitted as a part of its bid the following certification, which will be deemed a part of the resulting contract. BIDDERS CERTIFICATION e - • Certifies that: 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the contract 4 I P v and; as to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non - federal) in the Yakima, Washington area subject to these Bid Conditions, those trades being: >,,..'' • ` ` -: ' - iii • • cn 4 , , , 6 I ev` and; 2. It will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or administering agency prior to the award of any sub - contract under this contract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid Conditions. / 0 11P d7 / 7 ( ature of Authorized Representative of Bidder) October 2000 006017.01 Subcontractors' Certification is not required at the time of bid. This Certification must be completed by each subcontractor prior to award of any subcontract. SUBCONTRACTORS' CERTIFICATION Certifies that: (SUBCONTRACTOR) 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the subcontract and; As to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non - federal) in Yakima, Washington, subject to these Bid Condition, those trades being: and; 2. It will obtain from each of its subcontractor prior to the award of any subcontract under this subcontract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid conditions. (Signature of Authorized Representative of Subcontractor) October 2000 006017.01 Materially and Responsiveness The certification required to be made by the bidder pursuant to these Bid Conditions is material, and will govern the bidder's performance on the project and will be made a part of this bid. Failure to submit the certification will render the bid non responsive. Compliance and Enforcement Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractor (regardless of tier) as to their respective obligations under the conditions of the contract here (as applicable). Bidders, contractors and subcontractors hereby agree to refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246, as amended on September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or construction contracts pursuant to Executive Order. The bidder, contractor or subcontractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered by the administering agency, the contracting agency or the Office of Federal Contract Compliance pursuant to the Executive Order. Any bidder, or contractor or subcontractor who shall fail to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be deemed to be in non - compliance with these Bid Conditions and Executive Order 11246, as amended Nothing herein is intended to relieve any contractor or subcontractor during the term of its contract on this project from compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the Equal Opportunity Clause of its contract. Violation of any substantial requirement in the affirmative action plan by a contractor or subcontractor covered by these Bid Conditions including the failure of such contractor or subcontractor to make a good faith effort to meet it fair share of the trade's goals of minority and women workforce utilization, and shall be grounds for imposition of the sanctions and penalties provided at Section 209 (a) of Executive Order 11246, as amended. Each agency shall review its contractors' and subcontractors' employment practices during the performance of the contract. If the agency determines that the affirmative action plan no longer represents effective affirmative action, it shall so notify the Office of Federal Contract Compliance which shall be solely responsible for any final determination of that question and the consequences thereof. In regard to these conditions, if the contractor or subcontractor meets its goals or if the contractor or subcontractor can demonstrate that it has made every good faith effort to meet those goals, the contractor of the subcontractor shall be presumed to be in compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its obligations under these Bid Conditions and no formal sanctions or proceedings leading toward sanctions shall be instituted unless the agency otherwise determines that the contractor or subcontractor is not providing equal employment opportunities. In judging whether a contractor or subcontractor has met its goals, the agency will consider each contractor's or subcontractor's minority and women workforce utilization and will not take into consideration the minority and women workforce utilization of its subcontractors. Where the agency finds that the contractor or subcontractor has failed to comply with the requirement of Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its October 2000 006017.01 obligations under these Bid Conditions, the agency shall take such action and impose such sanctions as may be appropriate under Executive Order and the regulations. When the agency proceeds with such formal action, it has the burden of proving that the contractor has not met the requirement of these Bid Conditions, but the contractor's failure to meet his goals shall shift to him the requirement to come forward with evidence to show that he has met the "good faith" requirements of these Bid Conditions by instituting at least the Specific Affirmative Action steps listed above and by making every good faith effort to make those steps work toward the attainment of its goals within its timetables. The tendency of such formal proceedings shall be taken into consideration by Federal agencies in determining whether such contractor or subcontractor can comply with the requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and is therefore a "responsible prospective contractor" within the meaning of the Federal Procurement Regulations. It shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority and women employees. The procedures set forth in these conditions shall not apply to any contract when the head of the contracting or administering agency determines that such contract is essential to the national security and that its award without following such procedures is necessary to the national security. Upon making such a determination, the agency head will notify, in writing, the Director of the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance within thirty days. Requests for exemptions from these Bid conditions must be made in writing, with justification, to the: Director Office of Federal Contractor Compliance U.S. Department of Labor Washington, D.C. 20210 and shall be forwarded through and with the endorsement of the agency head. Contractors and subcontractors must keep such records and file such reports relating to the provisions of these Bid Conditions as shall be required by the contracting or administering agency or the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance. October 2000 006017.01 PRE -AWARD INFORMATION Before awarding any contract, the City will require the following documentation regarding efforts to maximize the opportunity for Women and Minority Business Enterprises and Women and Minority Workforce Utilization in the performance of this project: ! Identify the MBEs and WBEs used to fulfill the City's WMBE goal of 10 %. ! Identify the subcontractors with the percentage of work they will do. ! Furnish an Affirmative Action profile, by ethnic category, on subcontractor's employees proposed to be utilized to do the subcontract work. ! Furnish an Affirmative Action profile, by ethnic category, on the low bidder's employees proposed to be utilized to do the contract work. The above information will be requested by the City of the low bidder prior to award of the Contract. The City will provide the four -page form, a copy of which immediately follows. Please do not submit this form with your bid package. October 2000 006017.01 1 of 4 MBEIWBE FORM - 5/95 Date: To: City of Yakima, Engineering Division 129 No. 2nd Street Yakima, WA 98901 Attn: Mr. Dave Brown, Water /Irrigation Engineer Re: Public Works Project, Project No. 1896 We are submitting the following information and documentation regarding Minority and Women Work Force Utilization and Women and Minority Business Enterprises prior to award of the above contract as required under Section 1- 02.15, Pre -Award Information of the Special Provisions. 7. A. Identify the MBE's or WBE's used to fulfill the City's WMBE goal of 10 %. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE will accomplish Percent of bid items to total bid (without sales tax): % Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE will accomplish Percent of bid items to total bid (without sales tax): _% Total percent of MBE/WBE bid items in project (without sales tax): % October 2000 006017.01 2 of 4 MBENVBE FORM - 5/95 (If total percent of MBENVBE bid items in project are not at or above the City's goal of 10 %, provide the information and documentation required in section 7. B.) 7. B. Identify the MBE's or WBE's contacted for subcontractor work: 7. B. 1. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Contact Person: Phone Number: Bid items above MBE/WBE was requested to quote: Reasons for not selecting: Documentation regarding MBE/WBE contact is attached: YES NO 7. B. 2. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE was requested to quote: Reasons for not selecting: Documentation regarding MBE/WBE contact is attached: YES NO 7. B. 3. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE was requested to quote: Reasons for not selecting: Documentation regarding MBE/WBE contact is attached: YES NO October 2000 006017.01 3 of 4 MBE/WBE FORM - 5/95 7. B. 4. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE was requested to quote: Reasons for not selecting: Documentation regarding MBE/WBE contact is attached: YES NO 7. B. 5. Name of MBE/WBE Certification No. Bid items above MBE/WBE was requested to quote: Reasons for not selecting: Documentation regarding MBE/WBE contact is attached: YES NO 8. Identify the subcontractors with the percentage of work they will do. Subcontractor Name Percent of Work October 2000 006017.01 4 of 4 MBEIWBE FORM - 5/95 9. Furnish an Affirmative Action profile, by ethnic category, on the subcontractor's employees proposed to be utilized to do the subcontract work. Subcontractor Name: Ethnic Category Number of Employees Black Hispanic American Indian or Alaskan Native Asian or Pacific Islander Other: White Subcontractor Name: Ethnic Category Number of Employees Black Hispanic American Indian or Alaskan Native Asian or Pacific Islander Other: White 10. Furnish an Affirmative Action profile, by ethnic category, on the bidder's employees proposed to be utilized to do the contract work. Ethnic Category Number of Employees Black Hispanic American Indian or Alaskan Native Asian or Pacific Islander Other: White e (Contractor) By: October 2000 006017.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Contract Form E Performance Bond Form Insurance Form Minimum Wage Affidavit Form , ❑ Prevailing Wage Rates 0 Benefit Code Key 0 October 2000 006017.01 CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into in to licate, this -k73 day of m , , 2001, by and between the City of Yakima, hereinafter called the Owner, and / 10 0 //o' .id , , a Washington Corporation, hereinafter called the Contractor. WITNESSETH: That in consideration of the terms and conditions contained herein and attached and made a part of this agreement, the parties hereto covenant and agree as follows: ` . . I. The Contractor shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, labor and equipment for THE BID AMOUNT OF $ '' / C / , for CITY OF YAKIMA WATER FLOURIDATION SYSTEM, CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 1896, all in accordance with, and as described in the attached plans and specifications and the 2000 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction which are by this reference incorporated herein and made a part hereof, and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this contract and every part thereof. Work shall start within ten (10) days after the Notice to Proceed and shall be completed in One Hundred Twenty (120) i..... working days. The first chargeable working day shall be the 11th working day after the date on which the City issues the Notice to Proceed. r If said work is not completed within the time specified, the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner the sum specified in the �. Standard Specifications for each and every day said work remains uncompleted after expiration of the specified time, as liquidated damages. The Contractors shall provide and bear the expense of all equipment, work and labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of materials and for constructing and completing the work provided for in this contract and every part thereof, except such as are mentioned in the specifications to be furnished by the City of Yakima. II. The City of Yakima hereby promises and agrees with the Contractor to employ, and does employ the Contractor to provide the materials and to do and cause to be done the above described work and to complete and finish the same according to the attached plans and specifications and the terms and conditions herein contained and hereby ' contracts to pay for the same according to the attached specifications and the schedule of unit or itemized prices hereto attached, at the time and in the manner and upon the conditions provided for in this contract. -- III. The Contractor for himself, and for his heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, does hereby agree to the full performance of all the covenants herein contained upon the part of the Contractor IV It is further provided that no liability shall attach to the City of Yakima by reason of entering into this contract, except as expressly provided herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed the day and year first herein . above written. Countersigned: CITY OF YAKIMA CONTRACTOR this a i day of r d. 2001. Apollo, Inc. a . Corporation Corili for I 01 ) ✓ P .4 .► By' . ,--- ,.- . - e 4.,i.. �9 r -' • Cit a :ger Attest: r �° Jesse VanSchoiack , /`° .: 1,- ., i , ,� ., (Print Name) ■ City Clerk - . , Its Vice President (President, Owner, etc.) Address: P 0 Box 7305 Kennewick, WA 99336 October 2000 . 006017.01 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND TO CITY OF YAKIMA KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: # 4 0 0 S G 4 7 0 2 01 That we, the undersigned, A. • 1. • • United States Fidelity and a WA Corporation as Principal and — uaranty o . a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of MD as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations as sure are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CITY OF YAKIMA in the penal sum of $ 3 3 7 , 1 2 . 9 or the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinances of the CITY OF YAKIMA. DATED at Yakima, Washington, this 2 3r day of A ug ' , , 2001 Never - the -less, the conditions of the above obligations are such that: WHEREAS, pursuant to action taken by the Yakima City Council on _ _, 2001, the City Manager and City Clerk of the CITY IttF YAKIMA has let or is about to let to the said po o , Inc. — , the above bounded Principal, a certain contract, the said contract being numbered 18 9 6 , and providing for Y s k i ma F 7 Qr id a t iron (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and Sys t em WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; NOW THEREFORE, if the said A • o 1 to Inc shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within sucn extensions of time as may be granted under said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, sub - contractors and material men, and all persons who shall supply said principal or sub-contractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and shall hold said CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, agents, and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any damage occasioned to any person or property by reason of any carelessness or negligence on the part of said principal, or any sub-contractor in the performance of said work and shall indemnify and hold the CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, agents, and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under said contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the CITY OF YAKIMA, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect, Apollo Inc. (Cntre Jesse VanSchoiack (Print Name) Approved as to form; • Vice President (President, Owner, etc.,,) / City Attorney) Unite, States Fidelity and Guaranty Co. ( ur >,) C By; i Ken eth J. Frick -_ (Print Name) t �.Attorney-in -Fact October 2000 006017.01 If.:1111eS1Patil POWER OF ATTORNEY Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company 0 0 11 21742 Power of Attorney No. Certificate No. 0 U , t ? F KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Kenneth J. Frick, Donna S. Martinez, Ashley T. Miller and Howard S. Underwood Yakima Washington of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 14th day of April 2000 Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company suREr d➢FdIE {: �. ! s� . " �NSOn 5YAko * /QO. axon c �° �\ Cl g COPPaFA l�i ,,, "'e:a ; ;.S . oaeoaare.e � ruc�rrto o 91 CDRPORAiED� 1927 ERL tags . s w < t 1977 1951 ra 9j Fp N 4 F° ° 1 S . AN 40 Aldo" .„, State of Maryland City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary On this 14th day of April 2000 , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F Phinney and Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of said Companies, and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. �pEAS[ �0w 2 a ! ' - e NpT o In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. � 'o'9 CrTV �a REBECCA EASLEY ONOKALA, Notary Public 86203 Rev 7 -2000 Printed in U S.A. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may he affivari by f acaimile to any Pnµ/er o Attorney nr to a n y certifi rel th a intmn Attorney for purposes s) -in - Fact or pul " Company may "' J any � " J .' any "' ... •"pp b J \"/ [. 1 ' only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so exe- cuted and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached; and RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attorney(s) -in -Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s) -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company 1, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 23rd day of Aug . 2001 . r^ � P.j �NSUq`... �giy iy,444�� `ll• 4007. 7Y y ORGUR , , , • > y APOggT .,n � (!_ 7 F a we 192 � � camaure -. j; ' �"` 6 '19JT asroaAY N9 jF * , * off AG,o - 'SEAL. ap ,14, < 9 951 of WIC' * w ;s . , „gi old rd 1. . � ' Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, cal11 -800- 421.3880 and ask for the Power of Attorney clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. ACORD J CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DAT AUG2201 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION MULVIHILL INSURANCE SERVICES ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 11 NORTH MORAIN HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR KENNEWICK WA 99336 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. PHONE: 509- 783 -8105 FAX: 509 - 735 -3512 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A MUTUAL OF ENUMCLAW INSURANCE CO INSURED COMPANY B APOLLO INC COMPANY PO BOX 7305 C KENNEWICK WA 99336 COMPANY D COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE IMM /DD/WI DATE IMM /DOnYI LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY MO28502 AUG 25 01 AUG 25 02 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS- COMP /OP AGG. $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS MADE FX OCCUR $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY _ 1,000,000 A © OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ -- 1,000,000 © NON SIMPLIFIED FORM FIRE DAMAGE (Any One Fire) $ 50,000 X STOP GAP MED. EXP (Any One Person) $ 5,000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CP10010874 AUG 25 01 AUG 25 02 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 X ANY AUTO = 't. ALL OWNED AUTOS �. /,.., 1" `C- -' BODILY INJURY A SCHEDULED AUTOS — (Per person) $ HIRED AUTOS :.,• ,'•.' _ -- BODILY INJURY " -. (Per accident) $ NON -OWNED AUTOS S -- / Yy' 9 /. .-- -r - `, � • �• PROPERTY DAMAGE $ • % .- GARAGE LIABILITY - � ' ' AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO I f OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY `� EACH ACCIDENT $ 6 � r . '• AGGREGATE $ EXCESS LIABILITY MO28502 , AUG 25 01 AUG 25 02 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 -- A X UMBRELLA FORM - AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000 - OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC STATU- ■ OTH EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY -TORY-LIMITS B EACH ACCIDENT $ THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ PARTNERS /EXECUTIVE OFFICERS ARE. EXCL DISEASE -EACH EMPLOYEE $ OTHER. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS /LOCATIONS /VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS RE: A150 CITY OF YAKIMA FLUORIDATION SYSTEM - CITY PROJECT NO 1896 CITY OF YAKIMA INCLUDING ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, AND ELECTED AND APPOINTED OFFICIALS IS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED PER ATTACHED AE01 -1 IN RESPECTS TO THE NAMED INSURED'S OPERATIONS ON THE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. PER PROJECT AGGREGATE ENDORSEMENT PER ATTACHED AE01 -2. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION - - - - -- -- - - - - -- -- - - -- - - -- - - --- --- - - - - -- SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT CITY OF YAKIMA DEPT OF COMMUNITY /ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 129 N SECOND AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE YAKIMA, WA 98901 Attention: ACORD 25-S (1/95) Certificate # 22294 MUTUAL OF ENUMCLAW INSURANCE COMPANY 1460 Wells St., Enumclaw, WA 98022 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY, PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE flat Premium Charge: 500. FLAT CHARGE ON FILE WITH COMPANY $ (If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement) 1. WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to These limits of insurance are inclusive of and include as an insured any person or organization not in addition to the limits of insurance shown (called additional insured) whom you are required to in the Declarations. add as an additional insured on this policy under a written contract or written agreement. 3. The following exclusion is added to Paragraph 2., Exclusions in COVERAGES (Section I): The written contract or written agreement must be: The insurance afforded the additional insured does a. Currently in effect or becoming effective during not apply to "bodily injury," "property damage," the term of this policy; and "personal injury," or "advertising injury" arising out of an architect's, engineer's or surveyor's b. Executed prior to the "bodily injury," "property __ rendering of or failure to render any professional damage," "personal injury," or "advertising services including: injury." a. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare 2. The insurance provided to the additional insured is or approve maps, drawings, opinions, reports, limited as follows: surveys, change orders, design or specifications; and a. That person or organization is only an additional insured with respect to liability b. Supervisory, inspection, or engineering arising out of: services. (1) Premises you own, rent, lease, or occupy; 4. Any coverage provided hereunder shall be excess ° or over any other valid and collectible insurance available to the additional insured whether primary, (2) "Your work" performed for the additional excess, contingent or any other basis unless a insured. written contract or written agreement specifically requires that this insurance is primary b. The limits of insurance applicable to the additional insured are those specified in the 5 Premium Audit written contract or written agreement or in the Declaration for this,policy, whichever are less With respect to the premium charged for this AE01 1/79 p 1 of 2 A601 - endorsement, Paragraph 5 , Premium Audit in Section IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is deleted and replaced by the following: The premium shown in the Schedule of this endorsement is not subject to audit. 6. Flat Premium Charge The following condition is added: The premium shown in the Schedule is fully earned and not subject to a refund unless this coverage is cancelled a. As of its inception date; or b. At our request; or c. And rewritten by us under another policy effective the date of cancellation; or d. Because you no longer have financial interest in the business that is subject of this insurance. Page 2 of 2 CHANGE ENDORSEMENT Mutual of Enumclaw Insurance Company Policy Number: MO28502 1480 Wells Street Enumclaw, Washington 98022 Change Number: Effective Date: 10 /25/97 12:01 A.M. Standard Time Named Insured: Agency: APOLLO INC MULVIHILL INSURANCE PO BOX Q SERVICES, INC KENNEWICK, WA 99336 Code: 0713J THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. This endorsement changes the policy on the inception date unless a different date is indicated above. AMENDMENT - AGGREGATE LIMITS OF INSURANCE PER PROJECT. THIS ENDORSEMENT MODIFIES INSURANCE PROVIDED UNDER SECTION III LIMITS OF LIABILITY. (1) THE "AGGREGATE" LIMIT IS INCREASED FROM $1,000,000 TO $2,000,000. (2) THE "AGGREGATE" LIMIT UNDER LIMITS OF INSURANCE (SECTION III) APPLIES SEPARTELY TO EACH OF YOUR PROJECTS AWAY FROM PREMISES OWNED OR RENTED TO YOU. I authorized Signature: Date: A O (- AF01 (11 95) �' MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT STATE OF WASHINGTON ) ) ss COUNTY OF YAKIMA ) I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, depose, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work, payment for which this voucher is submitted, I have paid the following rate per hour to each classification of laborers, workmen, or mechanics, as indicated upon the attached list, now referred to and by such reference incorporated in and made an integral part hereof, for all such employed in the performance of such work; and no laborer, workman or mechanic so employed upon such work has been paid less than the prevailing rate of wage or less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. Contractor Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 2001 Notary Public in and for the State of Washington residing at PREVAILING WAGE RATES The prevailing rate of wages to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 39.12 RCW, as amended. The rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries are by reference made a part of this Contract as though fully set forth herein. The current schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities where this Contract will be performed, as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, is included in these Contract Documents. Inasmuch as the CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for paying this schedule of wages, it is imperative that all contractors and subcontractors familiarize themselves with the current wage rates, as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, before submitting bids based on these Specifications. Before any payment is made by the local government body of any sums due under this Contract, the local government body must receive from the CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor a copy of the "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. Also following the acceptance of the project, the local government body must receive from the CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor a copy of "Affidavit of Wages Paid" and, in addition, from the prime contractor a copy of "Release for the Protection of Property Owners and General Contractor," all approved by the State Department of Labor and Industries. Forms may be obtained from the Department of Labor and Industries. The CONTRACTOR and each subcontractor shall pay all fees associated with and make all applications directly to the Department of Labor and Industries. These affidavits will be required before any funds retained, according to the provisions of RCW60.28.010, are released to the CONTRACTOR. Payment by the CONTRACTOR and subcontractor of any fees shall be considered incidental to the construction and all costs shall be included in other pay items of the project. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall also be required to submit certified weekly payroll forms with an accompanying Statement of Compliance so that payment of prevailing wage rates and fringe benefits may be verified. In case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and management representatives, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State and his decision thereon shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060 as amended October 2000 006017.01 State of Washington DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone (360) 902 -5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504 -4540 - Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key. YAKIMA COUNTY Effective 03 -03 -01 *********************************************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code ode ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $23.54 1 M 5D BOILERMAKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $35.96 1B 5N BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $30.42 1M 5A CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) JOURNEY LEVEL $8.45 1 CARPENTERS ACOUSTICAL WORKER $27.75 1 M 5D BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS $33.53 1M 5D CARPENTER $27.49 1 M 5D CREOSOTED MATERIAL $27.59 1M 5D DRYWALL APPLICATOR $27.49 1M 5D FLOOR FINISHER $27.62 1M 5D FLOOR LAYER $27.62 1M 5D FLOOR SANDER $27.62 1M 5D MILLWRIGHT $34.00 1 M 5D PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING $33 73 1M 5D SAWFILER $27.62 1M 5D SHINGLER $27.62 1M 5D STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR $27.62 1 M 5D STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS $27.62 1M 5D CEMENT MASONS JOURNEY LEVEL $16.85 1 DIVERS & TENDERS DIVER $71.01 1M 5D 8A DIVER TENDER $35.27 1M 5D DREDGE WORKERS ASSISTANT ENGINEER $34 12 1T 5D 8L ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND) $33 68 1T 5D 8L BOATMEN $34.12 1T 5D 8L ENGINEER WELDER $34.17 1T 5D 8L LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC $35.56 1T 5D 8L MAINTENANCE $33.68 1T 5D 8L MATES $3412 1T 50 8L OILER $33.78 1T 5D 8L DRYWALL TAPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.84 1P 5A ELECTRICIANS - INSIDE JOURNEY LEVEL $35 45 1J 5Z ELECTRICIANS - POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION CABLE SPLICER $42.16 4A 5A 8E CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $38 72 4A 5A 8E GROUNDPERSON $28.38 4A 5A BE HEAD GROUNDPERSON $29.81 4A 5A 8E HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $38.72 4A 5A 8E JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $29.81 4A 5A 8E JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON $38 72 4A 5A 8E LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $32.95 4A 5A BE POLE SPRAYER $38 72 4A 5A 8E POWDERPERSON $29.81 4A 5A 8E ELECTRONIC & TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS Page 1 YAKIMA COUNTY Effective 03 -03 -01 ********************************************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * (Sec Benefit Cede Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code JOURNEY LEVEL $12.07 1 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS CONSTRUCTOR $30.35 4A 61 MECHANIC $41.00 4A 61 MECHANIC IN CHARGE $45.26 4A 61 PROBATIONARY CONSTRUCTOR $15.80 4A 61 LABORER $6.72 1 PRODUCTION WORKER $7.15 1 FENCE ERECTORS FENCE ERECTOR $13.80 1 FENCE LABORER $11.60 1 FLAGGERS JOURNEY LEVEL $21.82 1M 5D GLAZIERS JOURNEY LEVEL $18.26 1B 61 HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS MECHANIC $34.58 1F 5C INSULATION APPLICATORS JOURNEY LEVEL $32.91 1M 5D IRONWORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $35.87 1B 5A LABORERS ASPHALT RAKER $24.02 1M 5D BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE $23.54 1M 5D BATCH WEIGHMAN $21.82 1M 5D CARPENTER TENDER $23.54 1M 5D CASSION WORKER $24.38 1M 5D CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING $24.02 1M 5D CEMENT FINISHER TENDER $23.54 1M 5D CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS) $24.02 1M 5D CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS) $23.54 1M 5D CHUCK TENDER $23.54 1M 5D CLEAN -UP LABORER $23.54 1M 5D CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER $23.54 1M 5D CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR $24.02 1M 5D CRUSHER FEEDER $21.82 1M 5D CURING LABORER $23.54 1M 50 DEMOLITION, WRECKING & MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS) $23.54 1M 5D DITCH DIGGER $23.54 1M 5D DIVER $24.38 1M 5D DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC DIAMOND) $24 02 1M 5D DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC $24.38 1M 5D DUMPMAN $23.54 1M 5D FALLER/BUCKER, CHAIN SAW $24.02 1M 5D FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (i.e., dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; NOT $19.50 1M 5D construction debris cleanup) FINE GRADERS $23.54 1M 5D FIRE WATCH $23.54 1M 5D FORM SETTER $23.54 1M 5D GABION BASKET BUILDER $23.54 1M 5D GENERAL LABORER $23.54 1M 5D GRADE CHECKER & TRANSIT PERSON $24 02 1M 5D GRINDERS $23.54 1M 5D GROUT MACHINE TENDER $23.54 1M 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A $24.38 1M 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B $24.02 1M 5D HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C $23.54 1M 5D HIGH SCALER $24.38 1M 5D Page 2 '4 YAKIMA COUNTY Effective 03 -03-01 ********************************************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code HOD CARRIER $24.02 1M 5D JACKHAMMER $24.02 1M 5D LASER BEAM OPERATOR $24.02 1M 5D MINER $24.38 1M 5D NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP, GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH $24.02 1M 5D PRESSURE AIR & WATER ON CONCRETE & ROCK, SANDBLAST, GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER PAVEMENT BREAKER $24.02 1M 5D PILOT CAR $21.82 1M 5D PIPE RELINER (NOT INSERT TYPE) $24.02 1M 5D PIPELAYER & CAULKER $24.02 1M 5D PIPELAYER & CAULKER (LEAD) $24.38 1M 5D PIPEWRAPPER $24.02 1M 5D POT TENDER $23.54 1M 5D POWDERMAN $24.38 1M 5D POWDERMAN HELPER $23.54 1M 5D POWERJACKS $24.02 1M 5D RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER) $24.02 1M 5D RE- TIMBERMAN $24.38 1M 5D RIPRAP MAN $23.54 1M 5D SIGNALMAN $23.54 1M 5D SLOPER SPRAYMAN $23.54 1M 5D SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES) $24.02 1M 5D SPREADER (CONCRETE) $24.02 1M 5D STAKE HOPPER $23.54 1M 5D STOCKPILER $23.54 1M 5D TAMPER & SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR & GAS $24.02 1M 5D TAMPER (MULTIPLE & SELF PROPELLED) $24.02 1M 5D TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE) $21.82 1M 5D TOPPER- TAILER $23.54 1M 5D TRACK LABORER $23.54 1M 5D TRACK LINER (POWER) $24.02 1M 5D TUGGER OPERATOR $24.02 1M 5D VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC) $23.54 1M 5D VIBRATOR $24.02 1M 5D WELDER $23.54 1M 5D WELL -POINT LABORER $24.02 1M 5D LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $7.38 1 LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $15.45 1 LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $7 63 1 LATHERS JOURNEY LEVEL $27.49 1M 5D PAINTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $16.75 1 PLASTERERS JOURNEY LEVEL $34.03 1R 5A PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $40.35 1Q 5A POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $32.04 1T 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YD & UNDER) $34.50 1T 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YD & UNDER 6 YD) $34.94 1T 5D 8L BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YD AND OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS) $35.44 IT 5D 8L BACKHOES, (75 HP & UNDER) $34.14 1T 5D 8L BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $34.50 IT 5D 8L BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $34.50 1T 5D 8L Page 3 YAKIMA COUNTY Effective 03 -03-01 ********************************************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE $34.50 1T 5D 8L BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE) $34 14 IT 5D 8L BOBCAT $32.04 1T 5D 8L BROOMS $32.04 IT 5D 8L BUMP CUTTER $34.50 1T 5D 8L CABLEWAYS $34.94 1T 5D 8L CHIPPER $34.50 IT 5D 8L COMPRESSORS $32.04 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE - LASER SCREED $32.04 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE PUMP -TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $34.50 1T 5D 8L CONCRETE PUMPS $34.14 1T 5D 8L CONVEYORS $34 14 IT 5D 8L CRANES, THRU 19 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $34.14 IT 5D 8L CRANES, 20 - 44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $34.50 IT 5D 8L CRANES, 45 TONS - 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH $34.94 IT 5D 8L ATACHMENTS) CRANES, 100 TONS - 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH $35.44 1T 5D 8L ATTACHMENTS) CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH $35.94 1T 5D 8L ATTACHMENTS) CRANES, A- FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $32.04 1T 5D 8L CRANES, A- FRAME, OVER 10 TON $34.14 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVER 300 TONS, OR 300' OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH $36.44 1T 5D 8L ATTACHMENTS CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (20 - 44 TONS) $34.50 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (45 - 99 TONS) $34.94 1T 5D 8L CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS & OVER) $35.44 IT 50 8 CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $35.44 IT 5D 8L CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $35.94 1T 5D 8L CRUSHERS $34.50 1T 5D 8L DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $34.50 1T 5D 8L DERRICK, BUILDING $34.94 1T 5D 8L DOZERS, D -9 & UNDER $34.14 1T 5D 8L DRILL OILERS - AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $34.14 1T 5D 8L DRILLING MACHINE $34.50 1T 5D 8L ELEVATOR AND MANLIFT, PERMANENT AND SHAFT -TYPE $32.04 1T 5D 8L EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $34.14 1T 5D 8L FINISHING MACHINE /BIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $34.50 1T 5D 8L FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $34.14 1T 5D 8L FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $32.04 1T 5D 8L GRADE ENGINEER $34.14 11" 5D 8L R„ .SIIYEL� GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $32.04 IT 5D 8L HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND MANLIFTS), AIR TUGGERS $34 14 IT 5D 8L HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $34.14 1T 5D 8L HORIZONTAL/DIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $34.50 1T 5D 8L HYDRALIFTS /BOOM TRUCKS (10 TON & UNDER) $32.04 1T 5D 8L HYDRALIFTS /BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $34.14 IT 5D 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YD UP TO 8 YD) $34.94 1T 5D 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD & OVER) $35.44 1T 5D 8L LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YD), PLANT FEED $34.50 1T 5D 8L LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $34.50 1T 5D 8L MECHANICS, ALL $34.50 1T 5D 8L MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT $34.50 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $34.50 1T 5D 8L MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON- FINISHING) $34 14 1T 5D 8L MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND /OR SHIELD $34.94 1T 5D BL OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING OPERATOR $32.04 1T 5D 8L Page 4 YAK:MA COUNTY Effective 03 -03 -01 * (See Benefit Code Key) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code PAVEMENT BREAKER $32.04 1T 5D 8L PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $34.50 1T 5D 8L PLANT OILER (ASPHALT CRUSHER) $34.14 1T 5D 8L POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $32.04 1T 5D 8L POWER PLANT $32.04 1T 5D 8L PUMPS, WATER $32.04 IT 5D 8L QUAD 9, D -10, AND HD-41 $34.94 1T 5D 8L REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH MOVING EQUIP $34.94 1T 5D 8L RIGGER AND BELLMAN $32.04 1T 5D 8L ROLLAGON $34.94 1T 5D 8L ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $32.04 IT 5D 8L ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT MATERIALS $34.14 1T 5D 8L ROTO -MILL, ROTO- GRINDER $34.50 1T 5D 8L SAWS, CONCRETE $34.14 1T 5D 8L SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING $34.50 1T 50 8L OFF -ROAD EQUIPMENT ( UNDER 45 YD) SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING $34.94 1T 5D 8L OFF -ROAD EQUIPMENT (45 YD AND OVER) SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL $34 14 IT 5D 8L SCREED MAN $34.50 1T 5D 8L SHOTCRETE GUNITE $32.04 1T 5D 8L SLIPFORM PAVERS $34.94 1T 5D 8L SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - BLAW KNOX $34.50 1T 5D 8L SUBGRADE TRIMMER $34.50 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (75 HP & UNDER) $34.14 1T 5D 8L TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP) $34.50 1T 5D 8L TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE $34.50 1T 5D 8L TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE $34.94 1T 5D 8L TRENCHING MACHINES $34.14 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER ( UNDER 100 TON) $34.14 1T 5D 8L TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON & OVER) $34.50 1T 5D 8L WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE $32.04 1T 5D 8L YO YO PAY DOZER $34.50 1T 5D 8L POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE $28.90 4A 5A SPRAY PERSON $27.34 4A 5A TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $27.72 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER $25.64 4A 5A TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON $18.70 4A 5A REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS MECHANIC $22.90 1 ROOFERS JOURNEY LEVEL $25 17 1B 51 USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $28 17 1B 51 SHEET METAL WORKERS JOURNEY LEVEL $32.77 1B 5A SOFT FLOOR LAYERS JOURNEY LEVEL $15.79 1 SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS JOURNEY LEVEL $6.72 1 5T SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION) JOURNEY LEVEL $18.87 1 SURVEYORS CHAIN PERSON $9.25 1 INSTRUMENT PERSON $12.05 1 PARTY CHIEF $15.05 1 TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION - OUTSIDE CABLE SPLICER $24.07 28 5A Page 5 YAKIMA COUNTY Effective 03 -03-01 * (See Benefit Code KP_y) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $12.86 2B 5A INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $23.04 2B 5A JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON $22.30 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I $24.07 2B 5A SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $23.57 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $24.07 2B 5A TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT) $22.30 28 5A TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $12.13 2B 5A TELEVISION LINEPERSON /INSTALLER $16.59 2B 5A TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $20.00 2B 5A TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $17.85 2B 5A TREE TRIMMER $22.30 28 5A TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS JOURNEY LEVEL $24.36 4A 5A TILE, MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS FINISHER $20.56 4A 5A TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS JOURNEY LEVEL $26.48 1K 5A TRUCK DRIVERS DUMP TRUCK $20.19 1 DUMP TRUCK & TRAILER $24.60 2G 61 OTHER TRUCKS $28.33 1N 5D 8M TRANSIT MIXER $24.60 2G 61 WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER $11 15 1 OILER $9.20 1 WELL DRILLER $17.68 1 Page 6 BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03 -03 -01 OVERTIME CODES OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER. ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER. 1. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. C ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. D THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAYS OF A FIVE - EIGHT HOUR WORK WEEK AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR DAY, EXCLUDING SUNDAY, IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY ON SATURDAY, ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS IN A FIFTH CALENDAR WEEKDAY OF A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. J THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. L. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. N. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. P ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE - HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. Q ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE - HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. R. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03-03 -01 -2- I. S. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 12:00AM SUNDAY AND 6:00AM MONDAY AND ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. T ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED AFTER 6:00PM SATURDAY TO 6:00AM MONDAY AND ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. U ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. W ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS (EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE - HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 2. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. A. THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. C. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. D ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT STRAIGHT TIME IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. E. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. F THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. G. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE INCLUDING HOLIDAY PAY J. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE, INCLUDING THE HOLIDAY PAY ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. O ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. 4 A. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. HOLIDAY CODES 5 A HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, i AROR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). B. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). 5 C. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03 -03 -01 -3 THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). D HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY. THE FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). G. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). H. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS (6). I. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). N. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS' DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). O PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). Q PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6). R. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, ONE -HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY. (7 1/2). S. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). T PAID HOLIDAYS. SEVEN (7) PAID HOLIDAYS. U PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, AND A DAY OF THE EMPLOYEES CHOICE (7). ✓ PAID HOLIDAYS. SIX (6) PAID HOLIDAYS. W PAID HOLIDAYS. NINE (9) PAID HOLIDAYS. X. HOLIDAYS. AFTER 520 HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY AFTER 2080 HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY (8). Y HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY FOLLOWING THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). Z. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). 6. A. PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). C. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). D PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, THE DAY BEFORE OR THE DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (9). H. HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). I. PAID HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7). 6 L. HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8) BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 03 -03-01 -4 Q PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY UNPAID HOLIDAY PRESIDENTS' DAY S. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8). T PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9). U HOLIDAYS NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, DAY BEFORE INDEPENDENCE DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY (10). ✓ PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY, AND ONE DAY OF THE EMPLOYEE'S CHOICE (10). W PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY (10). X. PAID HOLIDAYS. NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (11). NOTE CODES 8. A. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE. OVER 50' TO 100' - $1 00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 175' - $2.25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 175' TO 250' - $5.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET OVER 250' - DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED FOR 250 FEET C. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY IN ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE. OVER 50' TO 100' - $1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET OVER 100' TO 150' - $1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET OVER 150' TO 200' - $2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET OVER 200' - DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE D WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAL $1.00 PER HOUR. E. ALL CLASSIFICATIONS, INCLUDING ALL APPRENTICES, REPORTING TO AN EMPLOYER'S DESIGNATED JOB HEADQUARTERS AND WORKING A MINIMUM OF FOUR (4) HOURS IN ANY ONE (1) DAY SHALL RECEIVE A WAGE SUPPLEMENT OF TWENTY-FOUR DOLLARS ($24.00) IN ADDITION TO THE PREVAILING HOURLY RATE OF WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS. L. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A. $0.75, LEVEL B $0.50, AND LEVEL C. $0.25 M. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS LEVELS A & B. $1.00, LEVELS C & D: $0.50. N. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A. $1.00, LEVEL B $0.75, LEVEL C. $0.50, AND LEVEL D $0.25 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Policy Statement (Regarding the Production of "Standard" or "Non- standard" Items) Below is the department's (State L &I's) list of criteria to be used in determining whether a prefabricated item is "standard" or "non- standard ". For items not appearing on WSDOT's predetermined list, these criteria shall be used by the Contractor (and the Contractor's subcontractors, agents to subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, and fabricators) to determine coverage under RCW 39.12. The production, in the State of Washington, of non - standard items is covered by RCW 39.12, and the production of standard items is not. The production of any item outside the State of Washington is not covered by RCW 39.12. 1. Is the item fabricated for a public works project? If not, it is not subject to RCW 39.12. If it is, go to question 2. 2. Is the item fabricated on the public works jobsite? If it is, the work is covered under RCW 39.12. If not, go to question 3. 3. Is the item fabricated in an assembly /fabrication plant set up for, and dedicated primarily to, the public works project? If it is, the work is covered by RCW 39.12. If not, go to question 4. 4. Does the item require any assembly, cutting, modification or other fabrication by the supplier? If not, the work is not covered by RCW 39.12. If yes, go to question 5. 5. Is the prefabricated item intended for the public works project typically an inventory item which could reasonably be sold on the general market? If not, the work is covered by RCW 39.12. If yes, go to question 6. 6. Does the specific prefabricated item, generally defined as standard, have any unusual characteristics such as shape, type of material, strength requirements, finish, etc? If yes, the work is covered under RCW 39.12. Any firm with questions regarding the policy, WSDOT's Predetermined List, or for determinations of covered and non - covered workers shall be directed to State L &I at (360) 902 -5330. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 1 WSDOT's Predetermined List for Qunnlinr - Manufacturers _ Fabri M - IV.4IU IL4 tMI �iIJ - Fabricators IVQLVI0 Below is a list of potentially prefabricated items, originally furnished by WSDOT to Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, that may be considered non- standard and therefore covered by the prevailing wage law, RCW 39.12. Items marked with an X in the "YES" column should be considered to be non - standard and therefore covered by RCW 39.12. Items marked with an X in the "NO" column should be considered to be standard and therefore not covered. Of course, exceptions to this general list may occur, and in that case shall be evaluated according to the criteria described in State and L &I's policy statement. ITEM DESCRIPTION YES NO 1. Manhole Ring & Cover - manhole type 1, 2, 3, and 4 X for bridges. For use with Catch Basin type 2. The casting to meet AASHTO -M -105, class 30 gray iron casting. See Std. Plan B -1f, B -23a, B -23b, B -23c, and B -23d. 2. Frame & Grate - frame and Grate for Catch Basin type X 1, 1 L, 1P, 2, 3, 4 and Concrete Inlets. Cast frame may be grade 70 -36 steel, class 30 gray cast iron or grade 80 -55 -06 ductile iron. The cast grate may be grade 70 -36 steel or grade 80 -55 -06 ductile iron. See Std. Plan B -2, B -2a, and B -2b. 3. Grate Inlet & Drop Inlet Frame & Grate - Frame and X Grate for Grate Inlets Type 1 or 2 or Drop Inlet. Angle iron frame to be cast into top of inlet. See Std. Plan B -4b or B-4h. Frames & Grates to be galvanized. 4. Concrete Pipe - Plain Concrete pipe and reinforced X concrete pipe Class 2 to 5 sizes smaller than 60 inch diameter 5. Concrete Pipe - Plain Concrete pipe and reinforced X concrete pipe Class 2 to 5 sizes larger than 60 inch diameter. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 2 YES NO 6. Corrugated Steel Pipe - Steel lock seam corrugated X pipe for culverts and storm sewers, sizes 30 inch to 120 inches in diameter. May also be treated, 1 thru 5. 7. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe - Aluminum lock seam X corrugated pipe for culverts and storm sewers, sizes 30 inch to 120 inches in diameter. May also be treated, #5. 8. Anchor Bolts & Nuts - Anchor Bolts and Nuts, for X mounting sign structures, luminaries and other items, shall be made from commercial bolt stock. See Contract Plans and Std. Plans for size and material type. 9. Aluminum Pedestrian Handrail - Pedestrian handrail X conforming to the type and material specifications set forth in the contract plans. Welding of aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 9- 28.15(3). 10. Major Structural Steel Fabrication - Fabrication of X major steel items such as trusses, beams, girders, etc., for bridges. 11. Minor Structural Steel Fabrication - Fabrication of X minor steel items such as special hangers, brackets, access doors for structures, access ladders for irrigation boxes, bridge expansion joint systems, etc., involving welding, cutting, punching and /or boring of holes. See Contact Plans for item description and shop drawings. 12. Aluminum Bridge Railing Type BP - Metal bridge railing X conforming to the type and material specifications set forth in the Contract Plans. Welding of aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 9- 28.15(3). $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 3 YES NO 13. Concrete Piling -- Precast - Prestressed concrete piling for X 1lcc no cc. onrl 7n tnn rnnrrctc nilinn rnnrrata to rnnfnrm to Section 9 -19.1 of Std. Spec.. Shop drawings for approval shall be provided per Section 6- 05.3(3) of the Std. Spec. 14. Manhole Type 1, 2, 3 and 4 - Precast Manholes with risers X and flat top slab and /or cones. See Std. Plans. 15. Drywell - Drywell as specified in Contract Plans. X 16. Catch Basin - Catch Basin type 1, IL, 1P, 2, 3, and 4, X including risers, frames maybe cast into riser. See Std. Plans. 17. Precast Concrete Inlet - Concrete Inlet with risers, X frames may be cast into risers. See Std. Plans. 18. Drop Inlet Type 1 - Drop Inlet Type 1 with support X angles and grate. See Std. Plans B-4f and B-4h. 19. Drop Inlet Type 2 - Drop Inlet type 2 with support X angles and grate. See Std. Plans B-4g and B-4h. 20. Grate Inlet Type 2 - Grate Inlet Type 2 with risers and X top unit with bearing angles. 21. Precast Concrete Utility Vaults - Precast Concrete X utility vaults of various sizes. Used for in ground storage of utility facilities and controls. See Contract Plans for size and construction requirements. Shop drawings are to be provided for approval prior to casting. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 4 YES NO 22. Vault Risers - For use with Valve Vaults and Utilities X Vaults. 23. Valve Vault - For use with underground utilities. X See Contract Plans for details. 24. Precast Concrete Barrier - Precast Concrete Barrier for X use as new barrier or may also be used as Temporary Concrete Barrier. Only new state approved barrier may be used as permanent barrier. 25. Reinforced Earth Wall Panels - Reinforced X Earth Wall Panels in size and shape as shown in the Plans. Fabrication plant has annual approval for methods and materials to be used. See Shop Drawing. Fabrication at other locations may be approved, after facilities inspection, contact HQ. Lab. 26. Precast Concrete Walls - Precast Concrete Walls - X tilt -up wall panel in size and shape as shown in Plans. Fabrication plant has annual approval for methods and materials to be used. 27. Precast Railroad Crossings - Concrete Crossing Structure X Slabs. 28. 12, 18 and 26 inch Standard Precast Prestressed X Girder - Standard Precast Prestressed Girder for use in structures. Fabricator plant has annual approval of methods and materials to be used. Shop Drawing to be provided for approval prior to casting girders. See Std. Spec. Section 6- 02.3(25)c. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 5 YES NO 29. Prestressed Concrete Girder Series 4 -14 - X Prestressed Concrete Girders for use in structures. Fabricator plant has annual approval of methods and materials to be used. Shop Drawing to be provided for I casting girders. Std. approval prior to cas girders. See Std. Spec. Section 6- 02.3(25)c. 30. Prestressed Tri -Beam Girder - Prestressed Tri -Beam X Girders for use in structures. Fabricator plant has annual approval of methods and materials to be used. Shop Drawing to be provided for approval prior to casting girders. See Std. Spec. Section 6- 02.3(25)c. 31. Prestressed Precast Hollow -Core Slab - Precast X Prestressed Hollow -core slab for use in structures. Fabricator plant has annual approval of methods and materials to be used. Shop Drawing to be provided for approval prior to casting girders. See Std. Spec. Section 6- 02.3(25)c. 32. Prestressed -Bulb Tee Girder - Bulb Tee Prestressed X Girder for use in structures. Fabricator plant has annual approval of methods and materials to be used. Shop Drawing to be provided for approval prior to casting girders. See Std. Spec. Section 6- 02.3(26)A. 33. Monument Case and Cover - To meet AASHTO -M -105 class X 30 gray iron casting. See Std. Plan H -7. 34. Cantilever Sign Structure - Cantilever Sign Structure X fabricated from steel tubing meeting AASHTO -M -183. See Std. Plans G -3, G -3a, and Contract Plans for details. The steel structure shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO -M -111. 35. Mono -tube Sign Structures - Mono -tube Sign Bridge X fabricated to details shown in the Plans. Shop drawings for approval are required prior to fabrication. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 6 YES NO 36. Steel Sign Bridges - Steel Sign Bridges fabricated X from steel tubing meeting AASHTO -M -138 for Aluminum Alloys. See Std. Plans G -2, G2a, G -2b, and Contract Plans for details. The steel structure shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO -M -111. 37. Steel Sign Post - Fabricated steel sign posts as detailed X in Std. Plan G -8. Shop drawings for approval are to be provided prior to fabrication. 38. Light Standard - Prestressed - Spun, prestressed, hollow, X concrete poles. 39. Light Standards - Lighting Standards for use X on highway illumination systems, poles to be fabricated to conform with methods and materials as specified on Std. Plan J -1, J -1 a, and J -1 b. See Special Provisions for pre- approved drawings. 40. Traffic Signal Standards - Traffic Signal Standards for X use on highway and /or street signal systems. Standards to be fabricated to conform with methods and material as specified on Std. Plans J -1, J -7a, J -7c, and J -8. See Special Provisions for pre- approved drawings. 41. Traffic Curb, Type A or C Precast - Type A or C X Precast traffic curb, for use in construction of raised channelization, and other traffic delineation uses such as parking lots, rest areas, etc. NOTE: Acceptance based on inspection of Fabrication Plant and an advance sample of curb section to be submitted for approval by Engineer. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 7 YES NO 42. Traffic Signs - Prior to approval of a Fabricator X X of Traffic Signs, the sources of the following customstd. Qigninn materials must hr. siihmittpri anti annrnvtxi msn msn for reflective sheeting, legend material, and aluminum sheeting. NOTE: * ** Fabrication inspection required. Only signs tagged "Fabrication Approved" by WSDOT Sign Fabrication Inspector to be installed. 43. Cutting & bending reinforcing steel X 44. Guardrail components X X custom standard end sect. sect. 45. Aggregates /Concrete mixes Covered by WAC 296 - 127 -018 46. Asphalt Covered by WAC 296 -127 -018 47. Fiber fabrics X 48. Electrical wiring/components X 49. treated or untreated timber piles X 50. Girder pads (elastomeric bearing) X $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 8 YES NO 51. Standard Dimension lumber X 52. Irrigation components X 53. Fencing materials X 54. Guide Posts X 55. Traffic Buttons X 56. Epoxy X 57. Cribbing X 58. Water distribution materials X 59. Steel "H" piles X 60. Steel pipe for concrete pile casings X 61. Steel pile tips, standard X 62. Steel pile tips, custom X $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 9 WASHINGTON STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES - EFFECTIVE 03/03/01 METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code Counties Covered: Adams, Asotin, Columbia, Douglas, Ferry, Franklin, Garfield Kittitas, Lincoln, Okanogan, Pend Oreille, Stevens, Walla Walla and Whitman Fitter 12.76 1 Welder 12.76 1 Machine Operator 12.66 1 Painter 10.20 1 Laborer 8.13 1 Counties Covered: Benton Welder 16.70 1 Machine Operator 10.53 1 Painter 9.76 1 Laborer 7 06 1 Counties Covered: Chelan Fitter 15.04 1 Welder 12.24 1 Machine Operator 9.71 1 Painter 9.93 1 Laborer 8.77 1 Counties Covered: Clallam, Grays Harbor, Island, Jefferson, Lewis, Mason, Pacific, San Juan and Skagit Fitter 15.16 1 Welder 15.16 1 Machine Operator 10.66 1 Painter 11.41 1 Laborer 11.13 1 $$1 Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 10 METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) 03/03/01 Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code Counties Covered: Clark Layerout 22.41 1J 6U Fitter 22.05 1J 6U Welder 21.54 1J 6U Painter 19.08 1J 6U Machine Operator 16.58 1J 6U Laborer 16.09 1J 6U Counties Covered: Snohomish Fitter 15.38 1 Welder 15.38 1 Machine Operator 8.84 1 Painter 9.98 1 Laborer 9.79 1 Counties Covered: Spokane Fitter 12.59 1 Welder 10.80 1 Machine Operator 13.26 1 Painter 10.27 1 Laborer 7.98 1 Counties Covered: Thurston Layerout 22.74 1R 6T Fitter 20.85 1R 6T Welder 18.93 1R 6T Machine Operator 15.13 1R 6T Laborer 11.33 1R 6T Counties Covered. Whatcom Fitter/Welder 13.81 1 Machine Operator 13.81 1 Laborer 9.00 1 $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 11 METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) 03/03/01 Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE �.iaaaiiwauu�� YY/1VC Code Code Cade Counties Covered: Yakima Fitter 12.00 1 Welder 11.32 1 Machine Operator 11.32 1 Painter 12.00 1 Laborer 10.31 1 Counties Covered: Cowlitz Fitter 22.03 1B 6V Welder 22.03 1B 6V Machine Operator 22.03 1B 6V Laborer 17.17 1B 6V Counties Covered: Grant Fitter 10.79 1 Welder 10.79 1 Painter 7.45 1 Counties Covered: King Fitter 15.86 1 Welder 15.48 1 Machine Operator 13.04 1 Painter 11 10 1 Laborer 9 78 1 Counties Covered: Kitsap Fitter 26.96 1 Welder 13.83 1 Machine Operator 13.83 1 Laborer 6 72 1 $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 12 METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) 03/03/01 Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code Counties Covered: Klickitat, Skamania and Wahkiakum Fitter/Welder 16.99 1 Machine Operator 17.21 1 Painter 17.03 1 Laborer 1044 1 Counties Covered: Pierce Fitter 15.25 1 Welder 13.98 1 Machine Operator 13.98 1 Laborer 9.25 1 $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 13 WASHINGTON STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES - EFFECTIVE 03/03/01 FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code Counties Covered: Adams, Asotin, Benton, Columbia, Douglas, Ferry, Franklin, Garfield, Grant, Lincoln, Okanogan, Pend Oreille, Stevens, Walla Walla, and Whitman All Classifications 9.96 1 Counties Covered: King Architectural and Prestressed Concrete All Classifications 10.60 1 All Other Concrete Products Maintenance 18.77 1B 6S Operator 18.24 1B 6S Gunite 18.24 1B 6S Carpenter 18.77 1B 6S Fabricator 18.24 1B 6S Wet pour 17.99 1B 6S Yard Patch 17.99 1B 6S Weider 18.24 1B 6S Clean Up 17.99 1B 6S Counties Covered: Pierce All Classifications 8.00 1 Counties Covered: Chelan, Kittitas, Klickitat and Skamania All Classifications 8.61 1 Counties Covered: Clallam, Clark, Cowlitz, Grays Harbor, Island, Jefferson, Kitsap, Lewis, Mason, Pacific, San Juan, Skagit, Snohomish, Thurston, Wahkiakum All Classifications 13.50 1 $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 14 WASHINGTON STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES - EFFECTIVE 03/03/01 FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS Over PREVAILING Time Holiday Note Classification WAGE Code Code Code Counties Covered: Spokane Machine Operator 10.33 1 Laborer 6.72 1 Counties Covered: Yakima Craftsman 8.65 1 Production Worker 7.15 1 Laborer 6.72 1 Counties Covered: Whatcom Rebar 14.60 1 Concrete Finisher 12.53 1 Carpenter 11.43 1 Laborer 8.43 1 $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 15 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Policy Statements /Ronardinn Production and 1plivary of CZraval Cnncrata Acnhalt Mr.) The following two letters from the State Department of Labor and Industries (State L&I) dated August 18, 1992 and June 18, 1999, clarify the intent and establish policy for administrating the provisions of WAC 296- 127 -018 COVERAGE AND EXEMPTIONS OF WORKERS INVOLVED IN THE PRODUCTION AND DELIVERY OF GRAVEL, CONCRETE, ASPHALT, OR SIMILAR MATERIALS. Any firm with questions regarding the policy, these letters, or for determinations of covered and non - covered workers shall be directed to State L&I at (360) 902 -5330. Effective September 1, 1993, minimum prevailing wages for all work covered by WAC 296 -127 -018 for the production and /or delivery of materials to a public works contract will be found under the regular classification of work for Teamsters, Power Equipment Operators, etc. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 16 ESAC DIVISION - TELEPHONE (206) 586 -6887 PO BOX 44540, OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON 98504 -4540 August 18, 1992 TO: All Interested Parties FROM: Jim P. Christensen Acting Industrial Statistician SUBJECT: Materials Suppliers - WAC 296 - 127 -018 This memo is intended to provide greater clarity regarding the application of WAC 296- 127 -018 to awarding agencies, contractors, subcontractors, material suppliers and other interested parties. The information contained herein should not be construed to cover all possible scenarios which might require the payment of prevailing wage. The absence of a particular activity under the heading "PREVAILING WAGES ARE REQUIRED FOR" does not mean that the activity is not covered. Separate Material Supplier Equipment Operator rates have been eliminated. For those cases where a production facility is set up for the specific purpose of supplying materials to a public works construction site, prevailing wage rates for operators of equipment such as crushers and batch plants can be found under Power Equipment Operators. PREVAILING WAGES ARE REQUIRED FOR: 1. Hauling materials away from a public works project site, including excavated materials, demolished materials, etc. 2. Delivery of materials to a public works project site using a method that involves incorporation of the delivered materials into the project site, such as spreading, leveling, rolling, etc. 3 The production of materials at a facility that is established for the specific, but not necessarily exclusive, purpose of supplying materials for a public works project. 4. Delivery of the materials mentioned in #3 above, regardless of the method of delivery. PREVAILING WAGES ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR: 1. The production of materials by employees of an established materials supplier, in a permanent facility, as well as the delivery of these materials, as long as delivery does not include incorporation of the materials into the job site. 2. Delivery of materials by a common or contract carrier, as long as delivery does not include incorporation of the materials into the job site. 3. Production of materials for unspecified future use. $$1$$ Supplemental To Wage Rates $$2$$ Page 17 4.0 sur a` y n 2 CT A TC /1C WASHINGTON JIt IL VI DEPARTMENT OF LABOR ANn INDUSTRIES June 18, 1999 TO: Kerry S. Radcliff, Editor Washington State Register FROM: Gary Moore, Director Department of Labor and Industries SUBJECT: Notice re WAC 296 - 127 -018, Coverage and exemptions of workers involved in the production and delivery of gravel, concrete, asphalt, or similar materials The department wishes to publish the following Notice in the next edition of the Washington State Register: NOTICE Under the current material supplier regulations, WAC 296- 127 -018, the department takes the position that prevailing wages do not apply to the delivery of wet concrete to public works sites, unless the drivers do something more than just deliver the concrete. Drivers delivering concrete into a crane and bucket, hopper of a pump truck, or forms or footings, are not entitled to prevailing wages unless they operate machinery or use tools that screed, float, or put a finish on the concrete. This position applies only to the delivery of wet concrete. It does not extend to the delivery of asphalt, sand, gravel, crushed rock, or other similar materials covered under WAC 296- 127 -018. The department's position applies only to this regulation. If you need additional information regarding this matter, please contact Greg Mowat, Program Manager, Employment Standards, at P.O. Box 44510, Olympia, WA 98504 -4510, or call (360) 902 -5310. Please publish the above Notice in WSR 99 -13. If you have questions or need additional information, please call Selwyn Walters at 902 -4206. Thank you. Cc: Selwyn Walters, Rules Coordinator Patrick Woods, Assistant Director Greg Mowat, Program Manager $$1$$ Supplemental to Wage Rates $$2$$ 18 SPECIFICATIONS Standard Specifications ❑ Technical Specifications 0 October 2000 006017.01 , STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The 2000 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction published by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, by this reference, are made a part of these Contract Documents. Except as may be amended, modified, or supplemented hereinafter, each section of the Standard Specifications shall be considered as much a part of these Contract Documents as if they were actually set forth herein. The APWA Supplement to Division 1 (Division 1 -99) of the 2000 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction will apply to this Contract. INTRODUCTION The following Amendments and Special Provisions shall be used in conjunction with the 2000 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (English). • AMENDMENTS TO THE 2000 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The following Amendments to the Standard Specifications are made a part of this contract and supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard Specifications. For informational purposes, the date following each Amendment title indicates the implementation date of the Amendment or the latest date of revision. Each Amendment contains all current revisions to the applicable section of the Standard Specifications and may include references which do not apply to this particular project. SECTION 1 -01, DEFINITIONS AND TERMS June 26, 2000 1- 01.2(1) Associations and Miscellaneous This section is supplemented with the following: FOP Field Operating Procedure WAQTC Western Alliance for Quality Transportation Construction SOP Standard Operating Procedure SECTION 1 -02, BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS February 5, 2001 1- 02.8(1) Noncollusion Declaration In the first sentence of the second paragraph the reference to "23 CFR Part 4 635.107(i)(1)" is revised to read "23 CFR 635.112(f) ". In the third sentence of the second paragraph the reference to "23 CFR Part 635.107(i)" is revised to read "23 CFR 635.112(f)(1) ". SECTION 1 -04, SCOPE OF THE WORK February 5, 2001 1 -04.4 Changes In the third paragraph, "B" is revised to read as follows: B When an item of work, as defined elsewhere in the contract, is increased in excess of 125 percent or decreased below 75 percent of the original contract quantity. For the purpose of this section, an item of work will be defined as any item that qualifies for adjustment under the provisions of Section 1 -04.6. This section is supplemented with the following: 1- 04.4(1) Minor Changes Payments or credits for changes amounting to $5,000 or less may be made under the bid item "Minor Change" At the discretion of the Contracting Agency, this procedure for Minor Changes may be used in lieu of the more formal procedure as outlined in Section 1 -04 4, Changes. The Contractor will be provided a copy of the completed order for Minor Change. The agreement for the Minor Change will be documented by signature of the Contractor, or notation of verbal agreement. If the Contractor is in disagreement with anything required by the order for Minor Change, the Contractor may protest the order as provided in Section 1 -04.5. Payments or credits will be determined in accordance with Section 1 -09.4. For the _ purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for "Minor Change" in the Proposal to become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. SECTION 1 -06, CONTROL OF MATERIAL June 26, 2000 1- 06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance In the first paragraph, the last sentence is revised to read as follows: Samples not taken by or in the presence of the Engineer Qualified Tester will not be accepted for test, unless the Engineer permits otherwise. In the fourth paragraph, the last sentence is revised by the following: The Engineer will respond in writing within three working days of the receipt of the Contractor's written communications. In the fifth paragraph, the first and second sentences are revised by the following: All field and laboratory and materials testing by the Engineer will follow methods described in the contract documents or in the Washington State Department of Transportation Materials Manual, using qualified testing personnel and calibrated or verified equipment. The following provisions will apply when the Contracting Agency uses the specifications or methods from the sources named below: The fifth paragraph is supplemented with the following: WAQTC - Western Alliance for Quality Transportation Construction. The WAQTC designation number refers to this alliance's latest adopted or tentative standard. The standard or tentative standard in effect on the bid advertising date will apply in each case. The Contracting Agency will consider them as in effect 60 calendar days after publication. Copies of any separate WAQTC testing method may be obtained from: The WSDOT Quality Systems Manager, Field Operations Support Service Center, Materials Laboratory, PO Box 47365, Olympia, Washington, 98504 -7365. SECTION 1 -07, LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC February 5, 2001 1 -07.8 High Visibility Apparel In the second paragraph, (1) is revised to read as follows: (1) when personnel are out of view of, or not exposed to traffic, 1 -07.11 Requirements For Non - discrimination This section is supplemented with the following: 1- 07.11(2)A Equal Employment Opportunity Responsibilities Title VI Responsibilities During the performance of this contract, the Contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "Contractor") agrees as follows: 1. Compliance With Regulations The Contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter DOT), Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination The Contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiations made by the Contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the Contractor of the Contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the ground of race, color, sex, or national origin. 4. information and Reports The Contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Washington State Department of Transportation or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a Contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information, the Contractor shall so certify to the Washington State Department of Transportation, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Washington State Department of Transportation shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: 1. Withholding of payments to the Contractor under the contract until the Contractor complies, and /or; 2 Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 6. Incorporation of Provisions The Contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (5) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontractor or procurement as the Washington State Department of Transportation or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, however, that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the Washington State Department of Transportation enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the state and, in addition, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. 1- 07.11(6) Incorporation of Provisions The first sentence is revised to read as follows: The Contractor shall include the provisions of Section 1- 07.11(2) Contractual Requirements (1) through (4) and the Section 1- 07.11(5) Sanctions in every subcontract including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. 1- 07.11(10)B Required Records and Retention This section is revised to read as follows: All records must be retained by the Contractor for a period of three years following completion of the contract work. All records shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized representatives of either the Washington State Department of Transportation or the Federal Highway Administration. Federal -Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report FHWA #1391. This form is required for all federally assisted projects provided the contract is equal to or greater than $10,000 and for every associated subcontract equal to or greater than $10,000. Each contract requires separate reports filed for the Contractor and each subcontractor (subject to the above noted criteria). These forms are due by August 25th in every year during which work was performed in July. The payroll period to be reflected in the report is the last payroll period in July in which work was performed. This report is required of each Contractor and subcontractor for each federally assisted contract on which the Contractor or subcontractor performs work during the month of July. In addition, for contracts with a value of $100,000 or more, the Contractor shall submit Monthly Employment Utilization Reports WSDOT form #820 -010. This form is required for all federally assisted projects if the contract is equal to or greater then $10,000 and for every associated subcontract equal to or greater than $10,000. These monthly reports are to be maintained in the respective Contractor or subcontractor's records. copies of the completed WSDOT form 820 -010 to the Contracting Agency by the fifth of each month throughout the term of the contract. The Contractor shall also collect and submit these forms monthly from every subcontractor who holds a subcontract with a value of $100,000 or more. Failure to submit the required reports by their due dates may result in the withholding of progress estimate payments. 1 -07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities The second paragraph is revised to read: Chapter 19.122 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW) relates to underground utilities. _ In accordance with this RCW, the Contractor shall call the One - Number Locater Service for field location of utilities. If no locator service is available for the area, notice shall be provided individually to those owners of utilities known to, or suspected of, having underground facilities within the area of the proposed excavation. 1 -07.19 Gratuities This section is supplemented with the following: The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of the State Ethics law, RCW 42.52, which regulates gifts to State officers and employees. Under that statute, any Contracting Agency officer or employee who has or will participate with the Contractor regarding any aspect of this Contract is prohibited from seeking or accepting any gift, gratuity, favor or anything of economic value from the Contractor. Accordingly, neither the Contractor nor any agent or representative shall offer anything of economic value as a gift, gratuity, or favor directly or indirectly to any such officer or employee. 1 -07.22 Use of Explosives In the second paragraph, the reference to "WAC 295 -52" is revised to "WAC 296 -52 ". SECTION 1 -08, PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS February 5, 2001 1 -08.1 Subcontracting The 7th paragraph is revised to read as follows: On all projects funded with Contracting Agency funds only, the Contractor shall certify to the actual amounts paid Disadvantaged, Minority, or Women's Business Enterprise firms that were used as subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, manufacturers, regular dealers, or service providers on the contract. This Certification shall be submitted to the Project Engineer on WSDOT form 421 -023, "Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants ", annually for the State fiscal year July 1 through June 30, or through physical completion of the contract, whichever occurs earliest. The report is due July 20th following the fiscal year end or 20 calendar days after physical completion of the contract. The 7th paragraph is supplemented with the following: On all projects funded with both Contracting Agency funds and Federal assistance the Contractor shall submit a "Quarterly Report of Amounts Credited as DBE Participation" on a quarterly basis for every quarter in which the contract is active (work is accomplished) or upon completion of the project, as appropriate. The quarterly reports are due on the 20th of April, July, October, and January for the four respective quarters. When required, this "Quarterly Report of Amounts Credited as DBE Participation" is in lieu of WSDOT form 421 - 023 "Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBEMlBE Participants ". This section is supplemented with the following: Subcontract Completion and Return of Retainage Withheld The following procedure shall apply to all subcontracts entered into as a part of this Contract: Requirements 1. The subcontractor shall make a written request to the Contractor for the release of • the subcontractor's retainage or retainage bond. 2. Within ten (10) working days of the request, the Contractor shall determine if the subcontract has been satisfactorily completed and shall inform the subcontractor, in writing, of the Contractor's determination. 3. If the Contractor determines that the subcontract has been satisfactorily completed, the subcontractor's retainage or retainage bond shall be released by the Contractor within ten (10) working days from the date of the written notice. 4. If the Contractor determines that the subcontractor has not achieved satisfactory completion of the subcontract, the Contractor must provide the subcontractor with written notice, stating specifically why the subcontract work is not satisfactorily completed and what has to be done to achieve completion. The Contractor shall release the subcontractor's retainage or retainage bond within eight (8) working days after the subcontractor has satisfactorily completed the work identified in the notice. 5. In determining whether satisfactory completion has been achieved, the Contractor may require the subcontractor to provide documentation such as certifications and releases, showing that all laborers, lower- tiered subcontractors, suppliers of material and equipment, and others involved in the subcontractor's work have been paid in full. The Contractor may also require any documentation from the subcontractor that is required by the subcontract or by the Contract between the Contractor and Contracting Agency or by law such as affidavits of wages paid, material acceptance certifications and releases from applicable governmental agencies to the extent that they relate to the subcontractor's work. 6. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the specification and the subcontractor's retainage or retainage bond is wrongfully withheld, the subcontractor may seek recovery against the Contractor under applicable prompt pay statutes in addition to any other remedies provided for by the subcontract or by law. Conditions 1. This clause does not create a contractual relationship between the Contracting Agency and any subcontractor as stated in Section 1 -08.1. Also, it is not intended to bestow upon any subcontractor, the status of a third -party beneficiary to the Contract between the Contracting Agency and the Contractor. 2. This section of the Contract does not apply to retainage withheld by the Contracting Agency from monies earned by the Contractor. The Contracting Agency shall continue to process the release of that retainage based upon the completion date of the project as defined in 1 -08.5 Time for Completion and in accordance with the requirements and procedures set forth in chapter 60.28 RCW. Payment The Contractor will be solely responsible for any additional costs involved in paying retainage to the subcontractors prior to total project completion. Those costs shall be incidental to the respective bid items. 1 -08.5 Time For Completion Item "c" in the 7th paragraph is revised to read as follows: c Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants or Quarterly Report of Amounts Credited as DBE Participation, as required by the Contract Provisions. SECTION 1-09, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT February 5, 2001 1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities The method of measurement for "Square Yard or Square Foot" is revised to read as follows: Square Yard or Square Foot - the measurement shall be a calculation from the neat dimensions shown in the Plans or as altered by the Engineer. If there is an exception within the measured area where the item of work is not performed (such as a drainage vault within a measured sidewalk) and if the exception area is greater than 9 square feet, then the area of the exception will be subtracted from the payment area calculated from the neat dimensions. 1 -09.6 Force Account This section is revised to read as follows: The terms of the contract or of a change order may call for work or material to be paid for by force account. If so, then the objective of this specification is to reimburse the Contractor for all costs associated with the work, including costs of labor, small tools, supplies, equipment, specialized services, materials, applicable taxes and overhead and to include a profit commensurate with those costs. The amount to be paid shall be determined as shown below: 1. For Labor: Labor reimbursement calculations shall be based on a "Project Labor List" (List,) prepared and submitted by the Contractor and by any subcontractor before that firm commences force account work. Once a List is approved by the Engineer, it shall be used to calculate force account labor payment until a new List is submitted and approved. The Engineer may compare the List to payrolls and other documents and may, at any time, require the Contractor to submit a new List. The Contractor may submit a new List at any time without such a requirement. Prior payment calculations shall not be adjusted as a result of a new List. To be approved, the List must be accurate and meet the requirements of this section. It shall include regular time and overtime rates for all employees (or work classifications) expected to participate in force account work. The rates shall include the basic wage and fringe benefits, the current rates for Federal Insurance Compensation Act (FICA), Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA) and State Unemployment Tax Act (SUTA), the company's present rates for Medical Aid and Industrial Insurance premiums and the planned payments for travel and per diem compensation. The rates may also include an allocation of costs of safety and health testing. This allocation shall assure that the amount included for force account is reasonably proportional to the total costs applied to all work. In the event that an acceptable initial List or requested revised List is not received by the time that force account calculations are begun, the Engineer will develop a List unilaterally, utilizing the best data available, that will be used until a Contractor's List is received and approved Again, prior calculations, prepared using the Engineer's List, will not be revised as a result of differences with the Contractor's List. The hourly rates established in the current "Project Labor List" shall be applied to the hours of work recorded by the Engineer. The hours of work shall include all hours that are contractual obligations of the Contractor or are customary payments by the Contractor to all employees. In addition to compensation for direct labor costs defined above, the Contracting Agency will pay the Contractor 26 percent of the sum of the costs calculated for labor reimbursement to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred. 2. For Materials: The Contracting Agency will reimburse invoice cost for Contractor- supplied materials. For the purpose of this provision, "Materials" shall include those items incorporated into the work, supplies used during the work and items consumed. This cost shall include freight and handling charges and applicable taxes. Before work is started, the Engineer may require the Contractor to obtain multiple quotations for the materials to be utilized and select the vendor with prices and terms most advantageous to the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will provide a list of the types and quantities of Contractor - supplied materials witnessed by the Contracting Agency as being utilized in force account work. The list will be furnished promptly after the material is incorporated, on a daily basis unless agreed otherwise. The Contractor may propose corrections to the list and will supply prices for the materials and other costs and return the list to the Contracting Agency. To support the prices, the Contractor shall attach valid copies of vendor invoices. If invoices are not available for materials from the Contractor's stocks, the Contractor shall certify actual costs (at a reasonable level) by affidavit. The Engineer will review the prices and any Contractor - proposed corrections and, if reasonable, approve the completed list. Once approved, the prices will be utilized in the calculation of force account reimbursement for materials. If, in the case of non - invoiced materials supported by Contractor affidavit, the price appears to be unreasonable, the Engineer will determine the cost for all or part of those materials, utilizing the best data available. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to provide materials. In this case, the Contractor will receive no payment for any costs, overhead, or profit arising from the value of the materials themselves. Additional costs to handle and place the Agency - furnished material shall be compensated as described in this specification. In addition to compensation for direct materials cost, the Contracting Agency will pay the Contractor 21 percent of the sum of the costs calculated for materials reimbursement to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred. 3. For Equipment: The Contracting Agency will reimburse the Contractor for the cost of equipment utilized in the work. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be of modern design and in good working condition. For the purpose of this provision, "provided" shall mean that the equipment is owned (either through outright ownership or through a long -term lease) and operated by the Contractor or Subcontractor or that the equipment is rented and operated by the Contractor or Subcontractor. Equipment that is rented with operator shall not be included here, but shall be considered a service and addressed according to section 4 of this provision. The amount of payment for any Contractor -owned equipment that is utilized shall be determined according to the version of the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement which is in effect at the time the force account is authorized. The rates listed in the Rental Rate Blue Book (as modified by the current AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement) shall be full compensation for all fuel, oil, lubrication, ordinary repairs, maintenance, and all other costs incidental to furnishing and operating the equipment except labor for operation. Payment for rented equipment will be made on the basis of a valid invoice, covering the time period of the work. Before work is started, the Engineer may require the Contractor to obtain multiple quotations for the rental of equipment to be utilized and select the vendor with prices and terms most advantageous to the Contracting Agency In addition to the payments for Contractor -owned and rented equipment, one or more lump -sum payments may be made for small tools. The amount to be paid shall be determined as outlined in the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement. The Contracting Agency will add 21 percent to equipment costs to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred. This markup will be over and above those equipment costs and will not be adjusted for any equipment overhead amounts included in the Blue Book rates. Except as noted below, the Contracting Agency will pay the Contractor an additional 21 percent of the sum of the costs included on invoices for specialized services to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred. When a supplier of services is compensated through invoice, but acts in the manner of a subcontractor, as described in Section 6 of this provision, then markup for that invoice shall be according to Section 6. "Contractor Markup on Subcontractors' Work ". 5. For Mobilization: Force account mobilization is defined as the preparatory work performed by the Contractor including procurement, loading and transportation of tools and equipment, and personal travel time (when such travel time is a contractual obligation of the Contractor or a customary payment for the Contractor to all employees). Mobilization also includes the costs incurred during demobilization. Pro - rata Current copies of the Rental Rate Blue Book and the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement will be maintained at each Region office of the Department of Transportation (Compact Disk Version) and at each of the offices of the Associated General Contractors of America (in Seattle, Spokane, Tacoma, and Wilsonville, Oregon) where they are available for inspection. 4. For Services: Compensation under force account for specialized services shall be made on the basis of an invoice from the providing entity. A "specialized service" shall be one which is typically billed through invoice in standard industry practice. Before work is started, the Engineer may require the Contractor to obtain multiple quotations for the service to be utilized and select the provider with prices and terms most advantageous to the Contracting Agency.adjustments may be made when the mobilization applies to both force account and other contract work. The Contracting Agency will pay for mobilization for off -site preparatory work for force account items provided that notice has been provided sufficiently in advance to allow the Engineer to witness the activity, if desired. Any costs experienced during mobilization activities for labor, equipment, materials or services shall be listed in those sections of the force account summary and paid accordingly. 6. For Contractor Markup on Subcontractor's Work: When work is performed on a force account basis by one or more approved subcontractors, by lower -tier subcontractors or suppliers, or through invoice by firm(s) acting in the manner of a subcontractor, the Contractor will be allowed an additional markup, from the table below, applied to the costs computed for work done by each subcontractor through Sections 1, 2, 3, and 4, to compensate for all administrative costs, including project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred. A firm may be considered to be acting as a subcontractor when the Engineer observes one or more of the following characteristics: • The person in charge of the firm's activities takes an active role in managing the overall project, including extensive coordination, interpretation of plans, interaction with the Contracting Agency or management of a complex and inter- related operation. • Rented equipment is provided fueled, operated and maintained by the firm. Operators of rented equipment are supervised directly by the firm's representative. There is little interaction between the Contractor and the employees of the firm. • The firm appears to be holding the risk of performance and quality of the work. • The firm appears to be responsible for liability arising from the work. Markups on Work Performed by Subcontractor(s): 1. On amounts paid for work performed by each Subcontractor on each force account and calculated through Sections 1 -4 up to $25,000 12% 2. On amounts greater than $25,000 up to $100,000 10% 3. On amounts greater than $100,000 7% The amounts and markup rates shall be calculated separately for each subcontractor on each force account item established. The payments provided above shall be full payment for all work done on a force account basis. The calculated payment shall cover all expenses of every nature, kind, and description, including those listed above and any others incurred on the work being paid an extension of time or time - related damages to unchanged work arising as a result of the force account work. The amount and costs of any work to be paid by force account shall be computed by the Engineer, and the result shall be final as provided in Section 1 -05.1. An item which has been bid at a unit price or lump sum in the Proposal will not be paid as force account unless a change as defined in Section 1 -04.4 has occurred and the provisions require a payment adjustment. Items which are included in the Proposal as Force Account through force account. Nothing in this provision shall preclude the Contractor from seeking or which are added by change order as Force Account may, by agreement of the parties at any time, be converted to agreed unit prices or lump sums applicable to the remaining work. 1 -09.7 Mobilization This section is revised to read as follows - Mobilization consists of preconstruction expenses and the costs of preparatory work and operations performed by the Contractor which occur before 10 percent of the total original contract amount is earned from other contract items. Items which are not to be included in the item of Mobilization include but are not limited to: 1 Any portion of the work covered by the specific contract item or incidental work which is to be included in a contract item or items. 2. Profit, interest on borrowed money, overhead, or management costs. 3. Any costs of mobilizing equipment for force account work. Based on the lump sum contract price for "Mobilization," partial pay ments will be made as follows: nspection throughout the lifel . When 5 percent of the total original contract amount is earned from other contract items, excluding amounts paid for materials on hand, 50 percent of the amount bid for mobilization, or 5 percent of the total original contract amount, whichever is the least, will be paid. 2. When 10 percent of the total original contract amount is earned from other contract items, excluding amounts paid for materials on hand, 100 percent of the amount bid for mobilization, or 10 percent of the total original contract amount, whichever is the least, will be paid. 3. When the physical completion date has been established for the project, payment of any amount bid for mobilization in excess of 10 percent of the total original contract amount will be paid. Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or preclude partial payments otherwise provided by the contract. SECTION 1 -10, TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL October 2, 2000 1- 10.2(3) Conformance to Established Standards The section is revised to read as follows: Flagging, signs, and all other traffic control devices furnished or provided shall conform to the standards established in the latest adopted edition of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (MUTCD) published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and the Modifications to the MUTCD for Streets and Highways for the State of Washington. Copies of the MUTCD may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Modifications to the MUTCD for Streets and Highways for the State of Washington may be obtained from the Department of Transportation, Olympia, Washington 98504. In addition to the standards of the MUTCD described above, the Contracting Agency has scheduled the implementation of crashworthiness requirements for all workzone devices. The National Cooperative Highway Research Project (NCHRP) Report 350 has established requirements for crash testing. Workzone devices are divided into four categories. Each of those categories and the schedule for implementation is described: Category 1 includes those items that are small and lightweight, channelizing, and delineating devices that have been in common use for many years and are known to be crashworthy by crash testing of similar devices or years of demonstrable safe performance. These include cones, tubular markers, flexible delineator posts, and plastic drums with no attachments. All Category 1 devices used by the project shall meet the requirements of NCHRP 350 as certified by the manufacturer of the device. The Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer's certification documentation for all such devices purchased and shall keep the documentation available for i of the project. Category 2 includes devices that are not expected to produce significant vehicular velocity change, but may otherwise be hazardous. Examples of this class are barricades, portable sign supports and signs, intrusion alarms and vertical panels. Any new Category 2 device purchased after October 1, 2000 shall meet the requirements of NCHRP 350. Existing equipment, purchased prior to October 1, 2000, may be used on the project until December 31, 2007. For the purpose of definition, a sign support and sign shall be considered a single unit. A new sign may be purchased for an existing sign support and the entire unit will be defined as "existing equipment." The contract documents will contain provisions that list all Category 2' devices deemed compliant with NCHRP 350 and acceptable for use on the project. The Contractor may select from that list when obtaining new equipment or may submit other products for the Engineer's consideration. Category 3 is for hardware expected to cause significant velocity changes or other potentially harmful reactions to impacting vehicles. Barriers, fixed sign supports, crash cushions, truck mounted attenuators (TMA's) and other work zone devices not meeting the definitions of Category 1 or 2 are examples from this category. Many Category 3 devices are defined in the design of the project. Where this is the case, NCHRP 350 requirements have been incorporated into the design and the Contractor complies with the requirements by constructing according to the plans and specifications. Where the device is a product chosen by the Contractor, the device chosen must be compliant with the requirements of NCHRP 350. Category 4 includes portable or trailer- mounted devices such as Arrow Displays, Temporary Traffic Signals, Area Lighting Supports, and Portable Changeable Message Signs. After October 1, 2002, this class of devices may only be used if they are placed behind crashworthy barriers or shielded with Truck - Mounted attenuators or crash cushions. The condition of signs and traffic control devices shall be new or "acceptable" as defined in the book Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices, and will be accepted based on a visual inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer's decision on the condition of a sign or traffic control device shall be final. When a sign or traffic control device becomes classified as "not acceptable" it shall be removed from the project and replaced within 12 hours. 1. Remove all structural shoring to at least 2 feet below the finished ground line. SECTION 6 -02, CONCRETE STRUCTURES May 29, 2001 6- 02.3(2)A Contractor Mix Design In the second paragraph the reference to "AASHTO T 152." is revised to "WAQTC FOP for AASHTO T 152." The last sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read as follows. All other concrete mix designs except those for lean concrete and commercial concrete shall have a minimum cementitious material content of 565 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. 6- 02.3(2)B Commercial Concrete This section is revised to read as follows: Commercial concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3000 psi in accordance with AASHTO T 22. Commercial concrete placed above the finished ground line shall be air entrained and have an air content from 4.5 percent to 7 5 percent per AASHTO T 152. Commercial concrete does not require plant approval, mix design, or source approvals for cement, aggregate, and other admixtures. Where concrete Class 3000 is specified for nonstructural items such as, culvert headwalls, plugging culverts, concrete pipe collars, pipe anchors, monument cases, luminaire bases, pedestals, cabinet bases, guardrail anchors, sign post foundations, fence post footing, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters, the Contractor may use commercial concrete. Commercial concrete shall not be used for structural items such as, bridges, retaining wails, box culverts, or foundations for high mast luminaires, mast arm traffic signals, cantilever signs, and sign bridges. The Engineer may approve other nonstructural items not listed for use as commercial concrete. 6 -02.3(5)A General The fifth paragraph, section 1.a is revised to read as follows: a. The Contractor's test results are obtained from testing cylinders fabricated, handled, and stored for 28 days in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23 and tested in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 22. The test cylinders shall be the same size cylinders as those cast by the Contracting Agency. The fifth paragraph, section 1.c is revised to read as follows: c. The laboratory performing the tests per WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 22 has an equipment calibration /certification system, and a technician training and evaluation process per AASHTO R -18. The fifth paragraph, in 2, the reference to "AASHTO T 22." Is revised to read "WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 22. ". 6- 02.3(5)B Certification of Compliance This section is supplemented with the following: For commercial concrete the Certificate of Compliance shall include, as a minimum, the batching facility, date, and quantity batched per load. 6- 02.3(5)D Test Methods This section is revised to read as follows: Acceptance testing will be performed by the Contracting Agency in accordance with the WSDOT Materials Manual. The test methods to be used with this specification are: WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Compressive Strength of Test Method T 22 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete WAQTC FOP for TM 2 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete WAQTC FOP for AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method A'SDOT GOP for AASHTO Capping Cylindrical Concrete Test Method T 231 Specimens WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 309 Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete 6- 02.3(5)G Sampling and Testing Frequency for Temperature, Consistency, and Air Content In the first paragraph, the eighth sentence is revised to read as follows: Loads to be sampled will be selected in accordance with the random selection process as outlined in WAQTC FOP for TM 2. 6- 02.3(5)L Concrete With Non - Conforming Strength In the second paragraph, the reference to "AASHTO T 22." Is revised to read 'WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 22. ". 6- 02.3(17)M Restricted Overhead Clearance Sign In the last sentence of the second paragraph the reference to "1- 07.23(3)F" is revised to "1- 10.3(3) ". 6- 02.3(17)N Removal of Falsework and Forms The fourth paragraph is revised to read as follows: The Contractor may remove side forms, traffic barrier forms, and pedestrian barrier forms after 24 hours if these forms are made of steel or dense plywood, an approved water reducing additive is used, and the concrete reaches a compressive strength of 1400 psi before form removal. This strength shall be proved by test cylinders made from the last concrete placed into the form. The cylinders shall be cured according to WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23. The ninth paragraph is revised to read as follows: All cells of a box girder structure which have permanent access shall have all forms completely removed, including the roadway deck forms. All debris and all projections into the cells shall be removed. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, the roadway slab interior forms in all other cells where no permanent access is available, may be left in place. 6- 02.3(17)0 Early Concrete Test Cylinder Breaks The second and third paragraphs are revised to read as follows: The concrete cylinders shall be molded in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23 from concrete last placed in the forms and representative of the quality of concrete placed in that pour. The cylinders shall be cured in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23. The Engineer may approve the use of cure boxes meeting the requirements of this test method. Special cure boxes to enhance cylinder strength will not be allowed. 6- 02.3(20) Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings The second paragraph is revised to read as follows. Grout shall meet the following requirements: Requirement Compressive Strength Test Method WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 106 Values 4,000 psi @ 7 days 6- 02.3(25)A Shop Plans In the last paragraph the first sentence is revised to read as follows: The Contractor shall provide five copies of the shop plans to the Engineer for approval. 6- 02.3(25)E Contractors Control Strength In the third paragraph the first sentence is revised to read as follows: Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T -23 after the girder concrete has obtained the required release strength. "AASHTO AA 1. J read "WSDOT FOP in the fifth paragraph, the reference to "AASH I O T T 22. " Is revised to read MWwvT FOP for AASHTO T 22. ". 6- 02.3(25)M Shipping The third paragraph is revised to read as follows: No precast prestressed slab or precast prestressed ribbed section shall be shipped for at least three days after concrete placement. No deck bulb tee girder shall be shipped for at least seven days after concrete placement. No other girder shall be shipped for at least ten days after concrete placement. 6- 02.3(26)A Shop Drawings The ninth paragraph is revised to read as follows: Before physical completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with reproducible originals of the shop drawings (and any approved changes). These shall be clear, suitable for microfilming, and on permanent sheets that measure no smaller than 11 by 17 inches. Alternatively, the shop drawings may be provided in an electronic format with the approval of the Bridge and Structures Engineer. 6- 02.3(26)F Grouting The following sentence is inserted after the second sentence in the first paragraph: Grout caps shall be installed at tendon ends prior to grouting. In the sixth paragraph, the reference to "ASTM C 939," is revised to read "WSDOT FOP for ASTM C 939," 6- 02.3(27) Concrete for Precast Units This section is revised to read as follows: Precast units shall not be removed from forms until the concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 70 percent of the specified design strength as verified by rebound number determined in accordance with WSDOT FOP for ASTM C 805. Precast units shall not be shipped until the concrete has reached the specified design strength as determined by testing cylinders made from the same concrete as the precast units. The cylinders shall be made, handled, and stored in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23 and compression tested in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 22 and WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 231. 6- 02.3(28)D Contractors Control Strength In the first paragraph the second sentence is revised to read as follows: The cylinders shall be made, handled, and stored in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 23 and compression tested in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 22 and WSDOT FOP for AASHTO Test Method T 231 In the fourth paragraph the first sentence is revised to read as follows. Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T -23 after the unit concrete has obtained the required release strength. SECTION 9 -23, CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES June 26, 2000 9 -23.9 Fly Ash The reference to "Table 2" is revised to "Table 1A ". SECTION 9 -25, WATER June 26, 2000 9 -25.1 Water for Concrete This section is revised to read as follows: Water for mortar or concrete shall be clear and apparently clean. If the water contains substances that cause discoloration, unusual or objectionable smell or taste, or other suspicious content, the Engineer may require the Contractor to provide test results documenting that the water meets the physical test requirements and chemical limits described in ASTM C94M Section 5.1.3, Tables 2 and 3. Water from mixer washout operations may be used in concrete provided it meets or exceeds the above criteria as well as the following additional requirements: 1 Concrete with water from mixer washout operations shall not be used in bridge roadway deck slabs, flat slab bridge superstructures, modified concrete overlays, or prestressed concrete. 2. Specific Gravity shall not exceed 1.07. 3 Alkalies, expressed as [Na20 +0.658 K20], shall not exceed 600 ppm. 4. Shall be free of coloring agents. 5. If the wash water contains admixtures from different manufacturers, the Contractor shall provide evidence that the combination of admixtures are compatible and do not adversely affect the air void system of the hardened concrete as per Section 6- 02.3(3) 6. All tests to verify that the physical and chemical requirements are met, shall be conducted on the following schedule: a The physical requirements shall be tested on weekly intervals for four weeks and thereafter on monthly intervals. b. The chemical requirements shall be tested on monthly intervals. c. The specific gravity shall be determined daily in accordance with ASTM D 1429, Test Method D The Contractor shall use the services of a Laboratory that has an equipment calibration /verification system, and a technician training and evaluation process per AASHTO R -18 to conduct all tests. The laboratory shall use testing equipment that has been calibrated /verified at least once within the past 12 months to meet the requirements of each test procedure in accordance with the appropriate section of AASHTO R -18. Documentation of tester qualifications and equipment verification records shall be maintained and available for review by the Contracting Agency upon request. Agency reviews of the laboratory facility, testing equipment, personnel, and all qualification, calibration, and verification records will be conducted at the Contracting Agency's discretion. SECTION 9 -28, SIGNING MATERIALS AND FABRICATION April 30, 2001 9- 28.1(1) Basis for Acceptance The first paragraph is revised to read as follows: Reflective sheeting shall be accepted on the basis of inclusion of the material /product on the Qualified Product List or by approval of a Request for Approval of Materials. The sign fabricator shall have available for inspection a copy of the Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for each lot of reflective sheeting. This certificate shall verify that the reflective sheeting meets all the requirements of Section 9- 28.12. 9 -28.11 Hardware The first sentence of the first paragraph is revised to read as follows: Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of the same material for each attachment, except for signs mounted on Overhead Sign Structures (i.e. sign bridges, cantilevers, and bridge mounted) all bolts, u- bolts, washers, nuts, and locknuts shall be stainless steel only. In the first paragraph, the specification for "Washers" is revised to read: ASTM B 209 2024 -T4 Aluminum ASTM A 36 Steel ASTM F 594 Stainless Steel In the first paragraph, the specification for "Angle and "Z" Bar" is revised to read: ASTM B 221 6061 -T6 Aluminum ASTM A 36 Steel In the first paragraph, the Specification for "Strap and Mounting Bracket" is revised to read: ASTM A 666, Type 201 Stainless Steel The last paragraph is revised to read as follows. All steel parts shall be galvanized per AASHTO M 111. Steel bolts and related connecting hardware shall be galvanized per AASHTO M 232. 9- 28.14(2) Steel Structures and Posts The first paragraph is revised to read as follows: Anchor rods and washers for sign bridge and cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform to Section 9- 06.5(4). Anchor rods shall be galvanized after fabrication a minimum of 1' -0" at the exposed end in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Nuts and washers shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Anchor rod templates shall conform to ASTM A 36, but need not be galvanized. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK AND CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01140 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS SECTION 01650 - FACILITY STARTUP SECTION 03252 - CONCRETE ANCHORS SECTION 03310 - REINFORCING STEEL, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE AND CONCRETE FINISH SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SECTION 06600 - FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS SECTION 07510 - BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING AND ROOF INSULATION SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 08330 - ROLL -UP DOORS SECTION 08380 - CORROSION RESISTANT DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 09210 - SPRAY APPLIED CEMENT PLASTER SECTION 09679 - CHEMICAL RESISTANT EPDXY COATING SECTION 10050 - BUILDING SPECIALTIES SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS SECTION 11001 - GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 11002 - ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES SECTION 11216 - CHEMICAL TRANSFER PUMPS SECTION 11240 - CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT y \00pr1\006017.011specs \technical specs table of contents.doc 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT) SECTION 13200 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC TANKS SECTION 13416 - CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS SECTION 15050 - PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 15800 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 17110 - FIELD INSTRUMENTS y \ technical specs table of contents.doc 2 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK AND CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This project includes al labor, materials, and equipment for the construction of a water fluoridation system. The system includes a chemical building with heating and ventilation, a fluoride storage tank, a secondary containment tank and a chemical feeding system with all appurtenances and piping. Associated work includes supply and installation of fluoride monitoring equipment in the Water Treatment Plant building and in the Gleed Water Pump Station. Additional work in the Water Treatment Plant building includes plumbing improvements, installation of the fluoride injector and appurtenances and replacement of an owner supplied water meter. Programming of instrumentation and controls associated with this project is not the Contractor's responsibility. The extent of the work is shown and described on the Plans and Specifications for the City of Yakima Water Fluoridation System, Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, dated October 2000. 1.02 PROJECT TIMELINE A. The project timeline is subject to funding approval and will be set at a later date. 120 days will be allowed from the award of construction to final completion. 1 03 SALVAGE ITEMS A. One 2" water meter. 1.04 OWNER- FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (O.F.C.I.) ITEMS A. Water Meter (mechanical) to replace existing plant water meter. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND OWNER'S CONTINUED OPERATIONS A. Contractor shall confine his use of the site for work and storage to the construction area as directed by the Owner. The Contractor's use of adjacent lands and roads for access to move onto and off of the site and for daily access of workers, material, and equipment shall be arranged and scheduled to minimize interference with the Owner's continued operations. B. Owner intends to continue operation of its water treatment operations during the construction period. The Contractor shall plan and schedule its work to minimize impacting the Owner's continued operations and shall, at all times, maintain safe access for the Owner's operating or maintenance personnel and equipment. C Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safe emergency exiting for the Owner's and Contractor's personnel in all areas affected by the Contractor's work. October 2000 Summary of Work and 006017.01 01010 -1 Contract Considerations D. If operation of the Owner's utility systems are adversely affected by the Contractor's work, the Owner may suffer a financial loss and may make a claim against the Contractor to recovery its Toss. 1.06 DOCUMENTING EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Prior to commencing the Work, the Contractor is to tour the site with the Owner. Examine and document photographically and in writing the condition of the existing site, including pavement and landscape planting on or adjacent to the site. This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage due to the Contractor's operations and shall be signed by all parties making the tour. 1.07 SHUTDOWN OF EXISTING UTILITIES, SERVICES, OR OPERATIONS A. Obtain the Owner's approval at least seven (7) days prior to the shutdown of any utility or service. Give required notice and make appropriate arrangements with utility owners and other affected parties prior to shutdown of any utility service. B. Schedule utility service or operations shutdowns for periods of minimum use and at the Owner's convenience. Have all required material, equipment, and workers onsite prior to beginning any work involving a possible shutdown. Perform work as required to reduce shutdown time to the minimum. In some cases, this may require increased numbers of workers and /or premium time night or weekend work. 1.08 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Specific provisions are described in the Standard Specifications. 1.09 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Applications for Payment may be made as provided for in the Standard Specifications 1.10 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS A. Methods of modifying the Contract Documents are covered in the Standard Specifications. B. The following documents may be used by the Engineer. 1. R eques t fnr Q (R eques t for Proposal): Issued b th Engineer, a Request for Quotation (or Proposal) is used to describe a proposed change and request a cost quotation from the Contractor, but does not authorize a change in the Work or in the Contract Time or Price. 2. Change Order: Signed by the Contractor, and Owner, a Change Order changes the Scope of Work and possibly the Contract Price and /or Contract Time. 3. Work Directive Change: Signed by the Owner (and in some cases by the Contractor) and issued by the Owner, a Work Directive Change is used: (1) to direct the Contractor to do extra work on a cost accounting basis with a fixed maximum sum when the Owner and Contractor have not agreed on the price and time for the change, and (2) to direct the Contractor to do work that the Contractor contends is not included in the Contract scope. Work done under October 2000 Summary of Work and MRn17 01 01010 -2 Contract Considerations .. �.... i i . ., � ... v c. vvn a�.� vvnawci auvna Case 1 will be converted to a Change Order when the Contractor and Owner agree on the change in price and time. The Contractor may make a claim for recovery of cost and time extension for work done under Case 2, but if the claim is denied because the work is determined to be included in the Contract scope, then the Contract Time and Price will not be changed. Work done under both Cases 1 and 2 shall be done in accordance with the requirements for work done on a cost accounting basis described in the Standard Specifications. 4. Clarifications: Issued by the Owner or Engineer, a Clarification is used to order or document minor changes in the Work consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and NOT involving a change in price or time. Information issued on a Clarification shall NOT authorize a change in Contract Price or Contract Time and shall not be considered a Constructive Change Order. If the Contractor considers that a Clarification would cause a change in Contract Price or Time, it shall notify the Owner in writing within 15 days of receipt of the Clarification and shall not proceed with the work. 5. The Contractor hereby expressly waives any claim or right to make a claim for an increase in Contract Time or Price without written notice to the Owner of the Contractor's intent to make a claim 5 days prior to proceeding to execute the work or portion thereof giving rise to such claim. 6. The Contractor agrees that it shall not consider any order, instruction, clarification, suggestion, or any other communication either written or oral, given intentionally or unintentionally by the Engineer, Owner, or any other person as authorization or direction to do any work that would cause a change in Contract Time or Price unless it is a formal Change Order or Work Directive Change signed by the Owner. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The codes and regulations together with local amendments, when applicable, adopted by the State and other governmental authorities having jurisdiction shall establish minimum requirements for this Project. This Project shall comply with the latest edition of the following: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC). 2. Uniform Building Code Standards (UBCS). 3. Uniform Fire Code (UFC). 4. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC). 5. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). 6 National Electric Code (NEC). B. The latest edition of the requirements in effect at the date of submission of bids shall apply. C The Standard Specifications cover the Contractor's responsibility to comply with laws and codes applicable to Means and Methods for performing the Work. D. The Standard Specifications cover the Contractor's responsibility to report code deficiencies in the design to the Engineer prior to proceeding with the Work. E Paragraphs addressing Pre - Engineered Systems and Performance Specifications in other Sections cover the Contractor's responsibility to comply with code requirements when (1) performance specifications are used to describe all or October 2000 Summary of Work and 006017.01 01010 -3 Contract Considerations portions of Work or items and (2) when pre - engineered (Contractor designed) systems are specified. F. In cases where the Contract Documents are more restrictive than applicable codes, the Contractor shall comply with the Contract Documents. 1.12 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. When these Specifications state that work or tests shall conform to specific provisions in a referenced standard, specification, code, recommendation, or manual published by an association, organization, society, or agency, the referenced provisions shall be considered a part of these Specifications as fully as if included in total. When these Specifications or applicable codes contain higher or more restrictive requirements than those contained in reference standards, these Specifications or applicable codes shall govern. B. The latest edition of a referenced standard published at the time of submission of bids shall apply unless a specific date for the referenced standard is cited in these Specifications. C. Provisions in referenced standards, specifications, manuals, or codes shall not change the duties and responsibilities between any of the parties involved in this work from those described in the Standard Specifications. Provisions in referenced standards with regard to measurement and payment shall not apply to this work unless specifically cited. 1.13 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE AND STYLE A. Many parts of the Specifications as well as notes on the Drawings are written in the imperative voice and are addressed to the Contractor. 1. When words or phrases requiring an action or performance of a task are used, it means that the Contractor shall provide the action or perform the task. For example: provide, perform, install, furnish, erect, connect, test, operate, adjust, or similar words mean that the Contractor shall perform the action or task referred to. 2. When words or phrases requiring selection, acceptance, approval, review, direction, designation, or similar actions are referred to, it means that such actions are the Owner's or the Engineer's prerogative and that the Contractor must obtain such action before proceeding. B. Requirements in the Specifications and Drawings apply to all work of a similar type, kind, or class even though the word "all" or "typical" may not be stated. 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. The following terms, when used in the Contract Documents, shall have the meanings listed: ACCEPTABLE - "acceptable to the Owner" October 2000 Summary of Work and rl(1Fn 17 (11 01010-4 C act Considerations - - -- • • • - • VV11114V\ VVI 101VG1 OlIV110 PERFORM - "perform all operations required to complete the work referred to in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents" PROVIDE - "fumish and install the work referred to including proper anchorage, connection to required utilities or other work, testing, adjustment, and startup ready to put in service and perform the intended function" REQUIRED - "required by the Contract Documents or required to complete the work and produce the intended results" SATISFACTORY - "acceptable to the Owner" SHOWN - "as indicated on the Drawings" SITE - "geographical location of the Project and land within the work area shown on the Contract Drawings and within which the work will be installed or built" SPECIFIED - "as written in the Contract Documents, including the Specifications and the Drawings" SUBMIT - "submit to the Owner" 115 ABBREVIATIONS A. The following acronyms or abbreviations are used in these Specifications for the organizations listed: Abbreviation Stands for AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ADC Air Diffusion Council AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association Al Asphalt Institute AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standard Institute (formerly United States of America Standards Institute) APA American Plywood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association AREA American Railway Engineering Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers October 2000 Summary of Work and 006017.01 01010 -5 Contract Considerations ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA American Wood - Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association DVLI Bureau of Labor and Industries CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CI Chlorine Institute CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Abbreviation Stands for CS Commercial Standards for the U.S. Department of Commerce CTI Cooling Tower Institute DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association EIA Electronic Industries Association EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ETL Electronic Testing Laboratory FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company FPS Fluid Power Society FS Federal Specifications HI Hydraulic Institute HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO international Conference of Building Officials IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council • IPCE International Power Cable Engineers Association ISA Instrument Society of America NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA International Electrical Testing Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NGVD National Geodetic Vertical Datum NSF National Sanitation Foundation NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code PCA Portland Cement Association REA Rural Electrification Administration SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association October 2000 Summary of Work and 006017.01 01010 -6 Contract Considerations SSPC Structural Steel Painting Council TCA Tile Council of America UBC Uniform Building Code UFC Uniform Fire Code UPC Uniform Plumbing Code UMC Uniform Mechanical Code USDC U.S. Department of Commerce UL Underwriters Laboratories WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WIC Woodwork Institute of California WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act WQCB Water Quality Control Board (Regional) WRCB Water Resources Control Board END OF SECTION October 2000 Summary of Work and 006017.01 01010 -7 Contract Considerations SECTION 01040 COORDINATION AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Coordination of submittals and work of various Sections of the Specifications and subcontractors to assure efficient and orderly sequence of interdependent construction. Provide accommodations for Owner Furnished Contractor Installed items, so labeled on the Drawings. 1.02 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. The Contractor's superintendent or a specially assigned assistant shall be designated the mechanical /electrical coordinator and shall coordinate the exact location, space priorities, and sequence of installation of all mechanical and electrical work with each other and with all other trades. The mechanical /electrical coordinator shall assure compliance with the requirements of this paragraph 1.02. B The location of mechanical and electrical work may be indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Actual locations shall follow locations shown on the Drawings as closely as practicable, but shall be altered or adjusted in the field by the mechanical /electrical coordinator as required by the following: 1. In finished spaces install mechanical and electrical work concealed within the space available. 2. Organize mechanical and electrical work to make efficient use of space. Combine similar items into groups; make all runs parallel to or at right angles with building lines. 3. Layout and install work to provide adequate space and access for adjustment, servicing, and maintenance and maximize space available for future installation of additional services or replacement of existing services. 4. Assure that all access doors required by code or required for adjustment, servicing, or maintenance are provided in accordance with code and Specification requirements. Locate access doors to provide convenient access and to coordinate with finished visual elements. 5 Coordinate location of fixtures, registers, grills, outlets, switches, panelboards, pullboxes, access doors, and other exposed mechanical and electrical items with functional and visual elements. Verify location of questionable items with Engineer before proceeding. C Prepare large -scale detailed installation drawings showing the work of all affected trades to coordinate the actual installed location of all equipment and of all mechanical and electrical work for all areas. Review coordination drawings with Engineer and all affected trades before proceeding. D. Review Shop Drawings and Product Data prior to submission for the Engineer's review to assure that physical characteristics and service requirements are compatible with Contract requirements, field conditions, and other items submitted. E. Verify that required services such as electrical power characteristics, control wiring, and utility requirements of items and equipment submitted and furnished are compatible with services provided. Notify Engineer of potential problems prior to October 2000 006017.01 01040 -1 Coordination and Project Requirements ordering items or equipment and prior to installing services or completing construction in areas where services would have to be installed. F. Schedule installation sequence of various elements of mechanical and electrical work to achieve optimum compliance with requirements under Mechanical and Electrical Coordination in this Section. G. C:ond ct regular coordination meetings with affected trades to establish and maintain coordination and resolve conflicts or disputes. 1.03 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING A. Provide cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the work and to make all of its parts fit together properly. Include cutting, fitting, and patching required to: 1. Fit the several parts together and to integrate with other work. 2. Uncover work to install or correct ill -timed work. 3. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 4. Remove and replace defective and non - conforming work. 5. Remove samples of installed work for testing. B. Request guidance from the Engineer prior to beginning cutting or altering construction which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element. 2. Functional performance of any element. 3. Integrity of weather - exposed or moisture- resistant elements. 4. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight- exposed elements. 6 Work by Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting and patching using workers that specialize in and are skilled in installing the type of work being cut or patched. D. Perform work in accordance with the Contract Documents or in the absence of specific requirements comply with best trade practice for the work involved. 1. Execute work by methods that will avoid damage to other work. 2. Provide proper support and substrates to receive patching and finishing materials. 3. Cut concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. Locate all reinforcing steel, conduits, and pipes with electronic detecting devices prior to cutting or core drilling existing concrete. 4. Replace or patch work with new materials meeting the requirements of these Specifications or if not specified matching materials and finishes of existing or adjacent work. 5. Cut wall, ceiling, and floor finishes to fit snugly around pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations. Provide fire and /or acoustical caulking as required by code or conditions of use. 6. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids against smoke, fire, and water. 7. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. 8 Report any hazardous or unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer. October 2000 nnan1� 01 n10-2 Coordination .........a Project Requirements vvvv 1 5 . A0 v 5 .5 5v -� vwIu mn. Project 1�cyu 1.04 CONNECTIONS TO UNDERGROUND UTILITIES, CONDUITS, OR PROCESS PIPING A. The location of existing utilities and underground facilities known to the Design Engineer are shown in their approximate location based on information available at the time of preparing the Drawings. The actual location, size, type, and number of utilities and underground facilities may differ from that shown and utilities or underground facilities may be present that are not shown. See General Conditions for the Contractor's responsibilities and for differing conditions that warrant a change in Contract Price. B. Use extreme care when excavating or working in areas that may contain existing utilities, process piping, conduits, or other underground facilities. Use careful potholing, hand digging, and probing to determine the exact location of underground installation. Some locations may contain multiple pipes or conduits. C. Where connections to existing utilities or other underground facilities are required or where new piping or conduits may cross or interfere with existing utilities or underground facilities. carefully excavate and uncover existing installations to a point 1 foot below the pipe or conduit to determine the actual elevation and alignment. Call the Engineer's attention to differing existing conditions that may require a clarification or change. D Shutdown of existing utilities, services or operations shall be done in accordance with Section 01010. 1.05 FIELD ENGINEERING AND LAYOUT A. The General Conditions require the Contractor to accurately layout the Work including the corners of buildings and other structures and the elevation of every floor, deck, roof, tank bottom, and channel B. Employ a Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer, as needed to accurately layout all detailed dimensions and elevations from reference points. Use recognized engineering survey methods and documentation techniques. 1.06 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Prior to beginning the work, the Contractor and its key personnel and subcontractors, including the Contractor's superintendent, project manager, and field engineer shall attend a meeting with the Owner to discuss the following: 1. Name, authority, and responsibilities of parties involved. 2. Project procedures: a. Progress meetings b. Correspondence c. Notification d. Submittal of Product Data, Shop Drawing samples, and proposed equivalents e. Requests for clarifications f. Clarifications g. Requests for quotation h. Work directive change i. Change orders October 2000 006017.01 01040 -3 Coordination and Project Requirements j. Engineer's "Items of Concem List." 3. Temporary schedule and Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Temporary facilities and control. 5. Testing during construction. 6. Contractor's coordination. 7. Mechanical /electrical coordination. 8. Maintenance of Record Drawings. 9 Owner-provided items of work and Owner Furnished Contractor Installed items. 10. Early beneficial or partial occupancy. 11. Final testing, startup, and balancing. 12. Punch lists and project closeout procedures. 13. Final deliverables including Record Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, and Special Guarantees. 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner will conduct weekly progress meetings with Contractor at job site. Attendance is required by Contractor's project manager, superintendent, and affected subcontractors and suppliers. The Owner will prepare, maintain, and distribute agenda and dated record of: (1) actions required and taken and (2) decisions needed and made. B. Agenda: 1. Review critical items /action list. 2. Review work progress. Compare actual progress with planned progress shown on Contractor's schedule. Discuss corrective action required. Compare actual and projected progress with Contractor's construction schedule, propose methods to correct deficiencies. 3. Review status of submittals; review delivery dates and date of need for critical items. 4. Review coordination problems. 5. Schedule needed testing and critical inspections. 6. Review critical requirements for each trade or major piece of equipment prior to beginning work or installation. 7. Discuss Contractor quality control. 8. Discuss open items on Owners "Items of Concern List." 9. Discuss impact of proposed changes on progress schedule. 10. Other business. 1 08 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACTOR- DESIGNED WORK A. Work under this Contract may be specified by a combination of descriptive, performance, reference standard, and proprietary specifications. In the event of conflict between any of the various specification methods used to specify a single item, the order of precedence shall be the order in which the methods are listed in the preceding sentence. The terms used to describe types of specifications are taken from the Construction Specification Institute (CSI) Manual of Practice. B. Where Specifications are used to define the characteristics of Contractor - designed systems, items, or components, the Contractor shall be fully responsible to design, engineer, manufacture, and install the systems, items, and components to meet the specified functional requirements, performance requirements, quality standards, durability standards, and conditions of use as well as all applicable codes, regulations, and referenced trade or industry standards. The Contractor shall perform such design by employing engineers licensed in the state in which the work October 2000 0 11•411.411 A vw u-.+ Coordination and Project Requirements is being constructed. The Contractor's design submittals shall include calculations and assumptions on which the design is based and shall be stamped and signed by appropriately licensed engineers. C. In accordance with the General Conditions, the Owner shall have the right to rely on the expertise and professional competence of the Contractor's design. Favorable review of the Contractor's design submittal shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for the adequacy of the Contractor design. 1.09 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Verify that products delivered meet requirements of Contract Documents and the requirements for favorably reviewed submittals. B. Compatibility of Equipment and Material: 1. Similar items, equipment, devices, or products furnished under a single Specification Section shall all be made by the same maker and have interchangeable parts. 2. In addition, but only if so stated in each affected Specification Section, similar items furnished under two or more Specification Sections shall be made by the same maker and have interchangeable parts. 3. All similar materials or products that are interrelated or used together in an assembly shall be compatible with each other. C Transportation and Handling: 1 Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3 Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. D. Storage and Protection: 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seals and labels shall be intact and legible. 2. Store moisture sensitive products including finish woodwork, gypsum products, acoustical products, motors, electrical equipment, instruments, and controls in weathertight, and humidity- and temperature - controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place items on sloped supports, aboveground. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration from moisture, dust, or sunlight with opaque watertight, but breathable sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 5. Provide offsite storage and protection including insurance coverage when site does not permit onsite storage or protection. 6. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 7. Provide facilities, equipment, and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 8. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. October 2000 006017.01 01040 -5 Coordination and Project Requirements E. installation Standards and Manufacturers' Recommendations: 1. Install all products and materials in strict compliance with the most restrictive of the following: a. The manufacturer's or provider's written instructions or recommendations. Follow step -by -step installation procedures. b. Recommendations of referenced trade associations or standards. c. These Specifications and Drawings. v. i � � tc�c v i� ad L/� GWII II�J. 2. Where conflicts exist, present alternatives with advantages and disadvantages to Engineer for decision. F. If reference standards or manufacturer's instructions contain provisions that would alter or are at variance with relationships between the parties to the Contract set forth in the Contract Documents, the provisions in the Contract Documents shall take precedence. 1.10 BACKING, SUPPORTS, AND FASTENERS A. Provide backing, supports, bracing, fasteners, and other provisions required for the proper support and attachment of all work. Backing, supports, bracing, and fasteners shall be sized to resist vertical and horizontal loads including seismic and wind loads required by codes listed under regulatory requirements in SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK AND CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS. Where finishes in existing facilities must be removed to install backing or where finishes are installed in new construction prior to installing backing, the Contractor shall remove finishes, install backing, and reinstall finishes. B. Use of explosive powder- driven fasteners is NOT PERMITTED. C. Low velocity pneumatic type power- driven fasteners may be used only: 1. Where specifically shown, specified or approved. 2. Where they meet the structural requirements for a particular assembly with a safety factor of at least 400 percent. 3 Power- driven fasteners may not be used for electrical or mechanical installations or to attach any items loaded in withdrawal or subject to vibration. 1.11 SAFETY A. in accordance with generally accepted construction practice and applicable law and the General Conditions, the Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for: 1. Construction means and methods. 2. Safety of employees engaged in the work while on and off the site. 3. Safety of the Owner, the Engineer, and others who may visit or be affected by the work. 4. Safety of the work itself, including material and equipment to be incorporated therein. 5. Safety of other property at the site or adjacent thereto. 6. Safety programs, equipment, and protective devices required to assure the safety of persons and property for whom /which the Contractor is responsible. B. The duties of the Owner or Engineer in conducting review of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's October 2000 006017 01 01040-6 Coordination ,,.. ,.. , Project ct o_ .. ts .:_____._ �. Coordination and Pro Requiremen work methods, equipment, bracing, scaffolding, or safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. C. The Contractor is hereby informed that work on this Project could be hazardous. The Contractor shall carefully instruct all personnel working in potentially hazardous - work areas as to potential dangers and shall provide such necessary safety equipment and instructions as required to prevent injury to personnel and damage to property, and to comply with all applicable laws and regulations. D. The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain the job in a condition that is safe for the Owner, the Engineer and their Consultants to make site visits and to conduct construction reviews. If the Owner or the Engineer cannot allow personnel to visit the job because it is not safe, the Contractor is not providing safe access to the Work and shall correct the deficiency immediately. E. The Contractor shall prepare a Safety Plan meeting the requirements of applicable regulations. As a minimum, the Contractor's Safety Plan shall set forth definite procedures for informing workers about safety, for instructing workers in safe practices, for assuring that workers are using appropriate safety equipment and safe work practices, and for reporting accidents. 1 12 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for inspecting the work of its suppliers and subcontractors to assure that the work, when completed, will comply with the standards for materials and workmanship required by the Contract Documents. B Inspections, periodic observations, and testing performed by the Owner or the Engineer are for the Owner's benefit and information only and shall not be construed as partial or incremental acceptance of the work and shall not be deemed to establish any duty on the part of the Owner or the Engineer to the Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers. C The Contractor shall: 1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce work of specified quality. 2. Comply fully with manufacturer's installation instructions, including performing each step in sequence as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding with work when manufacturer's instructions or reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 4 Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship 5 Perform work by persons specializing in the specific trade and class of work required and qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. 6 Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand seismic, static and dynamic loading, vibration, and physical distortion or disfigurement. D. If reference standards or manufacturer's instructions contain provisions that would alter or are at variance with relationships between the parties to the Contract set forth in the Contract Documents, the provisions in the Contract Documents shall take precedence October 2000 006017.01 01040 -7 Coordination and Project Requirements E. The Contractor shall provide assistance required by the Engineer to adequately inspect the work including ladders, scaffolding, lighting, ventilation, and other aids to facilitate access and provide a safe working environment. 1.13 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES AND CERTIFIED LABORATORY REPORTS A. Provide testing service in accordance with General Conditions requirements and specific requirements contained in each technical specification section. Submit Certified Laboratory Reports required by technical specification sections. 1.14 NOTIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining which agency or organization are required to be notified and so notifying them. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not applicable to this Section. END OF SECTION October 2000 nn n 17 r11 (11 -8 Coordination and Project Requirements SECTION 01140 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for maintaining the work areas occupied by the Contractor in a neat and clean condition and protecting the environment both onsite and offsite, throughout and upon completion of the construction Project. 1.02 MITIGATION OF CONSTRUCTION IMPACTS A. Requirements: All operations shall comply with all federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to water, air, solid waste, and noise pollution. B. Definitions of Contaminants: 1. Sediment: Soil and other debris that have been eroded and transported by runoff water. 2. Solid waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from construction activities, including a variety of combustible and non - combustible wastes, such as ashes, waste materials that result from construction or maintenance and repair work, leaves, and tree trimmings. 3. Chemical waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalies, herbicides, pesticides, disinfectants, organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes. Some of the above may be classified as "hazardous." 4. Sanitary wastes: a. Sewage: That which is considered as domestic sanitary sewage. b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of food. 5. Hazardous materials: As defined by applicable laws and regulations. Undisclosed hazardous material contamination, if encountered will constitute a changed site condition. The Engineer may retain a separate contractor to dispose of undisclosed hazardous material encountered. C. Protection of Natural Resources: 1. General: It is intended that the natural resources within the Project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work performed under this Contract be preserved in their existing condition or be restored to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of the work. Confine construction activities to areas defined by the public roads, easements, and work area limits shown on the Drawings. Return construction areas to their pre- construction elevations except where surface elevations are otherwise noted to be changed. Maintain natural drainage patterns. Conduct construction activities to avoid ponding stagnant water conducive to mosquito breeding. a. Keep haul roads clear at all times of any object which creates an unsafe condition. Promptly remove any contaminants or construction material dropped from construction vehicles. Do not drop mud and debris from construction equipment on public or private streets. Sweep clean turning areas and pavement entrances as necessary. October 2000 006017.01 01140 -1 Environmental Protection b. Promptly repair any damage caused by construction traffic to public or facility roads and facilities to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Water resources: Investigate and comply with all applicable federal, state and local regulations concerning the discharge (directly or indirectly) of pollutants to the underground and natural waters. a. Perform all work under this Contract in such a manner that any adverse environmental impacts are reduced to a level that is acceptable to the Engineer and regulatory agencies. b. Oily substances: At all times, special measures shall be taken to prevent oily or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water in such quantities as to affect normal use, aesthetics, or produce a measurable impact upon the area. Any soil or water which is contaminated with oily substances due to the Contractor's operations shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations. c. Chlorinated water: Take special measures to prevent chlorinated water from entering the ground or surface waters. Dechlorinate chlorinated water prior to discharge. 3. Cultural resources: The project does not pass through any known archaeological sites. However, it is conceivable that unrecorded archaeological sites could be discovered during the construction. In the event that artifacts, human remains, or other cultural resources are discovered during excavations at locations of the Work, the Contractor shall protect the discovered items, notify the Engineer, and comply with applicable law. 4. Noise control: The following noise control procedures shall be employed: a. Maximum Noise Levels within 1,000 Feet of any Residence, Business, or Other Populated Area: Noise levels for trenchers, pavers, graders, mechanical compaction equipment, and trucks shall not exceed 90 dBA at 50 feet as measured under the noisiest operating conditions. For all other equipment, noise levels shall not exceed 85 dBA at 50 feet. b. Equipment: Jack hammers shall be equipped with exhaust mufflers and steel muffling sleeves. Air compressors should be of a quiet type such as a "whisperized" compressor. c. Operations: Keep noisy equipment as far as possible from noise - sensitive site boundaries. Machines should not be left idling. Use electric power in lieu of internal combustion engine power wherever possible. Maintain equipment properly to reduce noise from excessive vibration, faulty mufflers, or other sources. All engines shall have mufflers. d. Scheduling: Schedule noisy operations so as to minimize their duration at any given location. e. Mnnitnring: Tn rletPrminP whathPr the nhnve nnise limits are heinn met and whether noise barriers are needed, the Contractor shall use a portable sound level meter meeting the requirements of American National Standards Institute Specification S1.4 for Type 2 sound level meters If non - complying noise levels are found, the Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and correction of excessive noise levels. 5. Dust control, air pollution, and odor control: Employ measures to prevent the creation of dust, air pollution, and odors. a Unpaved areas where vehicles are operated shall be periodically wetted down or given an equivalent form of treatment to eliminate dust formation. b Store all volatile liquids, including fuels or solvents in closed containers c. Properly maintain equipment to reduce gaseous pollutant emissions. d. No open burning of debris, lumber or other scrap will be permitted. October 2000 nnsn17 n1 n1 pan - Pnvirnnmantal Prntartinn 6. Construction storage areas: Storage of construction equipment and materials shall be limited to the designated Contractor's storage area. a. Store and service equipment at the designated Contractor's storage area where oil wastes shall be collected in containers. Oil wastes shall not be allowed to flow onto the ground or into surface waters. Containers shall be required at the construction site for the disposal of materials such as paint, paint thinner, solvents, motor oil, fuels, resins, and other environmentally deleterious substances. No dumping of surplus concrete or grout on the site will be permitted. 7. Sanitation: During the construction period, provide adequate and conveniently located chemical sanitation facilities, properly screened, for use of construction crews, Engineer, and visitors to the site. Facilities shall be regularly maintained. 8. Fire prevention: Take steps to prevent fires including, but not limited to, the following: a. Provide spark arrestors on all internal combustion engines. b. Store and handle flammable liquids in accordance with the Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30. c. Provide fire extinguishers at hazardous locations or operations, such as welding. 9. Erosion and sediment transport control: a. Discharge construction runoff into small drainages at frequent intervals to avoid buildup of large potentially erosive flows. b. Prevent runoff from flowing over unprotected slopes. c. Keep disturbed areas to the minimum necessary for construction. d Keep runoff away from disturbed areas during construction. e Direct flows over vegetated areas prior to discharge into public storm drainage systems. f. Trap sediment before it leaves the site, using such techniques as check dams, sediment ponds, or siltation fences. g. Remove and dispose of all Project construction - generated siltation that occurs in offsite retention ponds. h. Stabilize disturbed areas as quickly as possible. 1 03 DISPOSAL OPERATIONS A. Solid Waste Management: Supply solid waste transfer containers. Daily remove all debris such as spent air filters, oil cartridges, cans, bottles, combustibles, and litter. Take care to prevent trash and papers from blowing onto adjacent property. Encourage personnel to use refuse containers. Convey contents to a sanitary landfill B Washing of concrete containers where waste water may reach adjacent property or natural water courses will not be permitted. Remove any excess concrete to the sanitary landfill. C Chemical Waste and Hazardous Materials Management: Furnish containers for storage of spent chemicals used during construction operations. Dispose of chemicals and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations. D Garbage Store garbage in covered containers, pick up daily, and dispose of in a sanitary landfill. October 2000 006017 01 01140 -3 Environmental Protection E. Dispose of vegetation, weeds, rubble, and other materials removed by the clearing, stripping, and grubbing operations offsite at a suitable disposal site in accordance with applicable regulations. F. Excavated Materials: 1. Native soil may not be used for backfill, fill, and embankments without prior approval. 2. Spoil material: Remove all material which is excavated in excess of that required for backfill, and such excavated material which is unsuitable for backfill, from the site and dispose of offsite in accordance with applicable regulations at the disposal site indicated in the Environmental Protection Plan. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for such disposal. Include all such costs in the lump sum prices bid for the Project. 3. Remove rubbish and materials unsuitable for backfill immediately following excavation. Rubbish shall consist of all materials not classified as suitable materials or rubble and shall include shrubbery, trees, timber, trash, and garbage. Remove material in excess of that required for backfill immediately following backfill operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not applicable to this Section. END OF SECTION October 2000 nnnn17 n1 n11dn-A Environmental teal,,., w�v . . .- . V . . .V T LI IY14 VI Illlc l llal Protection VUVl1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART - 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: The requirements for making and obtaining approval of submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal containing the following information: 1. Contractor's name and the name of subcontractor or supplier who prepared the submittal. 2. The Project name and identifying number. 3. Description of the submittal and reference to the Contract requirement or technical Specification Section and paragraph number being addressed. B. Submit the number and type of copies for each submittal and follow the procedures described below or in other paragraphs in this Section. Submit 4 copies of submittals not covered in this SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS. 1. Designation of superintendent: Submit 3 copies for information. Include name, address, home telephone number, and a brief resume. 2. List of subcontractors and major suppliers: Submit 3 copies for information. Include address, telephone number, and name of responsible party. 3. Manufacturers' affidavits: Submit 6 copies for items specified in the technical Specifications. C. Additional submittal requirements indicated in these Contract Documents are to be met. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Submit 3 copies for information. No copy will be returned. B. Within 15 days after the Notice to Proceed, submit a Schedule of Submittals showing the date by which each submittal required for Product Review or Product Information will be made. Identify the items that will be included in each submittal (see paragraph 1.06 of this Section) by listing the item or group of items and the Specification Section and paragraph number under which they are specified. Indicate whether the submittal is required for Product Review of Proposed Equivalents, Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples or required for Product Information only. 1.04 PLAN OF OPERATIONS A. Submit 3 copies. B. Before beginning on site work, submit a plan showing Contractor's intended use of the site assigned to it. Show location of enclosing fence (temporary and permanent), access routes, and gates. Show location for Contractor's, October 2000 006017.01 01300 -1 Submittals subcontractor's, and Engineer's field offices and parking. Show location of Contractor's and subcontractor's work areas, laydown and storage areas. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - A. Submit 4 copies for information. No copy will be returned. B. If the Construction uctio11 Schedule does not reflect the CP1vi format lat r equir eI I I I lts, the specified work, or the Contract Time, it will be returned to the Contractor for modification. C. Revise the Construction Schedule and resubmit within seven (7) days following any monthly meeting to review Contractor's Application for Payment when Contractor's work is fifteen (15) days or more behind schedule. D. Accelerated Work if Required to Meet Schedule: Give Owner 3 days prior notice of construction that will take place outside of normal work hours or work days. Compensate Owner for extra inspection cost caused by Accelerated Work required to meet Schedule. E. Give Engineer 3 days prior notice of normal work days on which construction will not take place or of scheduled construction that will not take place. Compensate Owner for extra inspection cost resulting from failure to give notice. 1.06 SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES SUBMITTED FOR PRODUCT REVIEW A. This paragraph covers submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples required for the Engineer's review referred to as Product Review submittals in the technical Specifications (Divisions 2 through 17). Submittals required for information only are referred to as Product Information submittals in the technical Specifications and are covered in paragraph 1.08 of this Section. B. Number and Type of Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit 5 clear, sharp, high- contrast copies. One copy will be marked, stamped and returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute the required number of additional copies to its superintendent, subcontractors, and suppliers. 2. Product Data: Submit 5 clear copies. One copy will be marked, stamped, and returned. The Contractor shall make and distribute the required number of additional copies to its superintendent, subcontractors, and suppliers. 3. Samples: Submit 3 labeled samples or 3 sets of samples of manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. Comply with requirements in technical Specification Sections. One sample will be returned to Contractor with Owner's comments. C. The Contractor shall make all Product Review submittals early enough to allow adequate time for the Engineer's review, for manufacture, and for delivery at the construction site without causing delay to the work. Submittals shall be made early enough to allow for unforeseen delays such as: 1. Failure to obtain Favorable Review because of inadequate or incomplete submittal or because the item submitted does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. October 2000 nnA017 n1 01100 -2 S vvv • . .v • v .vv v Submittals 2. Delays in manufacture. 3. Delays in delivery. D. Content of Submittals: 1. Each submittal shall include all of the items and material required for a complete assembly, system, or Specification Section. 2. Submittals shall contain all of the physical, technical, and performance data required by the Specifications or as necessary to demonstrate conclusively that the items comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Include information on characteristics of electrical or utility service required and verification that requirements have been coordinated with services provided by the work and by other interconnected elements of the work. 4. Provide verification that the physical characteristics of items submitted, including size, configuration, clearances, mounting points, utility connection points, and service access points are suitable for the space provided and are compatible with other interrelated items that are existing or have or will be submitted. 5. Label each Product Data submittal, Shop Drawing, and Sample with the information required in paragraph 1.02A of this Section. Highlight or mark every page of every copy of all Product Data submittals to show the specific items being submitted and all options included or choices offered. 6. Additional requirements for Product Review submittals are contained in the technical Specification sections. 7. Designation of work as "NIC" or "by others" on Shop Drawings shall mean that the work will be the responsibility of the Contractor rather than the subcontrac- tor or supplier who has prepared the Shop Drawings. E. Compatibility of Equipment and Material: 1 Verify that items contained in the same or in different submittals meet the requirements in the paragraph titled "Material and Equipment" in Section 01040, especially the subparagraph titled "Compatibility of Equipment and Material." F. Requirements for Contractor - Designed Items and for First Specified (Named) Items: 1. Verify that items meet the requirements in the paragraph titled "Performance Specifications and Contractor Designed Work" in Section 01040 and the requirements of the technical Specifications. G. Submittals that contain deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be accompanied by a separate letter explaining the deviations. The Contractor's letter shall: 1. Cite the specific Contract requirement including the Specification Section and paragraph number for which approval of a deviation is sought. 2. Describe the proposed alternate material, item, or construction and explain its advantages and /or disadvantages to the Owner 3. State the reduction in Contract Price, if any, that is offered to the Owner. H Engineer's Review Procedure and Meaning: 1. The Owner will stamp and mark each Product Review submittal prior to returning it to the Contractor. The stamp will indicate whether or not the review was favorable and what action is required of the Contractor. Review categories "No Exceptions Taken" and "Make Corrections Noted" both indicate Favorable Review 2. The Owner's Favorable Review is contingent upon meeting the requirements of the technical Specifications. Favorable Review is also contingent on: October 2000 006017.01 01300 -3 Submittals a. The compatibility of items included in a submittal with other related or inlet dependent items included in previous or future submittals. b. Future submittal of items related to or required to be part of this submittal that were not included with this submittal. Favorable Review of a submittal does not constitute approval or deletion of items required as part of the submittal, but not included with the submittal. Favorable Review of items included in the submittal does not constitute deletion of specified features, options, or accessories that were not included in the submittal. 3. The action required by the Contractor for each category of review is as follows: a. NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED: c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT. d. REVISE SPECIFIED ITEM e. REJECTED 4. The letter of transmittal accompanying the returned Product Review submittal may contain numbered notes. Marking a corresponding number on a Shop Drawing or Product Data submittal shall have the same affect as applying the entire note to the submittal. I. Re- submittals that contain changes that were not requested by the Owner on the previous submittal shall be accompanied by a letter explaining the change. J. Favorable Review Required Prior to Proceeding: 1. Do not proceed with manufacture, fabrication, delivery, or installation of items prior to obtaining the Engineer's Favorable Review of Product Review submittals. K. Intent and Limitation on Owner's Review: 1. See General Conditions. 2. The Contractor has primary responsibility for submitting and providing work that complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. That responsibility cannot be delegated in whole or in part to subcontractors or suppliers. Neither the Owner's Favorable Review nor the Owner's failure to notice or comment on deficiencies in the Contractor's submittals shall relieve the Contractor from the duty to provide work which complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.07 PROPOSED EQUIVALENTS A. Comply with the submittal requirements for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples submitted for Product Review in another paragraph of this Section. B. Time of Submittal: Submit all equivalents within 21 days. The Engineer may agree to a later submittal date if requested in writing within 21 days of the Notice to Proceed. The request shall identify the item, give the Specification reference, and proposed manufacturer and model number of the item that will be submitted and the proposed submittal date. The Engineer's agreement to a later submittal date shall be in writing and shall not be construed as Favorable Review or acceptance of the manufacturer or item proposed. C. Content of submittals shall be the same as that required for Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples submitted for Product Review in another paragraph of this Section. In addition, the Owner may request that the Contractor provide information on several recent similar installations of the item to verify its suitability The information shall include the project name and location, the Owner's name, October 2000 006017.01 01300 -4 Submittals address, telephone number and name of a knowledgeable person to contact for information on performance of the product. D. If a non - equivalent substitute is submitted for review, it shall be accompanied by a proposed reduction in Contract Price which shall include the increased cost of engineering service required to evaluate the proposed substitute (which shall be paid to the Owner whether or not the substitute is accepted) plus the greater of 1) the difference in price between the first specified item and the item submitted and 2) the difference in value to the Owner between the two items. 1.08 PRODUCT INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Submit three (3) copies. No copies will be returned. B. Product Information submittals are required for the Owner's permanent records and will be used for future maintenance, repair, modification, or replacement work. Product Information submittals will be examined only to verify that the required submittals have been made; they will NOT be reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Make Product Information submittals prior to delivering material, products, or items for which Product Information submittals are required. D The Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for furnishing products and work that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The Owner reserves the right to comment on any submittal and to reject any product or work delivered, installed, or otherwise at any time that the Owner becomes aware that it is defective or does not meet the requirements of the Contract Document. 1 09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND PARTS LISTS A. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and parts list for all equipment and/or systems furnished under this Contract. Comply with the detailed requirements in technical Specification Sections. Include instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, lubrication, adjusting, start-up, operation, and maintenance. 1. For all equipment include: a. Start-up instructions b Normal operation instructions c Troubleshooting instructions d Lubrication instructions e. Maintenance and reinstallation instructions f. Parts identification g. List of spare parts recommended to have on hand h Operator safety instructions. 2. For all electrical equipment, provide the following additional information. a Equipment ratings b. Calibration curves and rating tables if appropriate. 3 For complex equipment provide in addition: a. Alternate specified operating modes b Emergency shutdown instructions c. Normal shutdown instructions d. Long -term shutdown instructions. October 2000 006017.01 01300 -5 Submittals 4. Operation and maintenance manuals for systems composed of separate pieces of equipment shall include a system explanation of items 1 a, b, and c, and 3a through c, as well as the instructions for each separate piece of equipment. B. Preliminary manuals: none required C Final a ls C. i r manuals: 1. Submit at least two (2) sets of manufacturer supplied Operation and Maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. Submit three (3) copies. B. When specified in technical Specification Section, submit manufacturers' certificate to Owner for review. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to the Owner. October 2000 nnFni7 n1 0110n_R Gihmiftilc 1.11 LIST OF SUBMITTALS FOR DIVISIONS 0 AND 1 A. Submittals required with the Bid are not listed. Description 1 Required by 1 Time of Submittal 1 1 Performance & Payment Bonds GC Prior to signing Agreement , 2. Liability Insurance Certificates GC Prior to beginning Construction 3. Property Insurance Certificates GC Prior to beginning Construction 4 Plan of Operations 01300, par 1.04 Prior to beginning work on the site 5 Schedule of Submittals 01300, par 1.03 Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed 6. Schedule of Values GC. 01010 20 days prior to the first Application for Payment 7 Application for Payment GC, 01010 5 days prior to each Application for Payment date 8. Construction Schedule 01300, par 1 05 Within 7 days of Notice to Proceed. 9 Submittal of All Proposed Technical Sections Within 21 days of the Notice to Proceed unless Equivalent Items /Systems Owner has agreed to a later submittal date in writing 10 Manufacturer's Certificates 01300, par 1.10 Prior to delivenng material or equipment and in and Technical accordance with Technical Specifications Specifications 11 Operations and Maintenance 01300, par 1 09 Submit 15 days prior to Facility Startup and Manuals and Parts Lists 01650, par 1 06A Training 12. Manufacturer's Affidavits 01300, par 1 02 During equipment startup. For equipment for 01650, par 1.02B which affidavits are called for in the Technical Specifications 13. Record Drawings 01300, para. 1 14 Prior to Final Acceptance 14 Special Guarantees Technical Prior to Final Acceptance Specifications 15. Release of Liens GC Prior to Final Payment 16 Contractor's Waiver of Claims GC Prior to Final Payment 17 Insurance Certificate for GC Prior to Final Payment insurance coverage beyond Final Payment including completed operations coverage and liability coverage when the Contractor is correcting defective work under the Guarantee. 1 12 SUBMITTALS FOR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. Refer to Technical Specification Sections for detailed submittal requirements. 1 13 SUBMITTAL OF RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep a complete set of Contract Documents including all modifications and all favorably reviewed submittals at site. The Contractor shall prepare Record Drawings by neatly adding references to modifications, as -built work that differs from Contract Drawings, and dimensioned, as- installed location of underground piping, conduit, etc. The Contractor shall make Record Drawings available to Owner to verify progress. The Contractor shall submit and obtain favorable review of the Record Drawings prior to Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not applicable to this Section END OF SECTION October 2000 006017 01 01300 -7 Submittals SECTION 01650 FACILITY STARTUP 1.01 FACILITY STARTUP A. Commission all systems and equipment to verify performance, function, and correct operation by performing procedures to activate, startup, adjust, test, and demonstrate that the work is in operating order in accordance with these general requirements of this Section and the detailed requirements of the technical sections. To ensure that the work is ready for full -time operation the procedures include verification, balancing, calibration, witness testing, documentation, inspection by equipment manufacturers and operator training where specified. Definitions: Contractor: General Contractor for the Water Fluoridation System project. Field Test: Verification of all control strategies with all equipment in operation under normal conditions. Startup: Operation of the facility, including full automation, for a set time period after field testing is complete. Performance Testing: Verification that individual equipment or systems are performing within specified limits. Permanent System: Functioning Water Fluoridation System installed. System is capable of manual operation or PLC control. PLC Contractor: Responsible for programming PLC equipment. PLC Contractor services are provided by the Owner. The Contractor, however, is responsible for coordinating the work of the PLC Contractor The PLC Contractor is not responsible for any wiring terminations or instrument installation. B Notification: Notify the Owner five days prior to starting each system or piece of equipment. C Coordination: During the startup period, coordinate the operation of the facility, equipment with Owner, subcontractors, other contractors, plant personnel, and manufacturer's representatives. D. Furnish test equipment, measuring devices and supplies required to conduct tests. E. Maintain the equipment until acceptance. Provide all lubricants, chemicals, and electricity necessary until acceptance. F. Furnish all expendable supplies required for startup, demonstration and testing and dispose of all waste or used supplies, water, etc. October 2000 006017.01 01650 -1 Facility Startup 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Startup Plan, Forms, and Schedule: Prepare a facility startup plan and schedule. The plan shall include test methods and procedures and sample forms for recording test data. B. Submit documentation of tests. 1.03 TESTING AND STARTUP, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The following listing is a general sequence of steps to be used in placing facility systems into operation. Refer to the general and specific equipment specification for additional requirements : 1. Perform initial lubrication of equipment and have manufacturers check and adjust equipment. Provide all subsequent lubrication and maintenance, and such staff as required for test operation until the Owner assumes equipment maintenance responsibility. 2. Perform satisfactory testing of electrical work required prior to energizing of the electrical system. 3. Perform satisfactory electrical testing required after energizing of the electrical system. 4. Complete calibration of instruments. 5. Perform a rotational test of equipment and correct backward rotating drives. 6. Test operate the equipment by manually initiating the operation. Where manual operation bypasses alarm or safety monitoring, provide continuous supervision of such parameters. Perform this step using water in lieu of chemicals or other process liquids. Perform instrumentation and control testing and adjustments as related to the equipment being tested in conjunction with the PLC Contractor. 7. Where possible at this stage of startup, complete the performance testing specified for the equipment. 8. Perform adjustments of the electrical work as related to the equipment being tested. 9 Repeat as required for other equipment items and plant systems until all plant process components and utility systems are ready for total system operation. 10. After all individual equipment and systems have been tested and are ready for operation the field test of the control system may be performed by the Owner. The Contractor make availahle a mechanic and electrician to support field testing. B. The Owner will arrange a witness for the Engineer to verify that the startup has been completed successfully for both temporary and permanent installation. One day has been allowed to verify each startup. The Contractor shall perform startup activities and test as necessary to insure the system works properly prior to the Engineer's verification. Should verification take more than one day the Owner will charge the Contractor for the extra time required to witness that startup has been successfully completed. October 2000 (10601 ni 016 Facility Startup 1.04 Water Fluoridation System A. The following sequence of events is specific to the installation of the permanent system. 1. Install equipment including tanks, pumps, piping, and electrical systems. 2. Hydrotest tank and piping. 3. Performance test pumps. 4. Perform startup of the system. 5. Restore site to original condition. 1.05 TRAINING A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Part at least 15 days prior to the first training session. B. Demonstrate the operation, maintenance and safety procedures for all Contractor furnished systems and equipment to personnel designated by the Owner. C. Controls system training will be provided by the PLC contractor. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 01650 -3 Facility Startup SECTION 03252 CONCRETE ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide and install all epoxy- grouted anchors and expansion anchors where shown on the Drawings or where required. B. Anchor all equipment and appurtenant facilities in accordance with the requirements of specification Section 01300. 1.02 APPLICATION A. Adhesive anchors and expansion anchors shall be used only where specifically called for on the Drawings, where specified, or where favorably reviewed by Engineer. Neither adhesive anchors nor expansion anchors shall be used as substitutes for cast -in -place anchor bolts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to the Engineer for favorable review prior to the installation of any anchors. B. Submit a sample of each type of adhesive anchor and each type of expansion anchor proposed for use. Include with the samples a certification of Toad test capacity and the manufacturers recommended installation procedures. C. Submit manufacturer's product information and catalog cut sheets, including recommended installation procedures and precautions, on epoxy adhesive proposed for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST -IN -PLACE ANCHORS A. Regular Bolts: A307 or A36, galvanized. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A354 Grade BC, galvanized. B Provide a standard bolt head or L -shape bend in the embedded portion. Provide minimum embedment shown on the Drawings, or a minimum of eight bolt diameters. 2.02 CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHORS A. General: 1 Provide the torque - controlled type, which expands permanently against the sides of a drilled hole when a steel expansion cone is forced into the shield by tightening the nut. The displacement - controlled type, which expands by driving a October 2000 006017.01 03252 - 1 Concrete Anchors cone into a sleeve, is unacceptable, as is any type of anchor which can be released, or which could be loosened by vibration. 2. Provide a satisfactory evaluation report by ICBO. 3. Embedment: As shown on the Drawings, or a minimum of six head diameters. _ 4. Material: Provide as specified in the Drawings. Provide galvanized anchors where not identified on the Drawings B. Expansion Anchors: 1. Provide Molly Parabolt as supplied by Black & Decker Co., Hilti HSL or Kwik -bolt as supplied by Hilti Corp., or equal. Install in strict adherence to manufacturer's recommendations and to the latest ICBO Report. 2.03 MASONRY EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Provide either the deformation - controlled type, or the torque- controlled type of anchor. B. Submit certification of product tension and shear load tests in masonry. C. Embedment: As shown on the Drawings, or a minimum of eight head diameters. D. Material: Provide items as specified on the Drawings. E. Provide the Dynabolt Sleeve anchor supplied by ITW Ramset/Red Head; the Rawl - Bolt supplied by Rawlplug Company; or equal. 2.04 ADHESIVE ANCHORAGES A. Epoxy Adhesive Cartridge Anchors: 1. Bent, hooked or iong length reinforcing or threaded bar anchors or dowels bonded into a pre - drilled hole with an adhesive inserted by a gun from a cartridge. 2. Provide a product evaluation report by ICBO. 3. Provide CIA Anchorage System by Covert Operations, Long Beach, CA; Anchor - It Fastening System by Adhesives Technology Corporation, South Kent, WA; or equal. B. Adhesive Capsule Anchors: 1. Two component type, one component being a threaded bar with nut and washer and the other component being a sealed glass cartridge containing a premeasured amount of polyester or vinylester resin, aggregate, and a hardening agent. 2. Provide a product evaluation report by ICBO. 3 Provide Molly Parabond capsule anchors, as supplied by the Black & Decker Co.; HVA adhesive anchors as manufactured by Hilti Corp.; or equal. C Material: Provide as specified in the Drawings. Provide galvanized anchors where not identified on the Drawings. October 2000 006017 01 (119.ri9 _ 2 Concrete Anchors PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EMBEDMENT A. Total depth of embedment of all concrete anchors into sound concrete shall be not Tess than that shown on the Drawings or, where not shown, not less than the minimum required by the Uniform Building Code for the diameter of the bolt installed. 3.02 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. The hole into which the anchor is to be inserted shall be core - drilled. The surfaces of the cored hole shall be roughened with a rotary drill. The hole shall be no more than 1/4 -inch larger in diameter than the diameter of the anchor. B. Just prior to setting the anchor, the drilled hole into which the anchor is inserted shall be clean and shall be free of dust, dirt, debris, standing water, or any substance that will not allow the epoxy to bond tenaciously to the concrete. The anchor shall also be clean and free of any substance, which will not allow the epoxy to adhere to the anchor. C. Neat epoxy shall completely fill the space surrounding the anchor when the anchor rests on the bottom of the drilled hole. No air pockets shall be present in the epoxy. D No load shall be applied to the anchor nor shall the anchor be moved, jiggled, or bumped until the epoxy has fully cured. The cure period shall be as required by the epoxy manufacturer. E. Once the epoxy has cured per the manufacturer's requirements, epoxy - grouted anchors shall be load tested. Testing shall consist of placing steel baseplates on the bolts, threading nuts on the bolts, and tightening the nuts against the baseplates to a torque of 80 ft-Ibs. 3.03 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Installation of expansion anchors shall be in strict adherence to the anchor manufacturer's recommendations, these specifications, and to the latest International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) Evaluation Report on that product. B. The diameter of the drilled hole into which the anchor is inserted shall be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer. C Just prior to setting the anchor, the drilled hole and the expansion anchor shall be clean and free of dust or other substances, which will not allow the proper seating of the anchor. D Expansion anchors shall be tightened to the minimum torque as recommended by the anchor manufacturer prior to placing any load on the anchor. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 03252 - 3 Concrete Anchors SECTION 03310 REINFORCING STEEL, CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE AND CONCRETE FINISH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing steel. 2. Cast -in -place concrete. 3. Concrete finishes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting 3 ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting 4. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Test Method: 1 A185 Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement 2. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 3. C150 Portland Cement 4. C260 Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 5. C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete C Standard Specifications: 1. WATRANS Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, Washington State Department of Transportation and American Public Works Association, Washington State Chapter 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Concrete materials certifications. 2. Concrete mix design, including test results. 3. Concrete placement method and sequence. 4 Reinforcing steel shop drawings. 5. Concrete curing method. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: B Concrete Tests: WATRANS October 2000 006017.01 03310 - 1 Cast in Place Concrete and Concrete Finish 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Provide storage a*nd handling of all materials so that upon delivery they are undeteriorated and ready for use. !�T /' PRODUCTS 1nTf� PART 2- PRODU-.TS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. WALTRANS Section 9 except as modified below: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali. 2. Aggregate: 1 -inch maximum size. 3. Admixtures: a) Air entraining: ASTM C260. b) Water reducing: ASTM C494 Type A. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. WALTRANS Section 9.07 except as modified below. 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 Grade 60. 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185; sheets. 2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Concrete Class: 3000 B. Specified 28 -Day Compressive Strength: 3500 psi C. Minimum Cement ions Material Content: 574 lbs. D. Water - Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.50 E. Minimum Air Content: 4 -1/2% 2.04 FORMS A. General: Take responsibility for adequacy of forms, bracing and shoring. Satisfy ACI 347. Provide mortar -tight construction. B. Tolerances: ACI 301. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. General: WALTRANS Section 6.02 except as modified below. B. Preliminary Work: Provide a 6 -inch gravel layer to 95% compaction below base slabs. October 2000 006017.01 03310 - 2 Cast in Place Concrete and Concrete Finish C. Embedded Items: Locate accurately and securely in place prior to concreting. D. Concrete Cover to Reinforcement: ACI 301. E. Cold Weather: ACI 306 when temperature is below 40 °F. F. Hot Weather: ACI 305 when temperature is above 75 °F. G. Exposed Comers: Chamfer 3/4 -inch. H. Surface Finish: Ordinary Surface Finish. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 03310 - 3 Cast in Place Concrete and Concrete Finish SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All concrete unit masonry (CMU). 2. Related reinforcing. 3. All scaffolding, bracing, forming and shoring required for this work. B Related Sections: 1. Section 03310: Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Section 07190: Water Repellant Sealer 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 2. C90 Standard Specification for Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 3 C140 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units 4. C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 5. C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 6. C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 7. C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 8. C331 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units 9. C341 Standard Test Method for Length Change of Drilled or Sawed Specimens of Hydraulic Cement Mortar and Concrete 10. C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout 11. C426 Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block 12. C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry B. "Masonry Design Manual' published by the Masonry Industry Advancement Committee. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Fully describe every item proposed for use. 2. Samples: Masonry units proposed for use on the project. 3. Certifications: Manufacturer's certification that masonry units were manufactured and wet cured for 28 days prior to delivery. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Uniform Building Code (UBC), adopted edition, especially Chapters 19 and 21 including referenced UBC Standards. Where full allowable stresses were used in the design of the buildings, structures or structural elements the Contractor shall provide testing for masonry, mortar, and October 2000 006017.01 04220 - 1 Concrete Masonry Units grout satisfying the requirements of UBC Chapter 21, Section 2105 for full allowable stresses used in design. Testing requirements and quantity of tests shall satisfy the requirements for full allowable stresses used in design. Comply with UBC Standards 21 -16, 21 -17 and 21 -18. B. When 1 /2 allowable masonry stresses are used for design special inspection is not required. See Drawings for buildings, structures or structural elements requiring special inspection. Special inspection shall be in accordance with UBC Section 1701.7. C. All construction or work shall be subject to inspection by the local building official and the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall make all work or construction accessible and exposed for inspection of the cells and for the size and placement of reinforcement, anchors, or other imbedded items. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Store all material protected from moisture and from contamination by dirt, mud or other foreign material. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades whose items that require embedment into masonry. Build in items furnished under other sections as work progresses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Manufacture all concrete masonry units from expanded shale, clay or shale aggregate, produced by the rotary kiln process, and conforming with ASTM C331, "Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units." Manufacture units using concrete that weights between 85 and 105 pounds per cubic foot (1362 and 1682 kg per cubic meter) when measured in accordance with ASTM C140. B Provide hollow load- bearing concrete masonry units Grade N conforming to ASTM 090, Type i as modified by the "Standards for Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units, California Quality Control" and meeting the following requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength of 1,900 psi (13,100 kPa) and a tensile strength o f no t less th 1 35 psi (930 kPa) when air c fired (nr equivalent) for a period of 28 days. 2. Maximum linear shrinkage of 0.065 percent from saturated to oven dry conditions, when tested in accordance with ASTM C341, or 0.045% when tested in accordance with ASTM C426. 3. Wet cure all blocks a minimum of 28 days before delivery to the site. C. Manufacturer: Mutual Materials Company, Bellevue, Washington Inc.; Eastside Masonry Products, Inc, Redmond, Washington; or equal. 1. Typical Exterior Units: 8 inch by 8 inch by 16 inch nominal split -face in tan color. 2. Interior surface: smooth. 3. Provide all bond beam, lintel, half, pilaster, wall, cap blocks, and other special shapes and sizes required. October 2000 nnan17 n1 04220 - 2 C onc r e t e Maso Units 2.02 MORTAR A. Mortar: Type "S" and complying with ASTM C270 and proportioned as necessary _ to comply with the requirements of UBC Table 21A and 21 D for the strength of block used. B. Tint mortar with mineral oxide colors to match selected block color. 2.03 GROUT A. Grout: Minimum strength of 2,500 psi. Cement content of the grout shall be increased, as necessary to achieve the specified masonry assembly strength (fm) and adequate workability. Grout compressive strength, when tested per UBC Standard 21 -18 shall equal or exceed the concrete masonry unit strength. Portland cement, hydrated lime, fine aggregate and pea gravel conforming to ASTM C404 and ASTM C476. Proportion grout in accordance with UBC Table 21 B. Use only favorably reviewed admixtures. 2.04 CEMENT A. Cement for Grout and Mortar: Portland cement, Type II and conforming to ASTM C150, and meeting the requirements of low alkali cement in conformance with Table 2 of ASTM C150. Masonry cement is not permitted. 2.05 WATER A. Mixing Water: Potable and free from excess alkalies. 2.06 LIME A. Hydrated Lime: Conform to ASTM C207, Type S. 2.07 SAND A. Mortar Sand: Conform to ASTM C144, except that at least 4% passing No. 100 (150 mm) sieve. Sand and pea gravel for grout shall conform to ASTM C404, Table 1, coarse aggregate. Uniformly grade from fine to coarse. Allow not more than 2% by weight of deleterious substances. 2.08 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60. B Detail and Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with the requirements for reinforcing steel in Section 03200 and as shown. 2.09 BONDING AGENT A. Non- reemulsifiable polyvinyl acetate, Roplex, Acryl -60, or equal October 2000 006017.01 04220 - 3 Concrete Masonry Units PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BATCHING AND MIXING MORTAR A. Proportion mortar by volume using containers of known volume. B. Mix ingredients in a paddle type (plastic) mixer for at least 3 minutes. C. Add only enough water to produce a plastic mix. Do not retemper mortar, which has begun to hydrate. Any mortar that is unused within 2'A hours or grout that is unused within 1 1/2 hours after initial mixing shall be removed from the work. 3.02 GROUT A. Plant batch grout by weight and mix in transit. Design grout mix to have a certified 28 -day strength of 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa) and a slump of 9 to 10 inches (230 to 250 mm). 3.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS AND DETAILS A. General: 1. Install work plumb, level, and of correct dimensions and location. 2. Lay block in running bond. 3. Install reinforcing as specified and /or shown. All vertical wall reinforcement placed in a direction perpendicular to the wall plane shall be placed within a tolerance of ±1/2 inch. All longitudinal reinforcement shall be placed within a tolerance of ±2 inches. 4. Lay masonry units so the vertical cells line up and are not obstructed by excess mortar. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings provide additional vertical reinforcing of one #6 bar at every corner and a #6 bar each side of every wail opening. 5. Sandblast concrete foundation or slab to expose aggregate. Use bonding agent to bond the first layer of mortar setting bed to the concrete slab or foundation. 6. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings construct horizontal bond beams reinforced with one #5 bar at the top and bottom of walls and at intermediate locations where shown, but not farther apart than 2'-0" 7. Construct bond beams over all openings reinforced as shown but with not less than two No. 5 bars. 8 Gro it all calls, B. Provide cleanout openings at the bottom of all cells containing vertical reinforcing. Locate cleanouts on the inside face of the exterior walls; seal cleanouts after inspection and before grouting. Use a high - pressure jet stream of water to remove mortar fins and any foreign matter from the grout space. C. Joints: 1. Set units with 3/8- inch -thick mortar joints. Compress partially set mortar with a convex tool to produce a dense surface. 2. Butter head joints solid for the thickness of the face shell so that there are no voids between abutting faces. Set units in bed joints that are filled solid with mortar for the thickness of the face shell. Remove mortar fins that project more than 3/8 -inch into the grout cell. October 2000 006017 01 04220 - 4 Concrete Masonry Units 3. If a unit is repositioned after placing, it shall be completely removed, cleaned and reset in fresh mortar. 4. Cure mortar joints by keeping masonry units and joints damp for ten days after laying units by applying a very fine water mist spray and covering work with polyethylene sheeting. 5. Repair any shrinkage cracks in block or mortar joints as described in paragraph 3.04 of this Section. D. Cut masonry units accurately and cleanly to size with diamond blades on power masonry saws. E. Special Units: Provide all required special units. Where special units are not available from the supplier, cut available units and fabricate required special shapes by epoxy bonding. F. Reinforcing: Conform to the requirements for reinforcing steel in Section 03300. Anchor reinforcing bars in straight alignment and secure against displacement with metal positioners spaced not further apart than 200 bar diameters. Lap reinforcing steel 48 bar diameters minimum at splices. Stagger splices. When a foundation dowel does not line up with the vertical core to be reinforced, add a full height reinforcing bar matching those used in other vertical cores and grout the core full height. Set an additional dowel in the vertical core originally intended to be reinforced by drilling a hole 8 inches deep in the concrete foundation or slab and setting a bar in epoxy grout. G. Grouting: 1. Limit maximum height of grout pour in accordance with UBC Table 21C. 2. Place grout in the reinforced hollow concrete block wall after the units have been set for at least 24 hours. 3. Place grout using a method to avoid segregation. 4. Fill all cells solid with grout. Place grout in lifts not over 6 feet. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration. See paragraph 3.03B of this Section. 5. Allow sufficient time between pours of two consecutive lifts of grout for the grout to consolidate and settle, and for absorption of excess moisture. The time between grout lifts shall be at least 1 hour. 6. Consolidation of the succeeding grout lift and the reconsolidation of the previous grout lift may be done in the same operation. Reconsolidate the last lift of a grout pour in a separate and distinct operation. 7. If grouting is done in multiple lifts stop the top surface of the grout of each lift 1- 1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at the top of a wall, when grouting bond beams stop the grout pour 1/2 -inch below the top of the masonry unit. H. All embedded items (bolts, etc.) shall be secured in place prior to grouting. Provide a minimum of 1 -inch grout around all bolts in masonry. Embed all anchors, ties, and sleeves required to accommodate the work of others Build in or embed other work required to be built into masonry. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean down all masonry by scrubbing with water masonry cleaner and bristle brushes. Do not clean with muriatic acid. October 2000 006017.01 04220 - 5 Concrete Masonry Units 3.05 REPAIRS A. Repair or replace all defective work including: 1. Units that are smeared with mortar or grout. 2. Unevenly laid units. 3. Repair all cracks wider than 4 mils. a. Dig out cracks 4 mils and wider in masonry units and install a polyurethane sealant "B" in accordance with the requirements of Section 07900. Use a sealant that has a 20 -year life expectancy and is compatible with the masonry sealer. Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. b. Route out and repoint cracks in mortar joints with a stiff mortar modified by replacing one -third of the mixing water with acrylic bonding agent. Re -tool the patched joint. END OF SECTION October 2000 nnnne7 ne nnnnn c n. �� i .:. UUUU 1 / .0 1 V'tGLV - V �.vi wI GtC wiaavi u y vi "w SECTION 06600 FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included in this Section: Furnish and install fiberglass troughs and fiberglass grating, supports, fasteners and accessories, complete, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related sections including work specified in this Section: 1. Section 05100: Structural Steel (Miscellaneous Metals) 102 REFERENCES A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. F101 -96 AWWA Standard for Contact - Molded Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash Water Troughs and Launders B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. G23 ASTM Standard Practice for Operating Light- Exposure Apparatus With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete initial submittals in the Product Review category for favorable review prior to fabrication for: 1. Troughs, fasteners and accessories. 2. Grating. 3. Include samples of proposed trough, material and fasteners, and grating to the Engineer for favorable review prior to fabrication. Sufficient information shall be included to dearly indicate that proposed material is in compliance with the Specifications and to show in detail the fabrication method, materials, workmanship, method of attachment to adjacent materials and color of the products proposed to be furnished. Include layout and dimension drawings. If block -out procedures are to be used for installing embedded items, submit block -out dimensions and details. B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturers' installation instructions and parts lists. C Performance Testing: Submit certified test results, as described in paragraph 2.01E indicating compliance with the specified requirements before installation of the grating and troughs. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: All items furnished under this Section shall be supplied by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of similar items for at least five years. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the items made by the manufacturers named herein. October 2000 006017.01 06600 - 1 Fiberglass Fabrications B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the current edition of the Uniform Building Code, especially Chapter 26, Plastic. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Inspect all items delivered to the site for damage. Replace items that have splintered or suffered surface damage. B. Store in a clean area without adding either concentrated or distributed Toads above the items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS TANKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Materials shall comply with requirements in AWWA F 101 -96, "Contact - Molded, Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash Water Troughs and Launders ", except as modified herein: 1. Resin: Commercial Type I polyester, suitable for use in potable water. 2. Additives: a. include catalysts, accelerators or promoters to provide a complete cure of the laminate. b. Include additives as required to provide ultraviolet (UV) and weather resistance as described in ASTM G23. 3. Reinforcement: a. Fibrous glass: Type C or Type E fiberglass with silane finish and a binder compatible with the lay -up resin. Glass content shall be 25 to 32% by weight. b. Metallic: Shall be free of rust, oil and foreign matter. Encapsulate metallic reinforcement in a minimum of 1/8 -inch thick laminate. 4. Color: Provide blue -green color troughs by mixing pigment with the resin. B. Loading: 1. Troughs will be subject to suddenly applied full buoyancy load upward (when troughs are empty) and full wet load (trough full of water when a filter is dewatered). 2. Troughs shall be fabricated to the dimensions shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of ±1 /8 -inch. Troughs damaged during construction, transportation or erection will be rejected. Install troughs as shown o n th Dr aw i ngs Top edges shall be placed level and shall not vary in elevation by more than 1/32 -inch. 3. Trough construction shall be such that vertical deflection under maximum loading and vibration does not exceed 1/16-inch variation from level over the entire span. 4. Reinforcing methods shall be such that loading or vibrations over long periods of time will not cause permanent creep in excess of the above tolerances. 5. Troughs will be subject to ambient outdoor temperature range, and diurnal temperature variations at project site. 6 Troughs shall be suitable to withstand forces (including thermal stresses) for b uoyan t a nd dewatered coonditions in h and cold weather. October 2000 nnnne-1 n r fv1 7 FiL.ergla..e. Fabrications VV ®V 1 / .V 1 VVVVV '• G Fiberglass av�iwvn.a C. Manufacturing Process: 1. Troughs: a. The inner surface of the trough shall be smooth and resin rich. The outer surfaces shall be reasonably smooth and no glass fibers shall be exposed. The size and number of air bubbles shall be held to a minimum. Laminations shall be dense and without voids, dry spots, cracks or crazes. b. The inner surface of the trough shall be reinforced with glass surfacing mat. This shall be followed with chopped strand glass laminate (maximum 2 oz/ft in a minimum of two (2) layers. Void content of the complete laminate shall not exceed 2 -1/2% of laminate volume. c. The top edges of the trough section shall be level and parallel with a tolerance of ±1/8 -inch (measured when the trough is not loaded) per 10- foot length. d. The laminate thickness tolerance shall be plus 1/8 -inch minus 0 -inch. e. Thickness at locations of supports such as saddles shall be at least 1 -1/2 times the nominal thickness of the trough and shall conform to the fiber stress limitations set forth in paragraph 2.01E of this Specification. f End flanges and blind ends shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 times the nominal thickness of the trough and shall conform to the fiber stress limitations set forth in paragraph 2.01E of this Specification. g. One - inch - diameter stainless steel spreaders shall be bolted between the trough walls on approximately 2 -foot centers to enhance the structural rigidity of the trough system. h. A 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/4" steel angle shall be molded within the trough's exterior weir edges for the full weir length. D Workmanship: Weirs shall be flat with smooth, resin -rich surfaces, free of voids, dry spots, cracks, exposed glass, or crazes and shall provide for corrosion resistance and weathering. All surfaces shall be sealed with a flood coat of pigmented resin to seal out moisture. Cut holes or edges shall be sanded smooth and resealed with resin. E. Laminate Physical Properties: 1. All fiberglass troughs shall have a minimum wall thickness of 1/4 -inch. Minimum physical properties shall be as follows. Property Requirement Test Method Tensile Strength 12,000 psi ASTM D638 -76 Flexural Strength 19,000 psi ASTM D790 -71 Flexural Modulus 900,000 psi ASTM D790 -71 Barcol Hardness (min.) 35 ASTM D2583 -75 Notched Izod Impact 10 0 ASTM D256 -73 (ft-lb/in. (min.) Water Absorption 0.2% for 24 hours ASTM D570 Specific Gravity 1.45 or greater ASTM D792 Reinforcing Glass Content 25% to 32% MIL- P -802c, (ash method) 15 July 1957 2 Manufacturer shall maintain a continuous quality control program and shall furnish the Engineer with certified test reports consisting of the physical tests listed. 3 Hardness tests shall be made on the resin -rich surface of the product. 4 Flexural tests shall be made with the resin -rich surface in compression. October 2000 006017 01 06600 - 3 Fiberglass Fabrications 5. Test samples shall be full thickness of the item produced and shall not be machined on the surface. 6. Mechanical properties shall equal or exceed those listed when tested @ 73 °F ±3 °F. F. Manufacturers: Warminster Fiberglass; F.B. Leopold; or equal. 2.02 FIBERGLASS GRATING A. Fiberglass grating shall be designed for a live Toad of 150 pounds per square foot with a grating deflection not greater than 1/4 -inch. Fiberglass grating shall be manufactured by the pultruded process. Provide grating hold -down clips and intermediate supports where required to control deflection. Provide non -skid walking surface. B. Manufacturers: Fibergrate Corporation; Chemgrate Corporation; or equal. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Provide type 304 stainless steel hold down clips, bolts, nuts, washers and fastener assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate all assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Surfaces behind fiberglass shall be smooth. Troughs shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Troughs shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Gullet ends of troughs are to be embedded in concrete. Block -out procedures, if used, are subject to favorable review by the Engineer. Level trough invert within ± 1/4 -inch. Care shall be taken in tightening the bolts so that the fiberglass is not damaged. C. Grating: 1. Set grating accurately in position and install all fastenings as directed by manufacturer or shown on the Drawings. 2. Repair all damaged surfaces with freshly catalyzed resin sealant within the pot life. END OF SECTION October 2000 nnGr14 /1.1 nGGnn A :'.,. �..�....., Fabrications UUVV 1 .0 1 uuoVV - 'Y Fiberglass Faunwuuua SECTION 07510 BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING AND ROOF INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hot - mopped, four ply, built -up roofing with gravel surfacing 2. Rigid roof insulation B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal - sheet metal scuppers, roof jacks for vent pipes and roof penetrations, and gravel stops C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03310: Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal — scuppers, copings and flashing 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. D41 Primer for Use with Asphalt In Dampproofing and Waterproofing 2. D312 Asphalt for Use in Constructing Built -Up Roof Coverings 3. D1863 Mineral Aggregate for Use on Built -Up Roofs 4. D2178 Asphalt Impregnated Fiberglass Ply Felts for Built -Up Roofs 5. D2822 Fibered Asphalt Flashing Cement 6. D3909 Asphalt Impregnated Mineral Surfaced Fiberglass Cap Sheets for Built -Up Roofs B. Federal Specifications: 1. LLL -I -535 Asphalt Impregnated Fiberboard 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Specification is intended to cover built -up roofing on metal deck substrate with rigid roof insulation systems. Provide a roofing system designed and recommended by the materials manufacturer for 20 years or more of service for this specific application. Each system shall be a complete functioning unit including all related substrate preparation, insulation, attachment of components to the substrate, boundary conditions, flashings and penetrations. In submitting a bid on this work, the Contractor, the installer and the roofing materials manufacturer each certifies that these specifications and the systems described are appropriate for the specific use, application and environmental conditions anticipated for this project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in Accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product data: Fully describe every product or item proposed for use. October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 1 and Roof Insulation B. Sample: Minimum of two (2) roofing gravel and mineral cap sheet samples in manufacturer's standard colors. The gravel shall be in Tight reflecting colors (shades of white and Tight gray). C. Manufacturer's Certification of Specified System: Provide manufacturer's review of details and all conditions and submit manufacturer's written comments that all aspects of specified system are compatible with the intended use and that the system specified will perform its function. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Roofing shall be installed by an applicator licensed or approved by the manufacturer of materials used in the work. Assemblies shall meet the recommendation of the manufacturer and be eligible for a 20 -year guarantee and /or bond. B. Regulatory Requirements. Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Building Code, especially Chapter 15. 2. The requirements of Underwriters Laboratories for Class A rating. C. Roof insulation shall be mechanically attached as recommended by Factory Mutual. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers and rolls with labels intact and legible. B. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends. Store rolled goods on end. C. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. Do not use any materials that have become wet or damp. D. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. Do not stack materials beyond the design live Toad of the structure. E. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for methods of handling and storing materials. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental: 1. Apply in dry weather; do not apply in rain or foggy conditions. 2. Minimum ambient air temperature: 40 °F. 3. Maximum ambient air temperature. 80 °F. 4. Apply in still air under 10 mph wind velocity B Hazardous Operations: The Contractor is advised that hazardous conditions may be encountered performing this work. The fumes from material specified can have harmful or irritating effects. The Contractor shall advise its employees of the , potential hazards, shall supply all required protective and safety equipment, and October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 2 and Roof Insulation shall comply with all applicable State and Federal safety regulations (OSHA). Use of material containing ASBESTOS is not permitted. C. Protection: 1. Protect paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and kettles prior to starting work. Use polyethylene or suitable protective material. Secure protective coverings against wind. 2. Provide special protection or avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80 °F. D. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with other sections of the Specifications to insure that work related to roofing is included. a. Ensure that wood stops, nailers and curbs are properly sized, spaced and fastened. b. Ensure that regiets and metal flashing that are an integral part of the roofing are properly installed. 2. Obtain sheet metal flashings for plumbing vents and other penetrations through the roof, fumished by other trades but installed under this Section. 1.08 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a written guarantee signed by the roofing subcontractor and the general contractor extending the standard twenty -year guarantee to a period of two years for work done under this Section. The guarantee shall: 1. Provide for the repair or replacement of work provided or installed under this Section that leaks or shows other signs of failure. 2. Provide for the repair or replacement of adjoining work necessitated by the above. 3. Provide for the repair or replacement of any other portions of the entire work covered by this contract that are damaged as a result of leaks or other failure of work covered under this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING SYSTEM A. The following manufacturers' systems are described to establish the system type and quality level desired. Equivalent systems by other manufacturers may be submitted and will be favorably reviewed if found equal in quality and utility. If the manufacturer modifies the systems described, the Engineer reserves the right to use the system specified or the comparable system currently recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Hot - mopped, four -ply, built -up roofing with gravel surfacing. a. Johns Manville Four ply roof system: Specification 4GIG b. Celotex Corp. Four -ply roof system: Specification AGS -4 -C -G c. Or equal Class A, Built -Up Roofing with gravel finish - for Inclines Up To 3 -Inch Per Foot: Bituminous, 4 -ply, fiberglass felt, gravel surfaced membrane roofing. October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 3 and Roof Insulation Celotex Corp. Aprox. Manville Corp. Aprox. Spec. AGS -4 -C -G Wt. Per Spec. No. 4 GIG Wt Per 100 s.f. 100 s.f. Asphalt Mopping Type II Asphalt 23 Type n J -M 170 23 Asphalt Mopping Type II Asphalt 33 Type II J -M 170 33 I Roof Insulation I Permaiite Pk Pius 1" Fes -Core Ply Felts 4 -plies Celo -Glass IV 48 4 -plies J -M 48 Glas Ply Asphalt Moppings Type 1I Asphalt 102 Type 11 J -M 170 1 102 I @ 33# over @ 33# over insulation insulation 3 @ 23# between 3 @ 23# between felts felts Flood Coat Type II Asphalt 60 Type II J -M 170 60 Gravel 1/4" to 1/2" 400 1/4" to 1/2" 400 Aggregate 1 Aggregate 1 1 2. Hot - mopped, four -ply, built -up roofing including mineral cap sheet: a. Johns Manville, four -ply roof system: Specification 4GIC b. Celotex Corp., four-ply roof system: Specification AGS -4 -F -M c. Or equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide all materials manufactured or furnished by the manufacturer whose roofing system is being used. Provide certification that materials meet referenced ASTM or Federal Specification standards. B. Bitumen: Asphalt, meeting ASTM D312, type and softening point as recommended for the use intended. C Base Felt: Fiberglass mat with heavy asphalt coating and a fine mineral surfacing, weighing 28 -1/2 pounds per square. D. Ply Felts: Asphalt impregnated fiberglass, meeting ASTM D2178, Type IV, weighing 12 pounds per square. E. Gravel: Crushed stone or river washed pea gravel, clean, dry, and free of clay, 1/4-inch t 112 -inch size aggregate, natural gray color, meeting ASTM D1863. F. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: Asphalt impregnated fiberboard 4 -inch x 4 -inch meeting Federal Specification LLL -1 -535. G. Flashing Compound: Fibered asphalt for troweled application meeting ASTM D2822, Celotex Elastigum cement; J -M; or equal. Material containing ASBESTOS not permitted. October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 4 and Roof Insulation H. Rooftop Walkway Planks: Preformed, consisting of asphalt saturated fibers and fillers between two asphalt saturated felts, the top surface coated with ceramic granules. Standard size, approximately 12 inches x 24 inches x 3/4 -inch. J -M J -Walk; Celotex Carey Tred; or equal. I. Roofing Insulation: One (1) inch -thick rigid composite insulation board consisting of a top face of perlite insulation, a core of urethane foam and a bottom layer of perlite insulation. Johns - Manville Fes -Core; Grefco Permalite Pk Plus; or equal. J. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, 11- gauge, 1- inch -long, 7/16- inch - diameter head. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that work of other trades which penetrates substrate or requires workers and equipment to traverse substrate has been completed. B. Verify that substrate surfaces slope to drains and that drains are set at the proper elevation. C. Examine surfaces for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the work. Concrete surfaces to receive roofing shall be smooth and free of projections. D. Do not start the work until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. E. Concrete surfaces to receive roofing shall be free of surface water and moisture within the slab. Allow concrete to cure for at least 28 days before starting the work. F. Perform the Following Test to Determine Surface Dryness: 1. Pour one pint sample asphalt heated to 350° to 400 °F on the surface of the concrete. If the asphalt foams upon contact, the concrete is too wet for application of roofing. 2. If the sample asphalt does not foam, allow it to cool to ambient temperature and test the coating for adherence. Should any portion of the sample be readily stripped clean from the surface, the concrete is too wet for application of roofing. 3. Do not start the work until the concrete has been retested by the methods stated above and found to be dry 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sweep or vacuum clean surfaces to receive roofing B. Apply asphalt primer to surfaces of sheet metal roof jacks and flashings that are to be installed integrally with the roofing membrane. Pretreat galvanized metal with phosphoric etching solution, flush clean and dry before applying primer. C. Protect roof accessories and other adjoining work from soiling. October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 5 and Roof Insulation 3.03 APPLICATION A. Follow manufacturer's published instructions. B. Installation of Roof Insulation and Cant Strips: 1. Apply the units of insulation with long joints continuous and short joints staggered with short joints at iow edge of roof. Mop with asphalt the full width 01 each 1 U 1111 of insulation I al a 1111111111IUI I I1 rate of JJ pounds per square. 2. Mechanically attach insulation to structural deck as recommended by Factory Mutual for type of deck, project location and exposure, height and design wind conditions. 3. Prior to application of the roofing, the projecting 6 inches of felt at vertical surfaces and at all edges shall be turned over the insulation and mopped solidly with asphalt. 4. Apply cant strips at perimeter and at roof curbs. 5. Apply wedges of tapered insulation as required to create drainage swales directing rain water to roof drains. C. Application of Built -Up Roofing with Gravel finish: 1. Starting at the low edge apply bitumen and one 9- inch -wide felt, then over that one 18 -inch -wide felt, then over that one 27- inch -wide felt, then over all three a full 36- inch -wide felt. Apply the following felts full width, overlapping the preceding felt by 27 -1/2 inches so that at least 4 plies of felts cover the substrate at all locations. 2. Broom each felt so that it is firmly and uniformly set, without voids, into solid moppings of hot bitumen. Extend felts onto vertical surfaces of parapets and curbs to at least 2 inches above cant strip. 3. Seal roofing around drains, install base flashing assemblies and flashing in contact with roofing. Reinforce ridges and valleys with an extra ply of felt, 36 inches wide. 4. Roofing shall be applied in sections that can be completed and graveled in a single day to prevent exposure to damp night air. Before leaving the job at the end of each day, gravel all exposed felts. "Phased Construction" of the roof assembly will not be permitted. 5 Nail roofing felts to wood nailers at all edges in accordance with the recommendations of the roofing material manufacturer and Factory Mutual for the wind locations prevalent at the project site. 6. After all felts are installed, apply flood coat and embed gravel while bitumen is still hot. D. Bitumen Temperature: 1. Apply bitumen within the temperature range prescribed by the manufacturer for the type of bitumen used. 2. Do not use bitumen, which has been heated, above prescribed maximum heating temperature. 3. Discard bitumen, which has been overheated, and bitumen, which has cooled below minimum application temperature. Do not reheat. 3 04 BUILT -UP BASE FLASHING A. Base flashing shall be a 5- course system in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's current published specifications. Apply base flashing at October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 6 and Roof Insulation intersections of roof and parapets as shown on the drawings and as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer. 1. Starting at a point 10 inches minimum above the cant strip, trowel a 1 /8 -inch- thick layer of flashing compound down the parapet face, across the cant and extend it 4 inches out on the roof. 2. Into this flashing compound, embed a layer of fiberglass felt. Lap the felt ends 3 inches and seal with flashing compound. 3. Similarly, trowel a second layer of flashing compound 1/8 -inch thick and embed a second layer of fiberglass felt extending 6 inches out on the roof. 4. Trowel a final layer of flashing compound 1/8 -inch thick and embed a layer of mineral surfaced fiberglass cap sheet lapping the end joints 6 inches. 3.05 EDGE FLASHING AND GRAVEL STOPS A. At deck perimeter, envelope roofing membrane plies by allowing the base ply to hang out free 6 inches all around. After remaining plies have been applied, fold back the overhanging base ply over the last ply and set in a solid mopping of bitumen. B. Gravel Stop: 1. Apply sheet metal gravel stop on top of roofing felts. Set in a bed of flashing compound and nail 3 inches on center into wood nailing strip. 2. Cover sheet metal flanges with two strips of fiberglass finishing felts, the minimum width of the first strip shall be 8 inches wide and the second strip shall be 10 inches wide and both embedded in flashing compound. 3. Coat these felts with same bitumen used for roof flood coat and embed gravel. 3.06 FLASHINGS AT ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Vent Pipes and Other Flashing Cones: 1. Place asphalt primed sheet metal flashing cone and flange on top of roofing felts. Set in a bed of flashing compound. 2. Cover sheet metal flange with 2 plies of fiberglass felts, the first ply extending 6 inches beyond edge of flange, the second ply extending 6 inches beyond the first ply, both embedded in flashing compound. Apply a fillet bead of flashing compound all around the base of the sheet metal cone covering the edges of the flashing felts 3. Install lead counterflashing over the vent pipe and flashing cone. Bend counterflashing down inside vent pipe. 4. Apply bitumen flood coat and embed gravel. B. Seal roofing at other roof penetrations as shown and as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer. 3.07 ROOF TOP WALKWAYS A. Preformed Fiber Composition Planks: 1. Sweep off loose gravel and set preformed walkway planks in a pouring of type II asphalt or troweled application of flashing compound. Be sure all four corners of each piece are firmly set in asphalt. October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 7 and Roof Insulation 2. Leave a minimum of 3 inches of open joint between each piece to provide positive drainage of the roofing system. 3.08 TEST CUTS A. Cut 4 -inch x 36 -inch test sections from the roofing membrane for examination by the Owner's laboratory if requested. Assume two roof cuts will be requested. The Owner will determine locations of the cuts. If deficiencies are discovered in the original roof cuts, additional roof cuts shall be provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner until all deficiencies are corrected. B. Correct deficiencies and repair test cut area at no cost to the Owner. 3.09 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Restore to original condition or replace adjoining work or materials damaged during the performance of this work. B. After completion of the work in this Section, remove excess roofing materials and debris from the site. Remove protective coverings and leave the premises broom clean. END OF SECTION October 2000 Built -Up Bituminous Roofing 006017.01 07510 - 8 and Roof Insulation SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless steel sheet metal flashing, counterflashing, gutters, rainwater leaders, edge flashing, and all other sheetmetal work not covered in other sections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07510: Built -Up Bituminous Roofing And Roof Insulation 2. Section 09900: Painting - backpriming sheet metal work 3. Section 10200: Louvers 4. Section 15800: Heating and Ventilating - sheet metal ductwork 1.02 REFERENCES A. "Architectural Sheet Metal Standards" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), latest edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Fully describe all manufactured items to be furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Show all custom - fabricated items clearly illustrating the design, dimensions, materials, methods of construction and installation of each piece of work. D. Manufacturers' Instructions: For manufactured items. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the 1997 edition of the Uniform Building Code and Uniform Building Code Standards, especially Chapters 15 and 25. B. Where specific details are not provided comply with applicable details in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Standards. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all items to the job site unpainted and in sufficient time for field priming and incorporation into work of other trades. B Store materials under dry conditions and protect from moisture and physical damage. October 2000 006017.01 07600 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Stainless Steel: All flashing shall be stainless steel. Type 304, 2D finish unless a higher polish is called for, ASTM -A -240, 26- gauge or heavier where called for. B. Solder: ASTM B32, low lead solder. Use special solder for stainless steel. C. Flux: Noncorrosive. D. Fasteners: 1. To Concrete Masonry Units: Deformed stainless steel wedge pins driven into lead expansion shields; RAWL, Phillips, or equal. 2. To Wood Nailers and Sills: Pan head, noncorrosive, sheet metal screws. 3. Steel Component Fasteners: Self - drilling /self- tapping, stainless steel screws, type S -12, Buildex TEKS; Gosche Fasteners; or equal. E. Flashing Reglets and Counterflashing: 1. Surface Type Reglet: 26- gauge, minimum, stainless steel with stainless steel drive pins and neoprene washer, Fry Sprinklok Expan -O -Seal; Superior Cushion -Lock; or equal. 2. Recessed Type Reglet: 26- gauge, minimum, stainless steel, Fry, type CO; Superior Cushion -Lock; or equal. 3. Counterflashing: 26- gauge, minimum, stainless steel formed to insure a tight seal against both regiet and roofing felts, Fry Springlok Flashing; Superior Cushion -Lock; or equal. F. Seamless stainless steel gutters and downspouts; box gutter in size shown on Drawings. G. Sealant: Polyurethane sealant type "B" as specified in Section 07900. Where specified sealant is incompatible with other adjacent sealants, Contractor shall submit a sealant suitable for intended use and of equivalent life expectancy. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Before fabrication, take field measurements, ascertain existing field conditions and have with r lave dias;r epar'icieS corrected before proceeding wiu i ai sheet icci metal met ic►a � wvi work n. B. Fabricate sheet metal items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate using techniques and methods described in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Standards. C. Make sections uniform with true, straight breaks, accurately fitted and rigidly secured. Provide overlapping tabs for soldered joints. Fabricate items in maximum lengths. D. Provide accessories necessary to complete installation. Provide ribs, cleats, stiffeners, sleeves, hangers and other reinforcements required to make sections rigid and substantial, in same metal as basic unit. October 2000 0060 1 7 .0 1 07600 - 2 Flashing and Sheet Metal E. Miter comer joints and reinforce with extended tabs or backing plates. F. Soldering: All soldered joints shall lap at least 1 -inch. Pre -tin and sweat - solder joints full width. Reinforce all soldered joints with metal rivets. Do not solder aluminum. G. Lap expansion joints at least 4 inches and seal with polyurethane sealant type "B". 2.03 FLASHING FOR PIPES THROUGH ROOF A. Fabricate a 24 -gauge stainless steel conical Flashing collar with roll- formed flared bottom edge, lapped and sweat - soldered watertight to 24 -gauge stainless steel bottom flange. B Fabricate a separate sheet lead Counterflashing collar to fit around vent pipe and overlap conical Flashing collar. The top of Counterflashing to be bent down inside the pipe. C. Provide stainless steel drawband as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to receive sheet metal work for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the work. B. Do not start work until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Insure that all galvanized sheet metal items are prime coat painted on all concealed and exposed surfaces, under Section 09900, before installation. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be watertight and shall drain properly. B. Make proper allowance for expansion and contraction of the metals and of the materials to which they are fastened. C. Form work accurately to sizes, shapes, and dimensions indicated or necessary, with angles and lines in true alignment, straight and sharp. D. Erect work plumb, level and in proper plane, without bulges, or waves Fit metal closely and neatly to cores or framework. Cope or flange intersections to fit accurately. Reinforce heavily loaded joints with screws or rivets. E. Soldering: Pre -tin and apply flux to surfaces of sheet metal. Slowly and thoroughly apply heat to completely sweat the solder through the full width of seam. F Set items in sealant or plastic cement as shown or noted; or when such application is necessary to provide a watertight job. October 2000 006017.01 07600 - 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal G. Provide isolation between dissimilar metals or other materials with sealant, butyl tape, bituminous paint or asphalt saturated felt. H. Perform sealant work in conformance with the requirements of Section 07900. 3.03 FLASHING A. Install all Flashings as required to provide watertight protection. B. Lap all seams in direction of water flow. C. Carry Flashings around corners at least 4 inches. D. Lap joints 4 inches minimum. Apply sealant to the overlapping surfaces of the joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Vent Pipes Through Roof: 1. Provide a 24 -gauge stainless steel conical Flashing collar with roll - formed bottom flange soldered to 24 -gauge base Flashing. The base Flashing shall extend 8 inches minimum from the base of the conical collar all around. 2. Provide a separate Counterflashing collar for the top of the vent pipe. B. Flashing at Conduits and Other Pipe Through Roof: 1. Provide a conical Flashing collar same as for vent pipes. 2. Provide a separate Counterflashing collar over the conical collar. Use a stainless steel draw band to fasten top of Counterflashing around the pipe or conduit. Embed Counterflashing in a 2- inch -wide bed of sealant and apply a large bead of sealant to the top exposed edge. C. Flashing at Curb Mounted Equipment and Similar Rectangular Projections Through Roof: 1. Provide 24 -gauge stainless steel Counterflashings. Fold Flashings at least 4 inches around corners and lap in the direction of water or wind. 2. Provide a shop fabricated saddle Flashing (cricket) at the uphill side of skylights and equipment curbs installed on roofs sloping more than 1/4 -inch per foot. 3. Lap end joints 4 inches and seal with sealant. D. Seamless Gutters: Install gutters along roof edge using stainless steel fasteners and sealant in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. E. Rainwater Downspouts: 1. Three (3) inch minimum diameter unless larger sizes shown. 2. Connect to rain gutters where shown. Attach to building with pre - finished straps matching the downspouts. F. Louver Flashing: Provide stainless steel sill and head flashing at all louvers as shown and as required for a watertight installation. Furnish in the same metal as the louver. Louvers are specified under Division 10. G. Miscellaneous trim and flashing: Provide flashing where shown and where required for a watertight installation. October 2000 006017 .01 0760 A Flashing Sh Metal g and 0060 I I 0 1 v � vvv - -. y and 3.05 CLEANUP A. Clean all finished surfaces, removing all solder, flux, etc. Neutralize soldering flux with a 5% to 10% washing soda solution, wash down all work with soap and hot water, flush with clean water, and wipe dry. B. Repair or replace all damaged or defective areas to insure watertightness and neat appearance. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 07600 - 5 Flashing and Sheet Metal SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sealant work required: a. For a watertight project. b. Required by the Uniform Building Code and not specifically covered in another section. 2. Minimum standards for all sealant work whether covered in this Section or in other sections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal 2. Section 08110: Hollow Metal Work 3. Section 10200: Louvers 1.02 REFERENCES A. Federal Specifications: 1. TT- S- 00 -230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 2. TT- S- 00 -227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi- Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 3. TT- S- 00 -1543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. C. Samples: Physical samples of cured sealants for selection of colors. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Application instructions for all products used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Provide sealant work performed by a Specialty Sealant and Waterproofing Contractor who is exclusively engaged in sealant application work. All work to be performed by qualified journeymen proficient in the craft of sealant application. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Uniform Building Code, 1997 edition, especially, Chapters 15, 24 and 25. October 2000 006017.01 07900 - 1 Joint Sealants 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Apply sealant only when temperature and humidity conditions are at the levels recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a written Special Guarantee in accordance with Section 01300 covering replacement of sealant work that fails within 2 years of the date of project acceptance. Failure includes: 1. Becoming brittle or cracking due to exposure, contraction or expansion. 2. Failure to resist abrasion of normal use and traffic. 3. Tear failure due to movement within 50% of joint width for Class A sealants. 4. Cohesive or adhesive failure due to movement within 50% of joint width for Fed. Spec. Class A sealants. 5. Water infiltration for joints intended to exclude water, air infiltration for joints intended to exclude air. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Sealant Type "A": Exterior and interior vertical surface sealant for use in joints in concrete, metal and similar materials, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT- S- 00230C Type I!, Class A, in color selected. Acceptable products are: 1 One part polyurethane: Mameco "Vulkem" No. 116. 2. One part polyurethane: Sika Sealant Division Sikaflex la. 3. Or equal. B. Sealant Backup: Polyethylene rod stock. Acceptable products are: 1. Dow Corning "Ethafoam." 2. Hercules, Inc., HBR Backer Rod. 3. Or equal. E. Sealant Tape: Resilient, non - staining, 100% vulcanized butyl rubber, scrim reinforced, self- adhering, extruded sealant tape containing no asphalts. Acceptable products are: 1. Protective Treatments, Inc., #303 2. Tremco #440, 3. Or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE A. Allow concrete and masonry to cure for at least 28 days before applying sealants. B. Inspect substrates to receive sealant work for: 1. Deviation beyond allowable tolerance for joint width and required clear joint depth. Joint width shall not be Tess than 1/4 -inch or the width shown. 2. Presence of contaminants that cannot be removed by normal joint cleaning. 3. Presence of moisture. Joint surfaces shall be dry. C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. October 2000 nnani7 ni n on n :.. Sealants ,� vvvv 1 1 .v I v1 uvv - 4. Joint 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Clean surfaces to which sealant is to be adhered: 1. For Concrete and Masonry: Sandblast joint surfaces taking care to protect exposed finish surfaces. 2. For Metal: Sand or scrape and solvent clean with a non -film forming solvent. 3. For Wood: Sand or scrape. B. Insure that cleaned surfaces are not contaminated before applying sealant. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Follow sealant manufacturer's published instructions. B. Install sealant backup the proper distance from face of joint for joint proportioned in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Use polyethylene rod stock larger than joint so that backup can be firmly held in place. C. Apply primer and /or cleaner conditioner recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrate. Avoid getting primer on the face of material or on areas that will not be covered by sealant. D. Mask edges of joint with masking tape where required to avoid contamination of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint. E. Apply self - leveling sealant by pouring, pumping or with a caulking gun. When using pump or caulking gun fill joint from the bottom up to avoid air entrapment. Fill joint flush with surface of adjacent material without overfilling or spilling sealant on exposed surfaces. F Apply vertical grade sealants by hand or power operated caulking gun. Use a caulking tip the proper width for the joint required. Fill the joint from the bottom up to insure a fully filled joint without entrapped air bubbles or voids. Use lubricant recommended by sealant manufacturer to tool joints. Force sealant against sides and bottom of joint and into all crevices; press out air bubbles and voids. Tool sealant surface smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces for butt joints or to an even, straight -sided fillet of uniform width and slope for fillet joints. G Where the substrate or adjacent sealants are incompatible with the specified sealant, submit a sealant suitable for the required use and of equivalent life expectancy to the specified sealant. 3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Apply sealant in expansion joints when the joint opening width is approximately half- way between dimensional extremes of thermal movement. B. Place sealant backer rod the proper distance from face of joint to insure that sealant bead depth is never more than half the bead width at any time between dimensional extremes of joint. October 2000 006017.01 07900 - 3 Joint Sealants 3.05 CLEANUP A. Upon completion, remove protective masking and clean any sealant from adjacent finished surfaces beyond edge of joint. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017 01 mann - 4 Joint Sealants SECTION 08330 ROLL -UP DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hand - operated, insulated roll -up doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05100: Metal Fabrications - steel channel frames 2. Section 08700: Finish Hardware - padlocks 3. Section 09900: Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. Al23 Specifications for Zinc (Hot- Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2. A653 Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron- Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Describe every product or item proposed for use. 2. Shop Drawings: Prepare especially for the project, showing elevations at 1/4- inch = 1' -0" and details at 3 -inch = 1' -0 ", or larger if necessary for clarity. Field measure openings and verify clearance prior to preparing shop drawings. Show connections to adjacent construction. Show electrical details. 3. Samples: Full range of manufacturer's colors for Factory Finish. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Provide roll -up doors manufactured by a firm specializing in roll -up (overhead coiling) industrial doors. 2. Install door using a Licensed Specialty Contractor engaged exclusively in providing and installing roll -up and other industrial doors and who is approved by the door manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements. Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 edition. 2. Applicable Occupational Safety and Health Regulations. 105 WARRANTY A. All Roll-Up Doors shall be warranted for a period of twelve (12) months from the time of building acceptance by the Owner against defects in workmanship and materials. October 2000 006017.01 08330 -1 Roll -Up Doors PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HAND -CHAIN OPERATED ROLL -UP DOORS A. Manufacturer. Type FCM with Polyester Powder 'Color Cote" top coat finish by the Cookson Company; equivalent by Overhead Door Corporation; Atlas Door or equal. B. Construction and Features: 1. Galvanized coating: Hot -dip galvanize all steel components unless noted otherwise. Hot -dip galvanize sheet steel thinner than 1/8 -inch with a zinc coating of at least 1.25 ounce per square foot in accordance with ASTM A653. Hot -dip galvanize steel 1/8 -inch thick and heavier in accordance with ASTM Al23. 2. Curtain - insulated: Fabricate interlocking slats from not Tess than 18 -gauge galvanized copper bearing strip steel in a flat face pattern, No. 4 slat by Cookson Company; equivalent by Overhead Door Corporation; or equal. The outer slat shall be 18 gauge thick. Fabricate the inner slat from 22 -gauge minimum galvanized steel. Fill the space between the inner and outer slat solid with expanded polyurethane insulation. Reinforce bottom slat with two structural steel angles, minimum 1/8 -inch thickness, back -to -back. Design door to withstand wind Toad of 20 pounds per square foot. Support Toad of barrel and curtain by two grease - sealed ball bearings. 3. Guides: Fabricate from hot - rolled structural steel angles bolted with 3/8 -inch- diameter bolts to form a slot of sufficient depth to retain curtain in guides during periods of heavy wind pressure. Make wall angles continuous. Flare the top of each guide to facilitate entry of curtain. Provide galvanized steel bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and washers. Galvanize guides and remove any bumps on curtain contact surfaces. 4. Brackets: Fabricate from steel plate of not Tess than 5/16 -inch thickness. Bolt brackets to wall angle with a minimum of two 1/2- inch - diameter bolts. 5 Hood: Fabricate from one piece of 24 -gauge galvanized steel sheet. Form to fit curvature of brackets with sufficient beads or flanges to prevent deflection. a. Provide a neoprene wind baffle in constant contact with the full width of the curtain coil. 6. Windsocks: Provide wind locks at both ends of alternating slats to prevent puii out of slats from side guides. 7. Gears: Cast iron with teeth cast from machine cut patterns. Provide not less than 3 -inch pitch diameter for pinion gears. Design gear ratio for a maximum manual effort of not more than 30 pounds. 8. Provide galvanized chain operator with provisions for padlocking chain operator 4 feet above the floor. 9. Barrel: Fabricate from steel tubing not less than 4 inches in diameter, designed to limit maximum deflection to 0.03 -inch per foot of span. Provide oil- tempered torsion springs capable of correctly counterbalancing the weight of the curtain. Provide adjustable springs by means of an exterior wheel. 10. Weatherstrip at side guides to properly seal door perimeter without affecting ease of operation. Provide flexible neoprene strip at door bottom. 11. Factory finish: Bnnrierize all exposed galv metal surfaces of curtain and hood. Apply "Color Cote" finish consisting of a polyester (TG1C Free) powder top coat in color selected. October 2000 nnan1 7 ni n01111 vvvv 1 I .v 1 VVJJV - G F Un LlJUI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors using manufacturer's trained and authorized specialist. B. Install, adjust and test doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Attach guides to concrete walls with machine bolts in concrete anchors. Attach guides to steel construction using drilled and tapped machine bolts. D. Coordinate work with steel, masonry, hardware other trades. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 08330 -3 Roll-Up Doors SECTION 08380 CORROSION RESISTANT DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corrosion resistant doors and FRP frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07900: Sealants 2. Section 08700: Finish Hardware 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and /or Extent and Time of Burning of Self- Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position 2. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 3. Laminate properties a. D 882 Tensile strength b. D 790 Flexural strength c. D 2583 Barcol Hardness d. D 256 Impact resistance e. D 792 Density /specific gravity of laminate 4. Core Properties a. C 177 Thermal properties b. D 1622 Density /specific gravity c. D E 84 Surface burning characteristics 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Product Review in accordance with Section 01300: B Product Data describing all products proposed for use. C Shop Drawings of custom fabricated doors and drawings showing cut outs in stock doors. D. Colors: Submit color 2 charts of manufacturer's standard colors for selection. Submit 2 samples of the plastic material in the selected color. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications Manufacturer: Minimum twenty (20) continuous years documented experience producing products specified in this section. October 2000 006017.01 08380 -1 Corrosion Resistant Doors and Frames B. Comply with the following regulatory requirements: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 edition, especially Chapters 7 and 10. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store door assemblies inside in factory packaging in dry area elevated above the floor, store on edge and protect from damage. 1.06 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Design door - opening assemblies to resist failure from corrosion in an environment of low density Hydrofluosilicic acid fumes. 2. Design door opening assemblies to have minimum fiberglass content of 30% mean, by weight. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Door opening assemblies: Maximum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84, self - extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D 635. 1.07 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide a Special Guarantee in accordance with Section 01700 guaranteeing the Contractor shall replace any door that becomes defective within two years of date of final acceptance. Replacement shall include installation of the door and all hardware, thresholds, weatherstripping, security devices and other appurtenances in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Defects requiring replacement include: a. Warps, cup, twist or bow exceeding 1/8 -inch total from a true flat plane. b. Delamination or failure of any glue joint including veneer delamination. B. Provide a 10 -year warranty against panel corrosion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CORROSION REST T AN T DOOR A. Size: See door schedule showing size and types of doors. All doors shall be 1-3/4 - inch -thick minimum unless greater thickness is called for. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Chase Doors in Redmond, Oregon; Chem -Pruf, Co. Ltd., Brownsville, TX or equal. Doors shall be Chase Model: Duru!ite CR 1400; Chem -Pruf or equal. C. Description: 1. Formed outer shell of 1/8" thick, high- density, cross - linked polyethylene or random glass fiber mat, minimum 4.5 ounces per square foot weight of glass material. The door and frame color will not fade when exposed to sunlight or weather. October 2000 006`017 n1 08380_2 Corrosion }Resistant Doors and Frames vvvv 11 .V 1 VVVVV'L . AIVI 11 SC*IOLQI it vi'i o1W Frames n.a 2. Internal tubular steel framework, reinforced for door closers and other hardware or: Phenolic resin impregnated, kraft honeycomb material maximum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84 3. Insulated core of high- density, non -CFC polyurethane foam: Minimum density 4 lbs. per cubic foot, maximum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84 4. Resins: Formulated for specified environment, maximum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84, self - extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D 635. 5. Anchors: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel anchors 6. Bonding Materials: Manufacturer's standard frame -to- opening bonding system 7. Hardware: Comply with section 08700. The door manufacturer may substitute the manufacturer's standard hardware if it meets the listed products in Section 08700. 8. R factor of 11 or greater. 9. Joint Sealer: Silicone sealant, specified in Section 07900. 10. Finish: Semi -Gloss Surface in selected color. 2.02 FRP FRAME A. Provide the manufacturer's standard FRP frame in the same color as the door. 1. Construction: One -piece molded cross - section with molded stop, 20 mil gel coat, minimum two (2) layers random - fiberglass mat, saturated with resins 2. Sizes: For door sizes and frame depths as indicated on Drawings 3. Finish: Smooth semi -gloss surface in selected color. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify that jambs are plumb in two directions and square. Have defects corrected before hanging doors. B. Install door - opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in installation instructions. C Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly prohibited. D. Fit doors with uniform 1/16- to 3/32 -inch clearance at jambs and head and 3/8 -inch clearance over floor finishes and I/4 -inch clearance over thresholds Non - complying clearances shall be cause for rejection. E. Cutouts for hardware shall be done at the factory. Size and location of hardware preparations and cutouts in doors shall comply with Handicap Access requirements. F Install and adjust hinges, hardware and gaskets so door swings freely without hinge bind and will stand in any position between full open and closed. Adjust latches to latch automatically when door is closed and adjust locks to operate freely. Adjust October 2000 006017.01 08380 -3 Corrosion Resistant Doors and Frames door closers for proper tension, closing speed and latching speed so doors will self - close and automatically latch when released. G. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and sight exposed door hardware in accordance with respective manufacturer's maintenance instructions. H. Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequent • construction activities until final inspection �i END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 08380 -4 Corrosion Resistant Doors and Frames SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install all finish hardware. 2. Supervision of the coordination, preparation for and installation of Finish Hardware by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08380: Corrosion Resistant Doors and Frames - preparation for hardware in doors and frames. 2. Section 08330: Roll -Up Doors 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /BHMA: 1. Product standards for all specified items. B. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. Basic Architectural Hardware. 2. Abbreviations and Symbols. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Fully describe every product proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: Submit hardware list and schedule prepared by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant in accordance with DHI recommendations. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: For mounting, installing and adjusting hardware. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Hardware Supplier: 1. Engaged in supplying builder's hardware for projects of comparable size and shape for at least 5 years. 2. Has a full -time certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) on staff who will prepare the hardware submittal and supervise installation of all finish hardware. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1 Uniform Building Code, current edition, especially Chapter 10, and applicable Uniform Building Code Standards. 2. Federal and State handicapped access and use requirements. October 2000 006017.01 08700 - 1 Finish Hardware 1.05 DELIVERY A. Deliver hardware with items for each opening packed together, complete and ready for installation with necessary fittings, trim, fasteners and accessories. Mark packages with opening number for identification. B. Deliver templates and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide hardware that fits perfectly, is of uniform color, and is free of imperfections affecting serviceability or marring appearance. B. Deliver hardware in a timely manner as required by the Contractor's Schedule. Furnish materials or templates to others when required for factory installation or preparation. C. Provide adequate functioning hardware for all doors whether scheduled or not. See paragraph 3.02E of this Section. D. Where the hardware manufacturer's product number specified does not provide hardware meeting fire codes, condition of use, function, hand, mounting conditions, strikes, stops, keepers or fasteners required for a satisfactory installation, provide items of equivalent or better quality meeting applicable project conditions. E. Coordinate with the work of other trades in furnishing and placing finish hardware. 2.02 HARDWARE A. Kick plates: Each door shall have a kick plate mounted on the inside of the door. All material shall be stainless steel, finished to match hardware, 0.050 gauge with beveled edges, 12 -inch high x 1 -1/2 -inch narrower than single door or 1 -inch narrower than pairs of doors. B. Fasteners: Furnish all necessary screws, bolts or other fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life; provide f that match the material and finish of the hardware. All exposers fasteners shall be stainless steel. Where necessary provide expansion shields, sex bolts, screws, or other anchors appropriate for substrate that the hardware is installed on. Provide machine screws and soft metal expansion shields to fasten hardware to concrete, masonry, plaster and similar materials. Plastic or fiber inserts are not acceptable. C Finish: Provide all hardware with the following finish: 1. US32D (630) satin stainless steel, except for hardware specified with anodized aluminum finish or painted finish. D Exit Devices, Heavy -Duty Lever Arm Type: All external parts fabricated from stainless steel, including sex bolts, strikes, outside trims and drop- forged lever October 2000 (CR017 01 nR7nr1 - 9 Finkh 4larrlwara arms. Internal parts fabricated from stainless steel and non - corrosive metals. Use sex bolts at through bolt penetrations. Provide matching strikes. E. Keys and Keying: 1. All keyed Iocksets and padlocks shall be keyed to match existing Water Plant locks. F. Hinges: Stainless Steel Butts, Full Mortised. Provide nonremovable pins for all exterior outswinging doors. Stainless steel fasteners. Stainless steel ball bearing butts. 1. Provide widths sufficient to clear trim or masonry projection when door swings 180 degrees. 2. Provide 4 hinges for each door leaf unless specified otherwise in the schedule. 3. Provide ball bearing butts unless specified otherwise. G Door Stop /Holder: Cast bronze with stainless steel finish. H. Closers: Provide products of one manufacturer; non - handed double arm, smoothie style with non -metal covers full rack and pinion type ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 with steel spring and non - gumming, non - freezing hydraulic fluid; non -sized adjustable for interior doors to 5 feet wide and exterior doors to 4 feet wide (cylinder sizes 1 through 6). Provide controls for regulating closing, latching speeds and back check non - handed double arm. Provide all closers with a cushion stop built into closer arm that can be adjusted to stop door opening at a pre -set angle. Provide closers designed with spring power adjustment required for easy opening; 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5 pounds for interior doors. Provide parallel -arm closers at reverse bevel doors and where doors swing full 180 degrees. Include all through bolts, mounting brackets, mounting plates, shoes and accessories required for proper function and installation. Furnish hold open arms when specified. Provide maximum degree of opening attainable consistent with closer function specified. Provide closer covers with a factory painted finish. I Provide door seal at all exterior doors: 3/16 -inch x 1/2-inch sponge neoprene closed cell adhesive back tape J Silencers: Pneumatic rubber, installed in metal frame stops. Furnish 3 for single doors and 2 for pair of doors Omit silencers where door seal occurs and for exterior doors. K. Thresholds. Stainless steel. L. Padlocks: 1. Brass and solid stainless steel, with case hardened stainless steel shackle, 1 -inch clearance, with 9- inch -long brass chain. 2 Keying: Interchangeable core 6 -pin tumbler cylinder matching Owner's system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 01 INSTALLATION A. General Be responsible for the proper location, fit and operation of all finish hardware items under the appropriate headings. Install finish hardware according October 2000 006017 01 08700 - 3 Finish Hardware to the Drawings, Specifications and finish hardware manufacturer's instruction. Place and adjust stops and or shim hinges to provide clearance for weatherstripping and to prevent doors from binding on stops or frames. B. Fitting: Properly cut, drill, shape, reinforce and otherwise fabricate items upon which finish hardware is to be installed according to templates, physical hardware and finish hardware manufacturers instructions to insure proper attachment and function. C. Adjustment: Install all lock cylinders to accept keys with the teeth facing up. Adjust, shim, align all hardware to operate smoothly without binding or rubbing. D. Door Stops /Holders: 1. Locate door stops and holders so doors will be held open in the maximum open position. E. Defective Installation: Appearance, installation, attachment and operation of finish hardware shall be subject to review by the Engineer. Replace finish hardware found unacceptable as directed. 3.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Contractor is responsible for providing all finish hardware together with all components, accessories and fasteners necessary for a complete and smooth operating installation. B Items in the following hardware schedule are referenced by catalog number to the first named manufacturer. item ' 1st Manufacturer ' 2nd Manufacturer Butts, hinges Stanley [Ha or equal Padlock Schlage Corbin Exit Device Von Duprin Sargent, or equal Closers LCN Sargent, or equal Stops, coordinators Glynn- Johnson Builder's Brass, or equal Silencers, holders Glynn - Johnson Builder's Brass, or equal S trikes Ives, Glynn- Builder's Brass, or equal Johnson Thresholds Pemko Reese, or equal October 2000 008017 01 08700 - 4 Finish Hardware C. Schedule of Hardware Groups: Group No. 1: Door 1 (roll -up door) to have: 1 padlock Schlage 45 -122 Group No. 2: Doors 2 and 3 to have: 3 hinges Stanley FBB 199 1 exit device Von Duprin 8875L -F 1 closer /hold open LCN 4111 -72MC 3049EDA 1 door stop /holder (wall) Glynn- Johnson W -20X 1 door shoe /drip Pemko 216BV 1 threshold Pemko 154SS36 1 kickplate (on inside) 10x34 (630) END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 08700 - 5 Finish Hardware SECTION 09210 SPRAY APPLIED CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes sprayed on Acoustement thermal insulation where shown on the Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. C423 -84A: Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Adsorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method 2. D2240: Test Method for Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness 3. E- 84 -87: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 4. ASTM E136: Test Method for Behavior Of Materials in Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 C 5 E605: Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire - Resistant Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members 6. E736 -86: Test Method for Cohesion /Adhesion of Sprayed Fire - Resistant Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members 7. E761: Test Methods Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire - Resistant Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members B. University of Pittsburgh Toxicity Test 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide testing results and procedures that have been certified by Cedar Knolls Acoustical Labs or other accredited independent testing laboratories. Peak thickness of test samples shall be determined and reported by acoustical laboratory. Nominal thicknesses are not acceptable unless peak thicknesses are also reported. 1. NRC not Tess than 0.60 at 1 inch thickness and coefficient not less than 0.35, (+ or - 0.01), at 250 Hz. Conduct testing on solid backing with no air gap. B. Installer: licensed by manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, test data substantiating compliance with quality assurance. C. Submit 12 inch square sample of sprayed on acoustical material showing texture October 2000 09210 - 1 ' Spray Applied Cement Plaster 006017 01000p6\006017.01 \specs \092101.doc a variations for approval. Resubmit as required until approved. Manufacturer shall ,�� certify that all samples are representative of the texture that was acoustically tested in supporting acoustical test reports. 1- \ D. Submit test reports from all suppliers showing material to be 100% free of asbestos, mineral fiber, polystyrene and cellulose. E. Submit certification of applicator licensing. F. Submit acoustical sample for specified finish. 1.05 MATERIAL HANDLING A. Keep material dry until ready for use. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant the material to be supplied, agreeing to repair /replace that which has cracked, flaked, dusted excessively, peeled or fallen from substrate, or otherwise deteriorated to a condition where it would not perform effectively as intended for a sound absorbent purpose; due to defective materials and not due to abuse, improper maintenance, unforeseeable ambient exposures, or other causes beyond anticipated conditions by manufacturer. The warranty period will be 10 years from date of project substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS s 2'1 `../ 2 u �1 (2�, np 2.01 MATERIALS -2°1°' N � W G�� �� a6` `��` a A. Acoustement Thermal insulation. Materials shall be Acoustement 40 manufactured by PYROK, Inc., Mamaroneck, N.Y. (914) 777 -7070, (914) 277 -5135, or equal. B Color shall be white or light gray as selected by the Owner. C. Texture shall be Semi - Smooth troweled finish. D. Thickness shall be 2 inches minimum. E. Provide Portland Cement - e • e material that has been tested to and achieved the fallowing values; TEST METHOD PROPERTY VALUE ASTM E605 Density 41 Lbs. /Cu.Ft. ASTM E761 Compressive Strength 800 PSI ASTM E736 -86 Bond Strength 6800 Lbs. /Sq. Ft. ASTM E -84 -87 Surface Burning Characteristics 0 Flame Spread 0 Smoke Developed ASTM C423 -84A Sound Absorption 0.60 NRC @ 1" Thick _ Spray Applied Cement Plaster 09210 - 2 Job No. 006017.00 ;. Opr'6^,1'.C1:,...`092101. = • 0.50 NRC @ 1/2" Thick University of Pittsburgh Toxicity Test Toxicity LC(50) > 300 GramS ASTM E136 Combustibility Non - Combustible ASTM D2240 Hardness 70 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION • A. Examine all substrate and conditions. B. Assure substrate is free of oil, grease, dirt, paint, or other matter that would impair bond or install metal lath as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Do not proceed until said substrate and conditions are acceptable. D. Prepare substrate by filling voids and cracks and offsets, remove projections that result in telegraphing presence of imperfections. E. Prime substrate with primer or bonding agent as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Do not apply insulation material when temperature is below 40 degrees F (ambient), or substrate is below 40 degrees F. G. Mask all adjoining surfaces in order to minimize damage from overspray. H. Provide ventilation if required, and avoid excess drying rates. I. Provide tarps or temporary enclosures as necessary to confine operations. J. Perform all patching and repairing of insulation required due to cutting, removal or damage by other trades. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (except no spray pass shall exceed 1/4" thickness) using any rotary- stator plastering pump or other spray equipment approved by the manufacturer. B. Install to thickness indicated or thickness required to achieve the NRC specified. C Ensure that texture and color are all as per control sample • 3.03 CLEANING AND PATCHING A. Remove overspray and fall out material immediately upon completion of the work in each area. Clean surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. Repair or replace damaged work surfaces to acceptable conditions. B Coordinate work with other work, to minimize possibility of damage to insulation resulting from performance of subsequent work. As other units of work are completed in each area, patch damaged areas or surfaces of insulation by over October 2000 09210 - 3 Spray Applied Cement Plaster 006017.01 y \00prj \006017.01 \specs \092101.doc spraying to match original installations, or by patching procedures as required to provide uniform results. END OF SECTION Spray Applied Cement Plaster 09210 - 4 Job No. 006017.00 SECTION 09679 CHEMICAL RESISTANT EPDXY COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Chemical - resistant, two- component epoxy resin seamless coating and membrane system for application on floor and trench surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03310: Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. C321 Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical - Resistant Mortars 2. D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastic 3. D695 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Rigid Plastics 4. D822 Standard Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials 5 D4060 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings 6. E162 Test Method for Surface Flammabilities of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source B Federal Specifications: 1 MS- D -3134F Indentation of Synthetic Coatings 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. 2. Samples: Finished flooring and standard line of colors and textures. 3. Test Reports: Independent laboratory test results of specified physical characteristics. 4. Installer's Qualifications: Material manufacturer's written approval of installer and a list of at least five similar installations completed by installer within last two years. 1 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The flooring work shall be performed by a licensed specialty contractor who is engaged exclusively in the installation of chemical resistant epoxy coating, has satisfactorily completed at least five similar installations within the last two years, and approved by the chemical resistant epoxy coating material manufacturer. All work shall be performed by qualified journeymen proficient in epoxy coating application. October 2000 006017.01 09679 - 1 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating B. Comply with the following referenced standards: 1. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Installation instructions of the coating material manufacturer. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's labeled, unopened contai rep 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use admixtures in concrete slabs to receive epoxy coating which might interfere with bond or cure of epoxy coating. Do not use concrete curing compounds. B. Maintain substrate temperature at 70 °F for at least 48 hours before and after installation. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Provide a written two (2) year guarantee signed by the installer, material manufacturer and Contractor covering the repair or replacement of the entire coating system to correct shrinkage cracks, bond failure or surface deterioration resulting from causes other than abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide a coating system consisting of a bond coat, a liquid applied membrane, a base coat and two topping coats consisting of epoxy resins which cure to a hard, dense finish, having the physical characteristics specified in paragraph 2.03 of this Section. B Manufacturers: Dex -O -Tex Positred /Aero -Flr by Crossfield Products Corporation (415- 365- 6495); Dur -A -Glaze Novolac by Dur -A -Flex Inc. (817- 253 - 3539); or equal. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Products of the first named maker are used to establish the type and quality of product required. Equivalent products by other makers may be submitted for evaluation. B System: 1. Prepare substrate by dustless shotblasting to remove entire as cast surface of concrete substrate. 2. Prime with C- Bondcoat at the rate of 250 s.f. per gallon. 3. Apply S.C. membrane at 30 mils thickness. 4 Apply Base coat of Positred CR at 20 mils thickness. 5. Apply two top coats of Aero -Flor at 7 mils total thickness for two coats. October 2000 006017.01 09679 - 2 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating 2.03 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. Provide a coating system that has the following physical characteristics when fully cured: 1. Pencil Hardness (by ASTM D- 1211): 3H 2. Compressive strength (by ASTM D695 -61T): 8,600 psi 3. Bond strength (by ASTM C321 -57): 334 psi 4. Heat distortion temp. (by ASTM D648 -56T): 150 °F 5. Water absorption (by ASTM D570 -59T): 0.48% 6. Indentation (by Federal Specification MS- D- 3134F): 0.004 inches 7. Accelerated aging ASTM D822 (300 hours) (by Atlas Twin Arc Weather -O- Meter 20- minute cycle): No Change 8. Abrasion resistance ASTM D4060 (Tabor, 1,000 cycle /1,000 gm with H -22 wheel) 58 (wear index) 9. Flame spread index (by ASTM E162): 18.86 B. Chemical Resistance: 1. Provide a coating system that shows little or no damage after 72 hour immersion in concentrated 25% Hydrofluosilicic Acid. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Allow concrete slabs to cure for at least 28 days before applying epoxy coating. B. Verify that concrete surfaces are dry. Test concrete with 4 -hour rubber mat test. C. Examine substrates for defects that will adversely affect the execution and quality of the work. D. Do not start the work until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove the entire as -cast surface of the concrete substrate by shotblasting or sandblasting if permitted by local regulations. B. Mask or protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive coating. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply bonding coat at the rate of 250 s f per gallon. B Apply the membrane coat at a minimum thickness of 20 mils C Apply basecoat to a minimum thickness of 30 mils. D. Apply two top coats to a minimum total thickness of 7 mils for the two coats. E. Provide a 1/4 -inch radius at all inside corners. October 2000 006017.01 09679 - 3 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect epoxy coating from damage by subsequent construction operations. Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic for at least seven (7) days. Cover horizontal and vertical surfaces with heavy -duty, nonstaining construction paper, taped in place for at least 7 days. final acceptance, and surfaces lean with damp B. Just before III IdI a�l.epldl It.C, remove l love papei and wipe Dui ia�,.c� C�ca� i tiviu i damp � cloths. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017 01 09679 - 4 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Coating SECTION 10050 BUILDING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets 2. Concrete splash blocks 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. C. Manufacturers Instructions: For installation of all items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide one (1) surface mount steel cabinet for 4A6OBC Fire Extinguisher with door. Cabinet shall be 20 -gauge steel and have an extinguisher support bracket. Door to have an 18 -gauge stainless steel frame on all four sides, a continuous piano hinge and contain a break glass door panel. 12 -inch by 30 -inch by 3 -3/4 -inch. Larsen Architectural Series; J. L. Industries; or equal. B. Provide one for each extinguisher cabinet, a multi - purpose 4A6OBC (shipping weight approximately 18 lbs.). Shell of extinguishers shall be stainless steel. All extinguishers shall be by one manufacturer and shall have a State Fire Marshal's inspection and fill tag dated within 90 days of project acceptance and issued by the Fire Marshal of the State in which the extinguisher is installed. Larsen Architectural Series; J. L. Industries; or equal. 2.02 CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS A. Splash block: Nominal 4 feet by 2 feet by 6 inches thick, precast concrete with #6 wire mesh reinforcing. Slope the upper surface of the block to drain rainwater away from the building. Provide a splash block at each rainwater downspout terminus at grade. B. Fastener Galvanized 3/8 -inch minimum diameter by 10 -inch minimum long spike or reinforcing bar. Two spikes per splash block. October 2000 006017.01 10050 - 1 Building Specialties • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fire Extinguishers: Comply with NFPA Standard No. 10. Install cabinets and mount extinguishers where shown. B. Splash blocks: Locate at the terminus of each rainwater leader. Drive spikes flush with top of splash block. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017 01 10050 - 9 Building Specialties SECTION 10200 LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. FRP stationary louvers and frames B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07900: Flashing 2. Section 15800: Heating and Ventilating 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Fully describe all items proposed for use. C. Shop Drawings: Custom prepared for this project. D. Certified Test Data: Air and acoustic performance of louvers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with details and standards in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. Air Control Division of the Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500 for measuring air performance, water penetration and air leakage and Standard 411 for the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOUVERS A. Louvers shall be designed to resist failure from corrosion in an environment of Hydrofluosilicic acid fumes. B. Continuously weld all joints in the louver assembly using a shielded arc process. C Provide 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 14 -gauge fiberglass mesh bird screens in folded plastic frames. Where ductwork is attached to the interior side of louver provide holder for screen frame that can be built into ductwork and so arranged that by opening a door in duct, screen can be slid out for cleaning without disassembling ductwork. Where there is no ductwork attached to interior of louver, provide a holder for bird screen frame designed so that screen can be removed for cleaning ' and replaced without using tools. October 2000 006017.01 10200 - 1 Louvers D. Provide all related break shape stainless steel sills, flashings and sub - frames. Flashings shall be 26 gauge or thicker as indicated. E. Provide matching fiberglass backing plates to cover the rear of decorative louvers and portions of louvers outside of air intake or exhaust ductwork. F. Provide all required fiberglass angles, tees, plates and other shapes r for a complete installation. 2.02 FRP STATIONARY LOUVERS A. Manufacturer: Louvers as manufactured by Chem -Pruf Company, Brownsville, Texas (1- 800 -531 -7407) 45 degree blade louver style; or equal. B. Design Criteria: Design and test louvers to AMCA Standard 500 and bear AMCA certified rating seals for air performance and water penetration. Test a 4 by 4 -foot louver with a minimum free area of 7.89 square feet to pass at least 800 FPM through the free area at a pressure drop not exceeding 0.15 in W.G. Limit water penetration to 10 ounces of water per square foot of free area when tested at 720 FPM for 15 minutes per AMCA Standard 500. C. Description: All parts, jambs, header, sill, slats or vanes shall be made of gelcoated fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using resins tailored to a specific corrosive environment. It shall have a fiberglass content of 30% mean, by weight. D. The louvers shall be of flush construction, with a gelcoated outer surface of approximately 20 mils defining the color selected by the Owner. The color coat is the primary barrier against corrosive attack, being resin rich, and of the same chemistry as the resin in the glass resin substrate. (20 mils of gelcoat is the equal to 60 coats of paint). E. Bosses: For securing and positioning the slats or vanes are integrally molded at one time as the jambs are formed. F. Clevises: For controlled movement of slats that are integrally molded at one time as the slats are formed. G Reinforcement: All parts are to be fabricated or molded as follows: All exterior surfaces are to be of chemically tailored colored gelcoat of 20 mils. This is to be followed by an envelope consisting of 2 oz. of continuous strand fiberglass mat, and a tube of 10 oz. continuous strand glass roving. A fire retardant resin mixture is to be injected and infused around the reinforcement systems to form a completely solid, corrosion resistant armored part. (Pultruded glass products do not have the molded - in gelcoat protective barrier). H. Flamespread. All reinforcing resins shall contain a halogenated additive or co- reactants plus antimony trioxide. Resins should yield a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E -84 and should be self extinguishing per ASTM D -635. I. Color: The color of the louver shall be integrally molded as the part is made. October 2000 006017.01 10200 - 2 Louvers J. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be stainless steel. Location, size and quantity in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protect all aluminum in contact with concrete, plaster, masonry, steel or galvanized metal with a coating of bituminous paint. B. Install louvers as shown in the Contract Drawings and as shown in Plates 137B and 139A of the 4th Edition of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal manual. C Provide bird screens on all louvers. Install on the interior side. Use stainless steel screws throughout. D. Install sill flashing as shown detailed and as required to provide a watertight installation. E. Install sheet metal drip at head and sill of louvers as shown. F. Apply sealant "A" all around frame, inside and outside in accordance with the requirements of Section 07900. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 10200 - 3 Louvers SECTION 11001 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: The general requirements for all of the Equipment and Mechanical work in the scope of the Project, included in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15, and elsewhere wherever specifically mentioned in these Specifications. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03252: Concrete Anchorage 2. Section 05100: Structural Metal Framing 3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications 4. Section 09960: Protective Coatings 5. Section 11002: Electric Motor Drives. C. Direct the attention of all subcontractors and suppliers of equipment and related appurtenances for the work to the applicable provisions in the Contract Documents wherever they may occur. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). C. Hydraulic Institute. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 1.03 STANDARDS FOR THE WORK A. Complete Systems: Provide pipe, fittings, wiring, and supports to produce complete, operable systems with all elements properly interconnected. If a specific dimensioned location is not shown for interconnections or smaller system elements, select appropriate locations and show them on Shop Drawing submittals for review. B. Provide equipment and material new and without imperfections. Erect in a neat and workmanlike manner; aligned, leveled, cleaned, and adjusted for satisfactory operation; installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers' and the best standard practices for this type of work so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be readily made and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair. Locate oil and lubrication fittings clear of and away from guards, base, and equipment and within reach from the operating floor. Coordinate location of all motor connections in order to properly orient encased electrical conduits. In order to meet these October 2000 General Equipment and 006017.01 11001 -1 Mechanical Requirements requirements with equipment as furnished, minor deviation from the Drawings may be made as favorably reviewed by the Engineer. C. The recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers of products used in the work are hereby made part of these Specifications, except as they may be superseded by other requirements of these Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer and receive favorable review prior to fabrication, construction or delivery to the project site in accordance with Section 01300 of these Specifications. Show sizes and arrangement of equipment, foundations, and anchor bolts required, performance characteristics, fan curves and pump curves, control diagrams, wiring diagrams, motor data sheets, methods of assembly, pipe hanging details, ductwork layouts and connections to other work. Date and sign drawings as certified for use in construction of this project. The arrangement of mechanical equipment and appurtenant piping shown on the Drawings may be varied as necessary to fit the favorably reviewed certified manufacturer's installation drawings. However, manufacturers' drawings shall not deviate in substance from the Contract Drawings and Specifications as to location, size, type, and design of equipment. The following minimum requirements shall accompany all equipment submissions: 1 Overall dimensions. 2. Mounting arrangement and dimensions. 3. Description of materials. 4. Connection sizes and orientation. 5. Capacity and location of lifting eyes. 6. Motor arrangement showing location of electrical connections. 7. Rating data - Mechanical and Electrical as applicable. 8. Detail electrical wiring diagrams, showing component designation and rating. 9. Seismic design and calculations as required in Section 01040. 10 Motor data as specified in Section 11002. 11. List of special tools and /or spare parts to be furnished, if any. o Each piece of equipment, for which certified witnessed or non- witnessed performance tests are required, shall be accompanied by a completed form containing at least the following information: 1. Owner's name and Incatinn of project. r - 2. Contractor's name and subcontractor if applicable. 3. Name of item being submitted. 4. Specification reference by section, paragraph, and page 5. Data on item (manufacturer, general descriptive data, dimensions, size of connections, speeds, performance curves, serial number). A specific list of the test results plus a list, which shows the values that differ from Specifications. 6 Motor data, type, voltage, frequency, phase, full load amperes, starting method, frame size, enclosure insulation type (NEMA Code letter), dimensions, service factor, serial number. 7. Date and signature of person certifying the performance. October 2000 General Equipment and 006017 01 1 1001 -2 Mechanical Requirements D. Instruction Manuals: Prepare and submit instruction manuals covering installation, operation and maintenance of all equipment and machinery specified in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15. Refer to Section 01300, paragraph 1.08. E. Manufacturers' Affidavits: Where called for in the Specifications, each equipment manufacturer, or his authorized representative, shall submit an affidavit conforming to the requirements of Section 01650, paragraph 1.04. 1.05 RESPONSIBILITY AND CARE OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the equipment included in this Contract until it has been finally inspected, tested and accepted in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall make his own provisions for properly storing and protecting all material and equipment against theft, injury or damage from any and all causes. Damaged material and equipment shall not be used in the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN A. General: Design all equipment for the service intended, of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection and during continuous or intermittent operation. Adequately stay, brace and anchor, and install equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner. Give consideration to appearance and safety, as well as utility, in the design of details. Use cathodically compatible materials of construction. B. Seismic: Refer to Section 01040 of the Specifications for the seismic design criteria. C. Controls: Unless noted otherwise, the design of the electric control of any equipment system and /or equipment package shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer of the equipment system and /or equipment package. The elementary control diagrams as shown on the Electrical Drawings and the diagrams shown on the Instrumentation Drawings are illustrative of control and monitoring requirements pertaining to various equipment of this project. The manufacturers shall design their own functional electric control devices and circuitry, in consultation with the specific elementary control diagrams and other project specifications, to meet the equipment control requirements. All such systems and package controls shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, except that controls shown in motor control centers and process controllers, remote control devices, and their interconnecting wiring shall be provided under Divisions 16 and 17. Provide heating, ventilating and air conditioning controls, both 24 -volt and line voltage type, by a HVAC controls specialist. 2 02 MATERIALS AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. Materials: Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment and systems with new materials and in accordance with acceptable modern engineering and shop October 2000 General Equipment and 006017.01 11001 -3 Mechanical Requirements practices. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gauges so repair parts can be installed in the field. B. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of the same type or classification used for the same purpose shall be the product of the same manufacturer and shall be the same model. 2.03 LUBRICATION A. Provide lubricants of types recommended by equipment manufacturers, in quantities sufficient for consumption prior to completion, testing and final acceptance. 2.04 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING A. Details of fabrication shall be in accordance with Section 05100. B. Weld submerged steel surfaces, which butt or bear against each other, to seal the surfaces against the penetration of the liquid. Weld all gaps between adjacent submerged steel surfaces less than 1/32 -inch wide to seal the surfaces. Weld size shall be not less than the thickness of the thinnest member of the lapped or joined assembly. 2.05 EQUIPMENT BASES AND BEDPLATES A. Mount equipment assemblies on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel bedplate unless otherwise shown or specified. Provide bases and bedplates with machined support pads, tapered dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. Round or chamfer and grind smooth all corners. Continuously weld seams and contact edges between steel plates and shapes, and grind welds smooth. Do not support machinery or piping on bedplates other than that which is factory installed. Provide jacking screws in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in leveling prior to grouting. Mount all equipment bases and baseplates on reinforced concrete pads at least 3 inches high. 2.06 ANCHORS A. Each equipment manufacturer shall furnish an anchor bolt pattern and the required anchor bolts, nuts and washers of adequate design for securing bases and bedplates to concrete bases. Provide anchor bolts of length to allow for 1 -1/2 -inch of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete unless otherwise shown or specified. B Provide anchor and assembly bolts and nuts of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. All bolts shall be standard machine bolts, with cold pressed hexagon nuts. Provide suitable degauling compounds for bronze and stainless steel threaded components. Any space wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a water channel, is classified as a moist location. Unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings, provide materials as follows: 1. Bolts and nuts in submerged locations or submerged and embedded in concrete or buried in earth: Type 304 stainless steel. October 2000 General Equipment and 000017.01 11001 -4 Mechanical Requirements A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Furnish each piece of equipment and its driver with a corrosion- resistant metal nameplate fastened to the item in a readily readable position. This nameplate to contain the manufacturer's name, equipment rating, capacity, size, model, serial number, and speed. All information written or printed to be in English. B. Direction of Rotation: Furnish each piece of rotating equipment with a direction of rotation arrow. C. Functional Identification: Label each piece of equipment using a plastic laminate label with the functional name and number of the equipment. 1. Fasten labels to the equipment, its base, or other acceptable location: a. Letters: At least 1/2 -inch high with the border trim on all sides not less than 1 /4 -inch. b. Color: Green background with white letters. c. Fasteners: Brass or stainless steel screwed into inserts, anchor shields, or tapped holes in equipment or base. 2.11 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, provide suitable insulation between adjacent surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. Connections of dissimilar piping materials shall utilize dielectric unions, flanges, couplings, or bushings. 2.12 SPECIAL TOOLS A. For each type of equipment to be furnished, provide a complete set of all special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of such equipment. 2.13 FINISHES A. Conform to applicable requirements of Section 09960. B. Factory Painting: On pumps, motors, drives, starters, control panels, and other similar self- contained or enclosed components, apply a factory protective paint system unless otherwise noted. Paint or otherwise protect surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly by a method, which provides protection for the life of the equipment. C. Shop Priming: Except where field sandblasting is required, apply one or more shop coats of metal primer on surfaces to be finish painted at the site, of sufficient thickness to protect surfaces until finished. Primer shall be compatible with finish coat. D. Rust Preventive: Coat machined, polished, other ferrous surfaces, and non - ferrous surfaces that are not to be painted with rust preventive compound. October 2000 General Equipment and 006017.01 11001 -6 Mechanical Requirements 2. Boats and nuts for supports or equipment in dry or moist locations: Galvanized steel (hot - dipped) with oversize nuts. 3. Use other bolting materials where specifically called for in the Specifications or on the Drawings. C. Anchor all motor - driven equipment with cast -in -place anchor bolts or drilled -in anchors set with epoxy adhesive. Do not provide expansion type anchors for motor - driven equipment. D. Anchor all non - motor - driven equipment with cast -in -place anchor bolts or drilled -in anchors set with epoxy adhesive except that, where specifically allowed by note on the Drawing, expansion type anchors may be used. E. Refer to Section 03252 for technical specification requirements of drilled -in anchors set in epoxy adhesive, expansion bolt anchors, and cast -in -place anchors. 2.07 SAFETY GUARDS A. Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, nip points, exposed shafts and other moving or rotating parts on all sides with safety guards conforming to all Federal, State, and local codes and regulations pertaining; conform to the most restrictive requirement. Design guards for easy installation and removal, complete with necessary supports, accessories, and fasteners, all hot -dip galvanized. Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water. Provide tachometer test opening in line with ends of shafts. Typically guards shall be expanded metal on a structural steel frame, except that outdoor guards may be of solid material. Provide hinged doors with latch for service and lubrication access. B. Cover all pipes, manifolds, heaters, and other surfaces which have a surface temperature sufficient to burn human tissue with a thermal insulating material or otherwise guard against contact. 2.08 LIFTING EYES A. Supply all equipment weighing over 100 pounds with lifting eyes Parts of equipment assemblies, which are normally serviced separately, such as motors, to have lifting eyes of their own. 2.09 DRIVES A. General: Provide all drive units with a AGMA rating and service factor suitable for 24 hours per day operation under the operating load. B Electric Motors Conform to the requirements of Section 11002. C V -Belt Drives: Equip each V -belt drive with suitable tension adjustment. Provide drives having a service factor of at least 1.6 with arc length correction at maximum torque using nameplate rating of driving motor. 2 10 NAMEPLATES October 2000 General Equipment and 00A017.01 1 1 nr11 -c Marhanirai Ranuiramantc 2.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Mechanical and electrical equipment, as installed in this project, shall not create sound levels that are in excess of that permitted for 8 hours per day worker exposure unless otherwise noted for the specific piece of equipment involved. If the required sound level cannot be achieved by bare equipment in its designated environment, provide sound attenuating enclosures. Sound attenuating enclosures shall have necessary ventilation to prevent equipment overheating and shall be constructed for easy removal to permit maintenance. Devices necessary for day -to- day operation shall pierce the enclosure or otherwise be accessible without need to remove the enclosure. B Equipment which when operating has obvious excessive vibrations shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. Baseline vibration measurements shall be made where specified. 2.15 FACTORY TESTS A. Perform factory tests for each piece of equipment where specifically called for in the section specifying that equipment. Note that factory tests are inherent in many reference standards. The requirement for a factory test in a referenced standard is hereby made a part of these Specifications. Conduct factory tests at the same speeds and other conditions at which the equipment will operate in the field, except as noted. B Where specifically noted, performance tests may be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative. Inform the Engineer in sufficient time to allow arrangements to be made for witness of such tests. When non - witnessed tests are performed, supply certified results. C Perform factory testing of pumps in accordance with the requirements and standards of the Hydraulic Institute. D Tests of other equipment shall conform to the requirements set forth in these Specifications PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect each item of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. 3 02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installing equipment, ensure that the areas are clean. Maintain the areas in a broom -clean condition during installation operations. Clean, condition, and service equipment in accordance with the approved Instruction Manuals and specific recommendations of the equipment manufacturer 3.03 INSTALLATION October 2000 General Equipment and 006017.01 11001 -7 Mechanical Requirements A. Structural Fabrications: Conform to the AISC Code and Specification referenced in Article "Structural Steel Fabrications," and conform to Section [05100] [05500]. B. Equipment: Conform to approved Instruction Manuals. Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified. Use specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, diai indicators, gauges, and micrometers, as applicable. Produce acceptable installations free of vibration or other defects. Align and pin to common bedplate equipment and drivers connected by flexible couplings. C. Anchor Bolts: Deliver bolts with templates or setting drawings and verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed. D. Base and Bedplate Grouting: Do not place grout until initial fitting and alignment of connected piping is completed. Level and align equipment on the concrete foundations, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with grout. Bevel exposed grout at 45 degree angle, except round exposed grout at horizontal surfaces for drainage. Trowel or point exposed grout to a smooth, dense finish and damp cure with burlap for three days. When grout is fully hardened, remove jacking screws and tighten nuts on anchor bolts. Check the installation for alignment and level, and perform approved corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the applicable Instruction Manual. 1. Make an allowance of at least 1 -1/2 inches for grout under the equipment bases, whether or not shown on the Drawings. Use steel shims to level and adjust the bases. Shims may be left embedded in the grout; in which case, they shall be installed neatly and so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise approved, all grout shall be a favorably reviewed non - shrink, non - metallic grout. 2. Grout: Dimensionally stable, inorganic, premixed, and resistant to acids, alkalis, and salt water, and unaffected by water and oil. It shall have high strength, even when used as a pourable mixture, and shall bond well with steel and cured concrete or be compatible with a suitable bonding agent which shall then be used to effect the bond. Use in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide Five Star Grout as manufactured by U.S. Grout Corporation, Bonsai Construction Grout as manufactured by Bonsai Company, or equal. i. SSubmit for favorable review by the Engineer prior to use. g y� 5 :✓:.... 3. Where practicable, place the grout through the grout holes in the equipment base and work outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamfer around the top edge of the finished foundation. E Architectural Metals Handrails, guardrails, stairs, and other architectural metals furnished as a part of equipment shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 3.04 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND ADJUSTMENT A. Arrange for an authorized factory- trained representative of the company or companies supplying the various items of equipment to check the installation and adjust and test the equipment furnished before the acceptance of the work by the Owner Said representative shall be experienced and knowledgeable of the October 2000 General Equipment and 0Q6017.01 11001 -8 Mechanical Requirements equipment being tested. Furthermore, he shall assist and instruct the operating staff in adjusting and operating the equipment during the initial plant operation period. 1. Provide initial lubrication for all equipment. 2. Test and demonstrate to the Owner's representative that all equipment operates properly and specified performance has been attained. For pumps, include measurement of suction and discharge pressure at the pump and measurement of pumping rate by volumetric means or through a suitably calibrated meter for two points on the performance curve. For adjustable -speed pumps, conduct tests at a minimum of two speeds. Furnish any test equipment or measuring devices required which are not part of the permanent installation. 3. In addition, demonstrate that the entire facility is in full operating condition prior to the acceptance of the work. Should any equipment or part thereof fail to operate as intended, immediately remove and replace it, all at the Contractor's expense. Pay for all tests involved in this Section. 4. Pressure test equipment and connections thereto as required by these Specifications. 3.05 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Upon completion of the work, and after all systems are set and balanced, conduct performance tests in accordance with Division 1 and other applicable sections of these Specifications. Submit test conditions, test data, and results to the Engineer for review. 3 06 SOUND LEVEL TESTING A. Measure the sound level developed by all mechanical and electrical equipment provided. Perform testing in all rooms and spaces containing such equipment during the final operation test program with all equipment operating. Use [OSHA] approved instrument and record the highest sound level developed when measured according to OSHA standards in each room and space. Deliver a copy of records to the Engineer. 3 07 TOOLS, LOOSE PARTS, AND LUBRICANTS A. Tools and Loose Parts Supplied: Provide an inventory of tools and loose parts required to be supplied under the project. Turn over inventory and parts to the Owner. The Owner's written acknowledgment of receipt is required for project completion. Loose parts are defined as items such as special tools, keys, safety equipment, and portable equipment. Refer to Section 01700 and relevant technical sections of these Specifications for additional instructions. B Recommended Spare Parts: Furnish a complete list of recommended spare parts and supplies for each equipment furnished with current prices and a source of supply. C. Provide a list of all recommended lubricants not listed in the O &M Manuals. END OF SECTION October 2000 General Equipment and 006017.01 11001 -9 Mechanical Requirements SECTION 11002 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide motors to drive equipment specified in other sections and Divisions, including, but not limited to, Divisions 11 and 16. Refer to driven equipment sections for additional requirements. Requirements of the driven equipment Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section, where conflict occurs. This Section applies to all electric motors furnished for this project, unless otherwise noted. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 2. Section 16010: General Electrical Requirements. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard: 1 MG 1 Motors and Generators B Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard: 1. 112 Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publication: Recognized Component Directory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each motor, include the following data in the shop drawing submittal for the driven equipment: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Manufacturer's type and frame designation. 3 Horsepower output. 4. Time rating. 5. Maximum ambient temperature rating. 6. Insulation system designation. 7. Rpm at full load. 8 Voltage, number of phases, frequency, and full Toad amperes. 9. Code letter for locked rotor kVA. 10. Service factor at 40 °C ambient. 11. NEMA design letter. 12. Enclosure type. 13. Lubrication requirements, including type and frequency. 14. Kw input power and power factor at 75% and 100% of rated horsepower output. 15. Guaranteed minimum efficiency and nominal efficiency per MG1- 12.55. 16. Nominal efficiency. October 2000 006017.01 11002 -1 Electric Motor Drives B. Provide installation, operation and maintenance instructions, and renewal parts list, as required for maintenance manuals under Section 01300, Paragraph 1.08. 1.04 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate motors with driven equipment requirements. Unless otherwise specified, equipment manufacturers or suppliers shall select and provide motors for their equipment in conformance with these Specifications. Give particular attention to coordination of requirements for: 1. Power. 2. Starting torque. 3. Speed. 4. Bearing load. 5. Ambient temperature. 6. Frequency of starting. 7. Moisture exposure. 8. Adjustable speed control, where applicable. B. Suppliers of motors to be used with adjustable speed systems shah: 1. Provide all relevant motor data to the adjustable speed control manufacturer for analysis. Provide motors in conformance with and compatible with the adjustable speed control manufacturer's equipment and requirements. 2 Provide all relevant motor data to the pump manufacturer for vibration, reed critical frequency and other required analyses. 1.05 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. The following motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment in all cases: 1. Speed. 2. Horsepower or supplier responsibility to determine. 3. Horizontal or vertical arrangement. 4 Indoor or outdoor location. B Additional motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment only where the required motor differs from the typical characteristics described below or where additional properties or characteristics are required that are not specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, built, and installed in the driven equipment, to provide long, trouble -free life in industrial service and shall be rated in conformance with NEMA MG1. Motors rated 100 horsepower or less and rated 600V or Tess shall be listed in UL Recognized Component Directory or shall be listed and labeled by other organizations acceptable to the authority having code enforcement jurisdiction. B. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with the following typical characteristics: October 2000 nn6017 n1 11nm -7 Flr?rtrir Mntnrnrives 1. Motors shall be single speed and designed for continuous duty and full voltage starting. Motors shall provide standard starting torque. 2. Voltage Ratings: a. 1/2 horsepower or Tess: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz, capacitor start. Small fan motors may be split phase or shaded pole type if standard for the equipment. b. Above 1/2 horsepower: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction motors. 3. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 in an ambient temperature of 40 °C. a. Exceptions: Motors, which have special enclosures or winding configurations, may carry a Unity (1.0) Service Factor. Examples are totally enclosed, explosion proof, or submersible motors. 4. Windings shall be copper. 5. Provide ground lug inside the terminal box. 6. Provide lifting eye on each motor weighing more than 50 pounds. 7. Each motor shall be suitable for six starts per hour (5 minutes on and 5 minutes off, continuously) when powering the specific driven equipment required for this project. 8. Each motor shall have an overall sound power level at no Toad not greater than given in NEMA MG1- 12.49. 9. Motors, which have special operating characteristics such as multi- speed, high torque /high slip, short time intermittent ratings shall be nameplated to show how these characteristics differ from standard design. 2.02 NAMEPLATE A. Provide stainless steel nameplate for each motor, attached to the motor by stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly the information required by NEMA MG1, Part 10 and MG1- 12.55. 2.03 ENCLOSURE TYPE BY LOCATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with the following typical enclosures: 1. Indoors: Horizontal motors shall be open, drip - proof; vertical motors shall be drip -proof with guard. 2. Outdoors: Vertical motors shall be weather - protected type I. Horizontal motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motors shall have the following features: a. Bearing protection. b. Anti - corrosion treatment of external hardware and internal metal parts. c. Weatherproof terminal box with gaskets between the motor, terminal box, and terminal box cover. d. Guard screens on ventilation openings. e. Moderate moisture resistant insulation, specified hereinafter. f. Interior and exterior corrosion protection coatings g. Special attention to leads into terminal box. 2.04 INSULATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with Class H insulation, non - hygroscopic. In single phase motors 1/2 horsepower or smaller, provide Class A insulation or better. October 2000 006017.01 11002 -3 Electric Motor Drives B. Where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide the following type of insulation: 1. Moderate Moisture Resistant: Provide extra dip and bake of epoxy or polyester vamish to resist somewhat higher than normal moisture in the atmosphere. 2.05 MOTOR HORSEPOWER A. The maximum permissible motor loading: 1. Motors with service factor 1.15 or greater: 100% of nameplate horsepower. 2. Motors with service factor Tess than 1.15: 90% of nameplate horsepower. TABLE 11002 -1 Motor Nominal Efficiencies at Full Load HP 900 RPM 1,200 RPM 1,800 RPM 3,600 RPM Open Drip -Proof and Weather Protected Type 1 Motors 1 78.5 78.5 1 82.5 80.0 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 85.5 82.5 82.5 84.0 5 86.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 7.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 90.2 89.5 86.5 15 90.2 91.7 90.2 89.5 20 91.7 91.7 91.0 90.2 25 91.7 92.4 91.7 90.2 30 92.4 93.0 92.4 92.4 40 91.7 93.0 93.6 93.6 50 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 60 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 75 94.1 93.6 94.1 93.6 100 94.5 94.5 94.5 941 125 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.1 150 95.0 94.5 95.0 941 200 95.0 95.0 95.0 94.1 250 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 300 -500 95.0 95 8 95.8 94.5 Total Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors 1 78.5 78.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 86.5 86.5 82.5 84.0 5 88.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 7 5 89.5 90.2 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 15 90.2 92 4 91.0 91.7 20 91.7 92.4 91.0 91 7 25 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.4 October 2000 fl(1Rf117 f11 11_002-4 Electric Mntnr Drives Horsepower Code Letter <5 M 7-1/2-10 H .15 G 2.08 THERMAL PROTECTION A. In each motor to be used with adjustable speed drives, in all motors 60 horsepower and larger, or where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide integral thermostats to protect the motor from overheating. Thermostats shall be normally open or normally closed and rated 125 Vac, 1 amp. 2.09 SPACE HEATERS A. Provide space heaters for motors. Heaters shall be 120 or 240 volts, single phase, as required by the control circuit voltage. Heater wattage and voltage ratings shall be indicated on motor nameplate. Motor winding heating systems shall be as specified in Section 16920. 2.10 FACTORY TESTS A. Conduct factory tests on all motors in conformance with NEMA MG 1- 12.51. All tests shall be made in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors in driven equipment in conformance with motor manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Motor nameplate shall be visible when installed on the driven equipment. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 11002 -6 Electric Motor Drives HP 900 RPM 1,200 RPM 1,800 RPM ' 3,600 RPM ' 30 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.0 40 92.4 93.6 94.1 94.1 50 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 60 93.6 94.1 94.1 94.1 75 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.5 100 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 125 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.4 200 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.4 250 95.0 95.4 95.8 95.8 300 -500 95.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 B. Probable motor horsepower ratings have been specified or shown on the Drawings. Changes from the specified horsepower may be accepted, if necessary to assure that motors do not exceed their maximum permissible loading, as defined above, under normal operation. Motor horsepowers shall not be less than those specified in driven equipment sections. If a larger horsepower rating is required by the driven equipment, provide all changes required to motor starting and control equipment and to the conduit and wiring system without any additional cost to the Owner. 2.06 EFFICIENCY A. For motors 1 horsepower and larger, provide premium efficiency motors unless otherwise specified. Premium efficiency motors shall have nominal efficiencies at full Toad not less than those listed in Table 11002 -1. 1. Guaranteed minimum efficiencies of premium efficiency motors shall correspond to nominal values as tabulated in NEMA MG -1, Table 12 -6. B Efficiencies shall be determined by using the IEEE 112, Test Method B using segregated loss determination. C Single -phase fractional horsepower motors 1/4 HP through 3/4 HP motors shall be high - efficiency split- capacitor types having minimum efficiency ratings of not less than 64% and power factors of not less than 94.5 %. 2.07 LOCKED ROTOR KVA - CODE LETTER A. Provide motors with locked rotor kVA values less than or equal to those corresponding to the following: October 2000 006017 01 11002 -5 Electric Motor Drives SECTION 11216 CHEMICAL TRANSFER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide complete, tested, and operating water pumps, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 2. Section 11002: Electric Motor Drives 3. Section 15050: Piping, Valves, and Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A743 Castings, Iron- Chromium, Iron - Chromium - Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. B. Hydraulic Institute. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following as a single complete initial submittal, in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals: 1. Product data to demonstrate that the equipment conforms to the Specifications. 2. Motor data. 3. Seismic anchorage certification and related sketch. 4. Pump layouts and dimensions. 5. Pump performance curves. B. Performance Testing: Submit certified non - witnessed factory performance test results. Receive favorable review of test results prior to shipping the equipment. C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists. D Affidavits Submit affidavit from the manufacturer stating that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full time operation. 1 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the equipment for at least five years, and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. October 2000 006017.01 11216 -1 Chemical Transfer Pumps 1.05 SEISMIC PROTECTION A. All equipment in this Section will require seismic certifications and descriptions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Pumps: ANSIMAG, Goulds Pumps, or equal. 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pump Schedule: Item Fluorosilicic Acid Transfer Pump P -1 Quantity of Pumps 1 Pump Type Horizontal -End Suction, Centerline Discharge, Magnetically - Driven, Non - Metallic Centrifugal Pump Maximum Capacity 36 GPM @ 20 ft. TDH ± 0.5 ft. Minimum Capacity 30 GPM @ 22 ft. TDH ± 0.5 ft. Maximum NPSH Required @ Maximum Capacity 3 ft. Maximum Speed 3600 RPM Operating Speed 1800 RPM Motor Horsepower 0.75 HP Manufacturer /Model /Impeller Size ANSIMAG, K +1516, 5.00 in. Impeller* Minimum Size (Suct. x Disch.) 1.5 inch x 1 inch Minimum Guaranteed Efficiency 40 Gauge Range: Suction 30- inches Hg /15 psi Compound Discharge 0 — 30 psi *or equal 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Provide horizontal -end suction pumps, as indicated in the Pump Schedule. Mount each pump and motor on a stainless steel support base. Pump and motor shall be magnetically close coupled and horizontally mounted. Casing shall be end suction and arranged for back pullout. Disassembly shall not require disturbing either suction or discharge connections Suction and discharge connections shall be flanged. 1. Provide tap on lower half of casing for draining. 2. Provide renewable wear rings on casing and impeller. B. Construction: Horizontal -end suction pumps shall be non - metallic and shall include the following components made of the indicated materials: 1. Casing: Ductile iron with ETFE lining. 2. Impeller: Carbon fiber ETFE. n Shaft. bid_ J. OI ldl 1. Silicon I C:dl UIUC. 4. Shaft support: Silicon carbide with carbon reinforced ETFE. October 2000 006017 01 11'216-2 Chemi Transfer Pumps 5. Wear ring: Carbon fiber reinforced Teflon. 6. 0-ring: FKM fluorocarbon rubber. 7. Rear casing: Carbon fiber reinforced ETFE with composite cover. C. Impeller: Closed type, one piece construction, statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be non - rotating. D. Magnetic Coupling: Neodymium Iron seal -less magnetic coupling designed for zero slippage and zero losses. E. Motor: Provide motors for indoor service, suitable for operation at 480 volts, and conforming to requirements of Section 11002. Nameplate motor horsepower shall not be exceeded at any flow up through the maximum operating point in the Pump Schedule. F. Bearings: Oversized, heavy duty, grease lubricated ball- bearing or roller bearing type. Horizontal -end suction pumps shall have an AFBMA minimum B -10 life of 20,000 hours. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide suction and discharge pressure gauges for each pump with features and accessories in accordance with Section 15050. Gauge ranges shall conform to the listing in the Pump Schedule. 2.05 FINISHES A. Painting: Apply manufacturer's standard factory paint finish. 2.06 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the following spare parts for each model of pump: 1. Impeller 2. Wear Ring 3 0-rings 4. Main Bushing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the pump unit(s) in strict conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Check pump and motor alignment according to the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute after complete unit has been installed at the site. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 11216 -3 Chemical Transfer Pumps SECTION 11240 CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide complete tested and operating, fluorosilicic acid feed equipment, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 10400: Identifying Devices 2. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 3. Section 13416: Chemical Storage Tanks 4. Section 15050: Piping, Valves, and Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following as a complete initial submittal, in accordance with Section 01300. Include sufficient data to show that the product conforms to Specification requirements, including motor and pump data, seismic certification, and related sketch. B Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication, operation, and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists for each system specified. C. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers stating that each system has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full -time operation. D. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each chemical to be used during testing of each chemical feed system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All products furnished under this section shall be from a single manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the manufacture of the pumps specified for at least five years. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the City Representative that the quality and functions are equal to equipment made by the manufacturers specifically named herein. B AM components and equipment shall be suitable for bulk (as delivered) chemicals specified as follows in percentage by weight of solution (approximate): Approximate Chemical Concentration Specific Gravity Fluorosilicic acid 20 -25% 1.2 C. Comply with the Following Regulatory Standards: 1. Uniform Fire Code, especially Article 80, Hazardous Materials with local amendments, if any. 2. Uniform Building Code, especially Chapter 9, with local amendments, if any. October 2000 006017.01 11240 -1 Chemical Feed Equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METERING PUMPS A. Type: The chemical metering pump shall be positive displacement mechanical or hydraulic diaphragm metering pump. The pump should be a Wallace and Tiernan Encore 700, 44- Series diaphragm- metering pump, Penn Process Hydroflo Cheminjector -D Series 1077, or approved equal. Acceptable models should be manufactured by Wallace and Tiernan or by Penn Process Technologies. Stroke length shall be adjustable over a 10:1 range; stroke frequency shall be adjustable over an 80:1 range using an SCR variable speed controller. The pump should be capable of either manual or automatic speed control. The pump shall be capable of self - priming with 10 feet of suction lift. B. Chemical Metering Pump Schedule: Approximate Capacity GPH Injection Pressure (psi) Voltage Phase Speed Qty Service Min. Max. Control 1 Fluorosilicic acid .80 5.0 30 115/230 Single SCR variable speed C Construction: 1. Metering pump shall be designed to handle the chemicals in the concentrations noted above. Metering pumps shall be suitable for 1/4" tubing connectors. Solenoid metering pumps will not be accepted. 2. The metering pump shall be a complete assembly including head, diaphragm, and easily removable clear PVC ball check valves. 3. Stroke Positioner: a. Each pump shall have a manual stroke length adjustment. 4. Materials: Metering pumps shall use the following materials for wetted parts and seals. a. Wetted Parts: Wetted parts include head, diaphragm, ball checks, and any other parts in the head assembly which normally are in contact with the pumped chemical. Chemical Wetted it /Di Shc lel 1!l6,sQ! Y Y e Q l6�.V a Fluorosilicic acid PVC, TFE, Viton b Seals: All seals shall be made of materials, which are suitable and recommended for the chemical service. D Flow Requirements: Metering pump capacity shall be as specified above. Ratings are specified at 100% controller speed output. Metering pumps shall have a repeatability of 1% of full scale, given constant suction and discharge pressures. October 2000 nnr±n1 n1 11240 2 C emircal F Equipment 2.02 SPEED CONTROLLERS A. General: Individually packaged (NEMA 4X rated enclosure) electronic control modules for the chemical metering pump shall be supplied by the manufacturer or supplier. B. Type: SCR type controllers for use with a DC motor. Modules shall accept a 4 -20 mA speed signal, as shown on the Instrumentation and Electrical Drawings. C. Features: The electronic control module shall contain a manual rate control adjuster, a hand /off /remote switch, a metering pump running light and a fused on -off power switch. The modules shall accept a remote dry contact to start and run the unit, and shall provide the following dry contacts for remote monitoring: 1. Pump "Run." 2. Pump "Ready" which shall indicate that the pump is in the "Remote" position and ready for automatic control. The electronic control module shall provide a 4 -20 mA metering pump speed output signal for remote monitoring. 2.03 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. General: Materials of construction shall be satisfactory for continuous exposure to the previously listed chemicals. B Calibration Cylinder: Provide clear PVC graduated calibration cylinders sized to provide a 5- minute test at maximum pump output. Provide removable anti - splash caps or plugs for each calibration cylinder. C. Piping Specialties. 1 Provide properly sized pulsation dampeners on the discharge header, as shown on the Drawings. Pulsation dampers shall incorporate a pre- charged internal diaphragm. All wetted parts shall be compatible with the process chemical. 2. Provide pressure relief valves (external to the pump) for all services, which shall be of PVC. Valves shall be of the flow- through style and incorporate a manual bypass knob. All wetted parts shall be compatible with the process chemical. Valves shall be field adjustable and installed, as shown on the Drawings and /or as recommended by manufacturer. Valves shall be by Wallace & Tiernan, LMI Liquid Metronics Division, or equal. 3. Provide a suction assembly including tube and foot valve to keep the pump primed. Strainers, pipe /tube connectors, and quick disconnects shall be provided, as shown on the Drawings. 4 Gauges: Each pump shall be furnished with an integral diaphragm pressure gauge. Gauges shall be calibrated 0 to 100 psi with an over range protection of 100 percent of full scale. October 2000 006017.01 11240 -3 Chemical Feed Equipment 2.04 PLATFORM SCALE A. Platform scale shall be of the hydraulic cell type. Scale shall be sized to accept the flourosilicic acid day tank (T -2). Load plate shall be capable of tilting 4 degrees without affecting accuracy. B. Dial shall be 12 -inch in diameter and read zero to 2,000 pounds with provisions for tare adjustment. Dial indicator shall be capable of sending a 4 -20 mA signal corresponding to the load. Dial shall be temperature stable and include a damper to prevent shock damage. Dial accuracy shall be better than 0.5 %. Provide 20 feet of hose between the load cell and dial. C. Scale shall be Chem -Scale as manufactured by Force Flow Equipment, or equal. 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts, which are necessary for continued operation of the equipment and any special tools required for replacement of parts and adjustment of equipment. For each metering pump supplied, spare parts shall include but not be limited to one set of:, complete check valve assemblies, diaphragms, "0" rings , fuses and other parts identified by the information submitted under paragraph 1.02B. 2.06 METERING PUMP SHELF A. A shelf shall be fabricated of PVC or FRP. The shelf shall be large enough such that there is clearance on all sides of the pump. The shelf shall not interfere with pump suction or discharge piping or power /control connections. The shelf shall be capable of holding a weight equivalent to three times the weight of the pump. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: The chemical feed system equipment shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and with favorably reviewed shop drawings. Check out of the final installation, startup, calibration, and instruction of operating personnel shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. B The metering pump is to be bolted securely to the FRP or PVC shelf. The shelf is to be bolted securely to the wall. The pump and shelf shall be sturdy so as to not move, wobble, or vibrate during operation or while the pump or tubing is being maintained or adjusted 3.02 FIELD TEST A. After successfully completing leak tests of the chemical storage tanks (Section 13416), each chemical feed system shall be tested for four hours with water Each chemical system shall be tested against a closed discharge solution line to test pressure relief valve operation. This shall be performed for each metering pump and shall be witnessed by the City Representative. October 2000 vvv 1 1 v 1 3 3 Ciicu u wi Feed Equipment B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all test material(s). 3.04 FIELD PAINTING A. All equipment shall be factory coated for listed chemical service. Field painting of equipment shall not be allowed. 3.05 FIELD SERVICES A. Provide an engineer or technician from the chemical feed equipment supplier(s) to make all adjustments and to conduct the testing specified in paragraph 3.02 above. B. After successful completion of field testing, provide up to 1 day service by an engineer or technician from the equipment supplier(s) to train plant personnel in system operation, maintenance, and safety procedures. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 11240 -5 Chemical Feed Equipment SECTION 13200 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 7 Y A. Requirements specified in Section 11001 form a part of this Section. B. Work Included. Provide secondary containment tank as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The product furnished under this Section shall: 1. Be of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) vessels for at least 5 years. 2. Be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner that the quality is equal to equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Furnish Shop Drawings for favorable review of the tanks by the Owner. Include sufficient data to show that the product conforms to the Specification requirements. Furnish Drawings showing location of manways, nozzles, and other appurtenances; details of tank construction; wall thickness; material specification of tank; and tank fittings. Provide sufficient data for the tank anchorage that will clearly demonstrate compliance with these Specifications. B. Chemical Resistance Data: Provide data for the proposed fiberglass resins. Data shall reflect the listed service conditions. C. Manuals. Furnish manufacturer's installation, handling, and operation and maintenance manuals for the tanks. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide full 2 -year warranty for tanks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 01 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT TANKS A. Tanks Description T -3 Service Flourosilicic Acid, 25% Minimum Capacity 8,300 gallons Diameter 8 feet Maximum Length 26 feet October 2000 006017.01 13200 -1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks B. Materials: 1. Resin: Furnish fiberglass resin suitable for the intended service. Ashland Chemical's HETRON 922 (vinyl ester), or equal. 2. Glass: Furnish glass reinforcing suitable for the intended service. 3. Exterior resin coat: Furnish UV- inhibitor. 4. Surfacing veil: Use nexus double- synthetic surfacing veil, 10 mil thickness minimum. C. Construct tanks per the following standards: 1. ASTM D 3299. 2. National Bureau of Standards PS- 15 -69. D. Connections: Provide connections as shown on the Drawings. Provide flanged nozzles with full, flat -face fiberglass flanges with ASA 125 or ASA 150 Ib. standard drilling. Design and reinforce the nozzles for the anticipated loads. Provide gusset reinforcements as required. E. Provide integral hold down straps and lugs, lifting lugs, and anchor bolts as required. F. Tank Thickness: Not Tess than 1/4 inch. G. Tanks shall be as manufactured by Xeres, Edwards Fiberglass, TanKinetics, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING A. Ship tanks on padded saddles and tied down with padded slings. Provide all shipping and other arrangements required to transport the tanks to the project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install tanks in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with favorably reviewed shop drawings B. Grouting: Properly grout tanks in full compliance with the manufacturer's Instructions. 3.03 TESTING A. Provide the Engineer with five (5) working days notice prior to shop tests and two (2) working days notice prior to field tests. The Contractor shall assume a witness for each test shall be required. B. All tanks shall be shop tested for zero leakage. Submit test results to the Engineer for review whether witnessed by the Engineer or not. Do not ship tanks until favorable review of test results is received. October 2000 006017 13200 -2 FihargIass RRinforceCi Plastic Tanks C. Perform a 48 -hour static leak test by filling each tank with water. A passing test result shall be zero leakage. If a leak is detected the tank shall be repaired or replace in a manner approved by the Engineer. Such repairs shall only be performed by the tank manufacturer. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 13200 -3 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks SECTION 13416 CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1 if 1 A. This section describes the indoor fluorosilicic acid tanks. Provide complete, tested and operating tanks as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01040: Coordination and Project Requirements 2. Section 01190: Seismic Requirements 3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications 4. Section 09960: Protective Coatings 5. Section 10400: Identifying Devices 6. Section 11240: Chemical Feed Equipment 7. Section 15050: Piping, Valves and Accessories 8. Section 17110: Analytical Instruments. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following as a complete initial submittal in accordance with Section 01300. Sufficient data shall be included to show that the product conforms to Specification requirements. Provide the following additional data: 1. Drawings showing tank dimensions and orientation of nozzles and other appurtenances. 2. Details of tank construction and fittings. Indicate wall thicknesses. 3. Anchorage and lateral restraint calculations, which have been verified and stamped by a structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. Lateral restraint system shall be designed for Seismic Zone 2b. 4. Tank design calculation as specified, including material properties used in design and loading conditions (handling, vertical loading, discontinuity, and seismic loading). 5. A description of tank manufacturer's corrosion resistance charts for the specified chemicals of the chemical concentrations indicated below, in percentage by weight of solution: Chemical Approximate Approximate Specific Concentration Gravity Fluorosilicic Acid 23% 1.2 6. Form of warranty B. The manufacturer, after fabrication is complete, shall submit to the City Representative all tank wall nozzle cutouts. These cutouts shall be labeled in accordance with the submittal drawings. C Results of shop testing. October 2000 006017.01 13416 - 1 Chemical Storage Tanks D. Results of field testing. E. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists. Furnish a local 24 -hour emergency number for repairs in case of tank damage. F. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the tanks have been shop and field tested and are properly installed ready for full-time storage of the specified chemicals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products of the same material furnished under this Section shall be supplied by a single manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of tanks. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the City Representative and the Engineer that the quality is equal to tanks made by the manufacturers named herein. In addition to the minimum design requirements as specified, the tanks shall be designed for the stated specific gravity conditions, maximum operating temperature of 110 °F, seismic zone 4 with seismic importance factor 1 = 1.25, and other superimposed mechanical conditions as described. All components shall be compatible with the chemicals specified in Paragraph 1.02.A.5. B Comply with the following Reference Standard: 1. Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks, ASTM D 1998. C. Comply with the following Regulatory Standards: 1. Uniform Fire Code, Article 80, Hazardous Materials, with local amendments, if any. 2. Uniform Building Code, Chapter 3, with local amendments, if any. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CROSS - LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) STORAGE TANKS A. Manufacturer: Tanks shall be as manufactured by Poly Processing (Poly Cal Plastics); Central California Container; or equal. B. Tanks shall meet ASTM D 1998 Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks. The tanks 5°haii have t.a as scheduled in paragraph 2.02. C. Each tank shall have weatherability equal to MARLEX CL100 or Paxon Grade 7004 • resin with 1/2 of 1% UV stabilizer. Manufacturer shall have the capability of providing history of tanks made of specified resin with three or more years exposure to sunlight. D Resin used in the tank manufacture shall be crosslinkable polyethylene MARLEX CL100 as manufactured by Phillips Chemical; Paxon Grade 7004 as manufactured by Allied Signal Corp.; or equal. The rotationally molded tank material shall meet or exceed the following properties: October 2000 ^ 1 4 3 A 4 G Chemical I Stor�nn - Franke UUbU i .0 i C h i ical age Property Value ASTM Test Density, gm /cc 0.930 -0.933 D1505 Environmental Stress Cracking >1,000 D1693 Resistance, F50, hours Tensile Strength, Ultimate psi 2,600 D638 2- inch /minimum Type IV Specimen Elongation at Break, % 450 D638 2 -inch minimum Type IV Specimen Vicat Softening Point —240 °F D1525 Brittleness Temperature < -180 °F D746 Flexural Modulus, psi 100,000 D790 E. Impact test results must meet the requirements of ASTM D 1998, Section 11 - Test Methods. F. Wall thickness for a given hoop stress is to be calculated in accordance with ASTM D 1998. Tanks shall be designed using a hoop stress not less than 600 psi. Wall thickness calculations shall assume that all tank contents have a specific gravity of not Tess than 1.6. G. Manufacturer shall have the capability of issuing gel test results using the method described in ASTM D 1998. The percentage gel level for Crosslink Polyethylene Tanks on the inside 1/8 -inch of the wall shall be a minimum of 60 %. H. Tank colors shall be natural. I. Fittings shall be of the following type as suitable for the service: 1. PVC Fittings shall be compression type, tank adaptors with standard National Pipe Thread to be compatible with associated plumbing. Fittings shall be made vertical on sloping tank tops as indicated. Compression type fittings are not permitted for submerged service or below the top head of the tank. 2. Bolted Fittings shall use Hastelloy bolts with internal polyethylene injection molded encapsulated heads and external flanges compatible with the chemical stored. 3. Integrally Molded Flanged Outlets (IMFO) molded as part of the tank shall be used as a drain. Coordinate any pad blockout requirements with installer. 4. Gaskets shall be crosslinked polyethylene closed cell foam material. J. The tank shall be warranted for five (5) years to be free of defects in material and workmanship. The warranty shall be prorated during the last three (3) years. Copy of warranty must be present on tank or on invoice or with instruction sheets accompanying fittings. K. Fiberglass access ladders shall be provided with the polyethylene chemical storage tanks at locations as shown. The design and fabrication shall be in accordance with Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. Use chemical duty bolts described above where anchorage to tank top or boss is required. Extend the ladder side rails 3' -6" above the top rung and provide a return bend anchored to the tank top no less than 1' -0" horizontally from the top rung. October 2000 006017.01 13416 - 3 Chemical Storage Tanks L. Connections to Polyethylene Tanks: Reducers and flexible connectors shall be used as necessary to adapt tank connection sizes to piping size shown on the Drawings. Install the connections as specified and as shown on the Drawings. M. Provide a linear polyethylene liner for increased chemical resistance. 2.02 CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK SCHEDULE Tank T -1 T -2 Fluorosilicic Fluorosilicic Service Acid Acid Volume (gals) 7,500 150 Diameter (max.) 12' 41" Height (max.) 10' -9" 48" Type Upright Upright Connections See Drawings See Drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING A. Ship tanks upright or on padded saddles. Provide all tie downs with padded slings. Provide ail shipping and other arrangements required to transport tanks to the project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install tanks in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with favorably reviewed shop drawings. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identification of the health, flammability, and reactivity of hazardous materials is required for each tank. See Specification Section 10400, Identifying Devices. 3.04 TESTING A. Notification: Provide the City Representative with five (5) working days notice prior to shop tests and two (2) working days notice prior to field tests so that the City Representative may elect to witness the testing. The Contractor shall assume that a witness test for each tank will be required. B. Shop Testing: 1. Shop test all tanks for zero leakage Submit certified shop test results to the City Representative, whether or not tests were witnessed by the City Representative. Do not ship tanks until favorable review of shop testing submittal is received. 2. Perform gel and impact tests on samples cut from each polyethylene chemical storage tank. Do not ship tanks until favorable review of gel and impact testing submittal is received. October 2000 006017 01 1 - 4 Chemical Storage Tanks C. Field Testing: Provide a 48 -hour static leak test by filling each tank with water. A passing test result shall be no leakage from the tank. If a leak is detected, the tank shall be repaired or replaced in a manner satisfactory to the City Representative. Such repairs shall be performed only by the tank manufacturer, at no additional cost to the City. After repairs, retest the tank until a passing result is achieved. Demonstrate that all tank accessories are working properly. D. Affidavits: Furnish the affidavits required in Paragraph 1.02 above. 3.05 CLEANING A. After satisfactory completion of field testing, drain the testing water. Rinse the inside with clean, potable water. Hand wipe and dry as required to leave the tank interior clean, dry and ready for storage of the chemical. Clean the tank exterior and accessories and leave in good condition. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 13416 - 5 Chemical Storage Tanks SECTION 15050 PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Provide all piping, including fittings, valves, supports, and accessories as shown on the Drawings, described in the Specifications and as required to completely interconnect all equipment with piping for complete and operable systems, including equipment drains. B. Related Sections Including Work Provided in this Section: 1. Section 02301: Earthwork 2. Section 03252: Concrete Anchors 3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications 4. Section 09960: Protective Coatings 5. Section 10400: Identifying Devices 6. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Verify by excavation, inspection and measurement all installation conditions for buried pipe before preparation of Shop Drawings. Submit field measurements and photos with Shop Drawings where exposed conditions are significantly different than indicated on the Drawings. 2. Layouts and Schematics: Submit detailed installation drawings of all piping. Schematics may be submitted for piping 4 inches and smaller. The Drawings and schematics shall include: pipe support locations and types, fittings, valves, other appurtenances. 3. Submit data to show that the following items conform to the Specification requirements: a. Pipe, fittings, and accessories. b. Fabricated pipe supports and other pipe supports as required herein. c Pipe couplings and flexible pipe pieces. d Valves and accessories. 4 Submit certified test reports as required herein and by the referenced standard specifications (Product Information). 5. Pipe, fittings and joint fabrication details for welded steel pipe (Product Review). 6. Submit procedures for welding field joints of welded steel pipe and welder qualifications (Product Review). B. Samples: 1. Solder and flux for copper pipe. C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation and operation manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists for the following items: 1. Valves 4 inches and larger and all actuated valves. October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 1 Piping, Valves and Accessories 2. Pneumatic/motorized actuators, including positioners and UP converters. Include the actuator manuals for the valves requiring them. 3. Strainers, motorized and nonmotorized. 4. Filters. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Rotameters. 4 n QUALITY ACQI PAN . 1.V3 /'1VVV1 1 VV A. Materials and equipment furnished under this Section shall be of manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the materials and equipment for a period of at least 5 years. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the materials and equipment made by the manufacturers specifically named herein, if an altemate manufacturer is proposed. B. Factory Quality Control: The Contractor shall test all products as noted herein and by the reference specifications. C. Field Quality Control: 1. The Owner will: a. Inspect field welds and test the welds if it is deemed necessary. b. Perform bacteriological analysis for pipelines to be disinfected. 2. The Contractor shall: a. Perform leakage tests. b. Be responsible for the costs of additional inspection and retesting by the Owner resulting from noncompliance. 1.04 APPURTENANCES A. Furnish i mild u iiistaII all i IecessaI y guides, inserts, ts, an nchors and assembly bolts, washers and nuts, hangers, supports, gaskets, couplings and flanges; all other appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the proper installation and operation of the piping; devices included in or on the piping equipment; and piping accessories. 1.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Piping 6 Inches and Larger: Pipe supports are shown on the Drawings for piping 6 inches and larger in diameter, where the piping is shown on layout drawings. Each pipe support used is designed to resist seismic loading except where the support is of the sliding type for thermal expansion. Other supports are provided to resist axial seismic loading of pipes designed for thermal expansion. Pipe supports that are considered seismic resistant are so noted on the pipe support detail sheets on the Drawings. The location and types of supports and braces are indicative and may be modified by the Contractor to suit field conditions, provided the modified support system conforms to the design criteria stated herein, and receives the favorable review of the Engineer. Where piping is shown schematically only, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to support all such piping in accordance with the design criteria stated herein and using support details shown on the Drawings. Pipe supports have been designed assuming flanged joints on ductile iron pipe and steel pipe, unless otherwise October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 2 Piping, Valves and Accessories indicated on the Drawings. If groove type mechanical couplings are used as an alternative, provide additional supports where required, particularly to resist rotation. Shop drawings of these additional supports shall be favorably reviewed by the Engineer prior to installation. 2. Piping Less Than 6 Inches: Pipe supports are generally not shown for piping less than 6 inches in diameter. Where supports are not shown, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to support all such piping in accordance with the design criteria stated hereinafter and the support details shown on the Drawings. Piping 2 -1/2 inches and larger and all piping for hazardous chemicals shall be supported with pipe supports designed to resist seismic loads. Hazardous chemical piping includes LPG, chlorine and chlorine solution, fuel, natural gas, hypochiorite, hydrogen peroxide, oxygen, ozone, polymer, potassium permanganate, sodium bisulfite, sulfur dioxide and sulfur dioxide solution, sulfuric acid (concentrated and solution), alum /ferric chloride (concentrated and solution), steam, compressed air, sodium hydroxide, and sludge gas. Piping smaller than 2 -1/2 inches with non - hazardous contents may be supported with non - seismic resistant supports. 3. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings, schematics, and design calculations to demonstrate that support systems that are not as shown on the Drawings are in accordance with the design criteria. 4 Where not detailed or otherwise indicated, pipe support types and spacing shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice No. SP -58 and No. SP -69, except as superseded by the requirements of these Specifications. Submit Drawings of pipe supports that are not as detailed on the Drawings. B Pipe Support System Design: 1. Design Loads: Pipe suspension shall be such as to prevent excessive stress or excessive variation in supporting force while system is in operation. Pipe supports shall support the sum of the weight of the pipe, fittings, appurtenances, and contents. In addition, the pipe shall be anchored to resist internal pressure forces tending to separate any unrestrained joint at pressures 1 -1/2 times the maximum working pressure for the applicable service. 2. Seismic Loads: Seismic loads, expressed as a percentage of the weight of the contributing length of pipe, fittings, appurtenances, and contents, are 45% in any direction within the horizontal plane of the pipe, and 23% up or down within the vertical plane of the pipe. 3. Location: All piping shall be supported in a manner, which will prevent undue strain on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible couplings, at all non -rigid joints, at hose bibbs, and where otherwise shown Where piping connects to equipment, it shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. a. Maximum support spacing shall conform to the following table Pipe Size Inches Pipe Material Maximum Spacing Feet 1" & smaller Iron or Steel 6 Copper 4-1/2 Plastic continuous Tubing continuous 1 -1/4 to 2" Iron or Steel 8 Copper or Plastic 5 October 2000 006017 01 15050 - 3 Piping, Valves and Accessories Pipe Size Inches Pipe Material Maximum Spacing Feet 1 2 -1/2 to 4" Iron or Steel 10 Copper or Plastic 6 6 to 8" Iron or Steel 12 Plastic 8 10" & larger Iron or Steel 15 b. Piping penetrations through concrete walls and slabs are considered to resist seismic loading, provided penetrations for pipes 3 inches in diameter and larger are complete with a wall flange. c. Branch piping is not considered to provide resistance to seismic forces. 4. Anchors: Anchors for connecting pipe supports to concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03252. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Pipe and valve sizes are nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted. B. Construct vents of materials specified for the pipe system for which they serve. C. All materials delivered to the job site shall be new, free from defects, and marked to identify the material, class, and other appropriate data such as thickness for piping. D. Acceptance of materials shall be subject to strength and quality testing in addition to inspection of the completed product. Acceptance of installed piping systems shall be based on inspection and leakage tests as specified hereinafter. E. Cutoff Flanges: Provide at all pipe penetrations for pipes 4 inches and greater in nominal diameter, and at all penetrations of 3 -inch and smaller nominal diameter pipe in wet or potentially wet locations as indicated on the Drawings. Cutoff flange outside diameter shall be at least a standard connection flange's outside diameter except that for pipe 30- inch - diameter and larger, nominal size, cutoff flange outside diameter may be 6 inches greater than outside pipe diameter. Cutoff flange shall be at least 1/4 -inch thick and shall be continuously welded (or cast) onto the pipe. r Conform to pipe penetration details shown on the Drawings. 2.02 GENERAL iVIATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Gaskets: Unless specifically specified otherwise, all gaskets shall be chloroprene. Use Hypalon or Viton for ozone, oxygen and H service. B. Bolts and Tie Rods: Unless specified otherwise herein, flange bolts and nuts, coupling bolts and nuts, tie rods and other hardware shall be as follows: 1. Exposed: Galvanized steel. 2. Submerged: Type 316 stainless steel, minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi. 3. Concrete Encased: Steel. 4. Buried: Type 304 stainless steel, minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi. 5. Apply an anti -seize compound to the threads of stainless steel bolts. October 2000 006017 01 15050-4 Piping, Valves and Accessories C. Flexible Sealant: Flexible sealant for pipe joints, where shown on the Drawings, shall be a two- component polysulfide, non -sag; Sikaflex 412, Dualthane, or equal. D. Fusion Epoxy Coating: AWWA C213; except application shall be by fluid bed only unless the greatest dimension of the article to be coated exceeds ten feet, in which case electrostatic spray application may be used. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping Schedule: Piping systems and their corresponding piping and valve systems are listed on Drawing G-4. Material PP Polypropylene PP(2X) Double- Contained Polypropylene PVC Polyvinyl Chloride PP(DWV) Polypropylene (Drain/WasteNent) B. Pipe Schedule Pipe material, joints and fittings shall be as summarized below. A detailed specification of each pipe type follows. (The detailed specification supersedes the schedule in case of any conflicts.) Pipe Material Field Joints Fittings Polypropylene Electrofusion PP Double- Contained Polypropylene Simultaneous Butt Weld PP (2X) PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded or Solvent Weld PVC, Schedule 40 Polypropylene, Drain/WasteNent Solvent Weld PP (DWV) C. Polypropylene Pipe: 1. Pipe: Schedule 80 conforming to dimensional requirements of ASTM D1785. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psi at 68 F. 3. Joints: Electrofusion weld, except flanged or threaded where required at equipment connections and where required on the Drawings. 4. Fittings: Electrofusion weld, socket type, of same material as the pipe. 5. Pipe Cleaner: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the schedule and size to be joined. D Polypropylene Drain/WasteNent Pipe: 1. Pipe and Fittings: Polypropylene acid resistant drain, waste, and vent pipe Schedule 40, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. a. Buried Service: ASTM D4101, PP110B, Cell Classification 63153 b. Non - Buried Service: Flame resistant, ASTM D4101, PP210B, Cell Classification 53653. Flammability shall be as determined by ASTM Test Method D635 with average burn time less than 5 seconds and average extent of burning less than 13 mm. 2. Joints: a. Buried Service: Heat fused. b. Non - Buried Service. Heat fused or mechanical. E. Double- Contained Polypropylene Pipe: October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 5 Piping, Valves and Accessories 1. Pipe: Both carrier and containment piping shall be UV stabilized co- polymer polypropylene in accordance with ASTM D4101. One -piece double- containment pipe shall be used. The carrier pipe shall be integral with the containment pipe without centralizing clips, spiders, disks, or supports. Wall thicknesses of the carrier and containment pipes shall be identical. Carrier and containment piping shall be rated for 75 psi. 2. Fittings: Molded unitary double - walled fittings constructed of UV stabilized co- polymer polypropylene in accordance with ASTM D4101. Fittings shall be rated for 75 psi. 3. Joints: Simultaneous butt weld, ASTM D2657. Flanges shall be installed at fittings and where shown on the drawings to allow for ease of assembly and /or disassembly. Flanges shall be sealed with dual O -rings to seal both the carrier and containment passages and shall provide for independent movement of fluid within the carrier and containment pipes. 4. Manufacturers: Asahi Poly Fie, or equal. F Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: 1. Pipe: Schedule 80 PVC, gray, normal impact, Type 12454 B, ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) label. 2. Joints: Solvent weld, except flanged or threaded permitted where required at equipment connections and where required on the Drawings. 3. Fittings: Solvent weld, socket type, of same material as the pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM D2466 and D2467. 4. Pipe Cleaner: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the schedule and size to be joined. 2.04 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Valve and Accessory System Designation: Most valves and accessories to be furnished and installed are identified by a valve and accessory system designated by a letter symbol in the Piping Schedule. B. General Requirements for Valves: 1. All valves of each type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2. All valves shall be furnished with operators, handwheels, levers, or other suitable type wrench including handles as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Valves 4 -inch and larger located more than 7 feet above the floor level shall be furnished with chain operators. Chains shall be galvanized and shall extend to within 3 feet of the floor Provide hook so that chain may be stored clear of walkways 3 All threaded stem valves shall open by turning the valve stem counter - clockwise. 4. All exposed valves and valve operators shall have a non - bleeding shop coat, unless otherwise specified. Buried valves and operators shall be painted as specified in Section 09960. C General Requirements for Accessories: 1 Pressure Gauges: Provide shutoff valves for all pressure gauges. Conform to additional requirements in this Section below. D. Valve and Accessory Systems: See Piping Schedule on Sheet G -4. 1. Valve and Accessory System A: Applicable Service Condition: Potable and non - potable water. October 2000 00601 7 n 1 1505n 6 Dininn in ���es and Grrncenries V I I .V 1 Ivvvv v i ry , a. Ball Valves (flanged) 1) Rating: 285 psi WOG. 2) Actuator: lever. 3) Connections: ANSI 150 lb flanged. 4) Materials: Carbon steel body and ball, Teflon packing and seats. 5) Manufacturers: Apollo 88 -100 series; Jenkins, or equal. b. Ball Valves (threaded) 1) Rating: 400 psi WOG. 2) Type: Lever. 3) Connections: Threaded. 4) Materials: Carbon steel body and ball, Teflon seats. 5) Manufacturers: Apollo 73 -100, Jenkins, or equal. c. Pressure Gauge Assembly: 1) Complete assembly shall include 3/4 -inch isolation ball valve or a gauge cock, pulsation dampeners or snubbers. Provide a support plate to the nearest flange. 2) Pressure gauges shall have a dial size not less than 4 -1/2 inches, phenolic flangeless case, bronze brushed movement, phosphor bronze or stainless steel bourdon tube, 1% accuracy, friction mounted adjustable pointer, black figures on white dial, glass or acrylic window. Label face of dial to identify unit of measurement. Complete gauge shall be U.S. Gauge 1980 Series; Trerice Series 450; or equal. 3) Gauge cocks shall be stainless steel needle valves, Trerice 865; Marsh Type 1936; or equal. 4) Pulsation dampeners and snubbers shall be stainless steel for the specific service involved, air or water, and shall be Chemquip 25B; Trerice No. 870; or equal. d. Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts No. U5B for low flows or 2235 for flows to 170 gpm; Cashco Model D for low flows or Model 8310 DS for flows to 170 gpm. e. Water Hammer Arrestors: 5 cubic inch min. volume, 'A -inch connections. Sioux Chief Hydra - Restor, Zurn Shoktrol, or equal. Provide sweat connection on installations in copper piping systems. f. Emergency Shower /Eyewash: Free - standing combination drench shower and eyewash station, Haws Model 8330. Provide a water hammer arrestor with each shower /eyewash. g. Backflow Preventer: Reduced pressure type with shutoff valves and test cocks, size as shown on the Drawings. Headloss shall not exceed 10 psi at maximum flow. CIaVaI Model RP -2 for 1-1/2-inch and smaller and RP -1 EX for 2 -inch and larger, equivalent Febco, or equal. 2. Valve and Accessory System B: Applicable Service Condition: sample water a. Ball Valves Through 4 -inch Size: 1) Rating: 150 psi at 75 °F. 2) Type: Double union. 3) Connections. Socket. 4) Materials: PVC body, teflon seats and EPDM 0-ring seals, except Viton 0-ring seals with chlorine solution. 5) Manufacturers: R&G Sloane, Asahi /America Pro Block, or equal. b. Needle Valves: 1) Rating: 150 psi at 75 °F. 2) Connections: Socket. October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 7 Piping, Valves and Accessories 3) Materials: PVC body, teflon seats and Viton 0-ring seals 4) Manufacturers: Hayward, R &G Sloane, or equal. 3. Valve and Accessory System C: Applicable Service Condition: Flourosilicic Acid a. Diaphragm Valves: 1) Rating: 150 psi. 2) Type: Weir type diaphragm. 3) Connections: Flanged or true union. 4) Materials: Polyproplyene. 5) Manufacturers: George Fisher. 6) Actuators: Handwheel, provide position indicators on all valves. b. Check Valves: 1) Rating: 150 psi. 2) Type: ball. 3) Connections: socket. 4) Materials: Polyproplyene. 5) Manufacturers: George Fisher. c. Strainers: 1) Rating: 150 psi. 2) Type: Wye -type basket strainers. Strainer screen size as recommended by feed pump supplier. 3) Connections: Threaded. 4) Materials: CPVC CHECK. 5) Manufacturers: Chemtrol, GF, or equal. 6) Installation: Each to be installed with diaphragm valve blowoff and piping to drain. d. Cam Operated Quick Connects: 1) Type: Male adapter X MPT and dust cap with overlock handles. 2) Material: Glass filled polypropylene body, teflon gaskets. 3) Working pressure: 250 psi. 4) Dimensions: MIL -C- 27487. e. Flexible Rubber Spools: 1) Type: Spherical rubber expansion joints with full rubber flanges and retainer rings. 2) Materials: Teflon TM tube, body, and cover, 316 SS retaining rings and bolts. 3) Pressure rating: 150 psi. 4) Model: Holtz Style 530, Garlock EZ -Flow or equal. f. Pressure Gauge Assembly: 1) Provide gauge and assembly as specified for System A. Pulsation dampener and snubber materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific service involved, and shall be Chemquip 25B, Trerice No. 870, or equal. g. Spray Shields: 4 -ply woven PVC fabric, 450 psi maximum pressure, hook and loop fastener with pH patch to indicate acid or alkali leaks. • E. Miscellaneous Valves and Accessories: 1 Hose Bibbs: a. Indoor: Acorn Flow -Cloz No. 8120; Chicago 387 p.c.; or equal. b Outdoor (Non- freezing type): J.R. Smith 5913; Zurn Z -1385; or equal. c. Hose Racks: Suitable for 50 feet of 3/4 -inch hose. October 2000 006017 01 15050 - 8 Piping, Valves and Accessories 2. Link -Type Seals: Link -type seals shall be interlocking synthetic rubber links connected by stainless steel, zinc dichromate protected steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous belt. Tightening of the bolts shall expand the rubber to form a watertight seal of the annular space between a pipe and the hole or sleeve in the wall. 3. Flexible Rubber Hose: a. General: At each hose rack, provide 50 feet of flexible rubber hose of the same diameter as the hose bibb. Also provide hose at other locations where shown on the Drawings. Provide each hose with nozzle, and male and female threaded connectors. Specifically design all hose to resist deterioration due to weather, sunlight, and outdoor exposure, and to hot water or chlorine solution where applicable. b. Nozzles: Provide compatible nozzles on each hose associated with a hose bibb and hose rack. Nozzles shall be brass or bronze. c. Chlorine Solution Service: Provide at all flexible hose locations where chlorine solution is handled. Provide hose designed for 150 psi working pressure, with nitrile tubing and fiber- reinforced carcass with helical wire. Provide Newtype Spec. No. N -147 by Goodall Rubber; Chlorine Diffusion Hose by American Rubber Manufacturing; or equal. 4. Valve Boxes for Buried Valves: Adjustable, cast iron, screw -type, installed with top set at finished grade. All valve boxes and covers shall be suitable for H2O AASHTO wheel load. Clow Figure F -2454 with Figure F -2476 extension; equivalent products by Mueller; or equal. 5. Valve Tags: Plastic, fiberglass, or plastic material, 2 -inch square with grommeted hole. The tags shall be attached to valves with a brass jack chain. For buried installations use a nylon strap. Lettering shall be stamped or cut into the tag at least 3/16 -inch high. 2.05 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Manufacture and Design: Pipe supports shall to the maximum extent possible be standard factory fabricated units conforming to the typical supports and braces shown in the Drawings and as specified below Where required support cannot be provided by standard factory fabricated units, and is not detailed on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide special pipe supports. Supports shall be manufactured or special fabrications or combination as shown on the Drawings or specified. Special fabrications shall be in conformance with Section 05500. Provide 3/4 -inch chamfer on corners of all support elements and file or grind smooth. Supports designated to allow axial pipe movement shall have smooth and even contact surfaces. B. Materials All support systems shall be galvanized steel except that those that are submerged or that are located within a tank, channel, or other structure designed to hold water, below the top of surrounding walkway elevation or tank wall top, or otherwise called out on the Drawings, shall be Type 304 stainless steel Trays for continuous support of plastic pipe or tubing shall be made of 20 -gauge galvanized steel. C Insulation Protection Shields: Provide insulation protection shields at all pipe supports for insulated piping. D Provide plastic caps with rounded corners on all exposed ends of channels. October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 9 Piping, Valves and Accessories PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Handling and Placing: 1. Exercise great care to prevent injury to or scoring of the pipe lining and coating, as applicable, during handling, transportation or storage. Handle fusion epoxy coated pipe in accordance with AWWA C213. Do not store pipe on rough ground and do not roll the pipe on the coating. Any damaged pipe sections, specials, or fittings shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor as satisfactory to the Engineer. 2. Carefully inspect each pipe fitting, valve and accessory before installation. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and patch all damaged areas in the field or replace to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. Place or erect all piping to accurate line and grade and backfill, support, hang, or brace against movement as specified or shown on the Drawings, or as required for proper installation. Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the pipe interior prior to installation and thoroughly clean all joints before joining. 4 Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs. Do not use bushings unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric reducing fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines. 5. Cast all metallic pipes and sleeves 6 -inch and larger into new concrete walls without blockout. Pipes 5 inches and smaller may be cast in place or installed in a smooth core drilled hole using a link type seal at the Contractor's option. Maintain at least 1/2 -inch clearance between reinforcing steel and metal pipe in penetrations. 6. Cover all plastic pipe stored outside for more than two months with canvas or other opaque material. Provide for air circuiation under the covering. B. General Buried Piping Installation: 1 Trenching, bedding, and backfill for buried piping shall be as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 02201. 2. Where pipe grade elevations are shown on the Drawings, install the pipe with straight grades between the indicated elevations. 3. where no pipe grade elevations are shown on the Drawings, install buried piping with at least 3 feet of cover to finished grade. Where piping crosses under buried electrical ducts, provide at least 4 feet 6 inches of cover. Provide 12 in minimum separation between the buried pipes and ducts. 4. Provide each pipe with a firm, uniform bearing for its full length in the trench except at field joints. Do not lay pipe in water or when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. 5. Protect buried piping against thrust by use of restrained pipe joints. All exposed free pipe ends shall be securely braced. Cap or plug pipe ends that are left for future connections as shown on the Drawings and in a manner favorably reviewed by the Engineer. 6 Where piping leaves a structure or concrete encasement, provide a joint capable of angular deflection within 12 inches of the structure. Conform to details on the Drawings. 7. Snake buried PVC pressure pipe from side to side in the trench in long sweeps. October 2000 006017 01 15n50 - 1n Piping, Valves anri Ar- Pccnriec 8. Concrete Encasements: All piping and conduits installed under slabs or footings on earth or crushed rock shall be encased in concrete not less than 6 -inch thickness on all sides and extending up to the bottom of the slab or footing, unless otherwise specifically noted on the Drawings. Encasement shall extend to within 6 inches of the first pipe joint beyond the slab or footing. This requirement for concrete encasement applies to all piping (including tubing, plumbing, and drains) and to all electrical conduits and ducts. Provide concrete encasement whether or not the encasement is shown on the Drawings. Provide encasement under slabs on earth or crushed rock even if the structure is supported on piles, caissons, or footings. Provide continuous concrete cradles where shown. 9. Do not pull bell and spigot, gasketed joints more than 50% of the maximum deflection permitted by the pipe manufacturer. 10. Coat bolts on buried flanges or other buried appurtenances in accordance with Section 09960. Wrap the appurtenance with polyethylene encasement and tape the encasement tightly closed to the pipe. C General Exposed Piping Installation: 1. Unless shown otherwise, install piping parallel to building lines, plumb and level. 2. Install piping without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner, which would set up stresses in the pipe, valves, or connected equipment. 3. Set all pipe flanges level, plumb, and aligned. All flanged fittings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in flanges shall straddle vertical centerline of pipes. 4. Flexibility and Expansion: Provide flexible couplings, flexible hose, or flexible spools for all piping connections to motor driven equipment and where otherwise shown. The Contractor may install additional flexible couplings at favorably reviewed locations to facilitate piping installation, provided that he submits complete details describing location, pipe supports, and hydraulic thrust protection. 5 Install unions or flexible connections where shown on the Drawings, and at all non - motor - driven equipment to facilitate removal of the equipment. 6 Provide valves whereever equipment drain connections are furnished and carry the discharge pipe to the nearest floor drain, drain trench or sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, install drain piping to 1 -inch above the floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform to the requirements of the system served. 7 Where piping conveying liquids passes over motor control centers, electrical panels and other electrical devices, install a protective drainage tray below the piping. 8 Double Contained Polypropylene Pipe: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 9 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. a Place PVC pipe within the installation areas at least 24 hours prior to installation to permit temperature equalization. b. Cut pipe ends squarely, ream and deburr inside and out. c Solvent Weld Joints: Clean pipe ends and sockets and join in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Make joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Handle solvent cements and primers in accordance with ASTM F402. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND ACCESSORIES October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 11 Piping, Valves and Accessories A. Install valves and accessories such that all parts are easily accessible for maintenance and operation. B. Where valve handwheels are shown on the Drawings, valve orientation shall be as shown. Where valve handwheels are not shown, orient valves to permit easy access to the handwheeis or handles and to avoid interferences. C. Install pressure gauges and thermometers in a position to permit reading them from a point approximately 5 feet above floor level. D Rigidly support pressure switches and connect them to piping and equipment using a suitable flexible linkage that will not permit transmission of vibrations from the piping or equipment to the pressure switches. E. Install a union adjacent to each screwed end valve and accessory with additional unions as necessary to facilitate removal. F. Install a shutoff valve below each pressure gauge, protective device or air valve unless otherwise specified. G. Wherever a solenoid valve is shown on the Drawings or required by the equipment supplied, it shall be electrified as required at no additional cost to the Owner. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 -inch with flexible connector at valve, and minimum wire size shall be 2412. H. Connections between ferrous and non - ferrous piping, valves, accessories or pipe supports shall be made using a dielectric coupling, union, or flange. I. Where valves or other pipeline items �s require metal petal full -f awe c.vi 11 =LA; i y fl al iycz, provide intermediate flanges if the connecting flange is not adequate. J. All insulated piping passing through walls or slabs shall be sleeved and insulation shall run continuously through the sleeves and shall allow for 1/8 -inch annular clearance between outside of insulation and sleeve wall. K. install a suitable chrome plated escutcheon of pipes passing tlir s:ai.tgh slabs or dvalls in finished areas. L. Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs. Do not use bushings unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric reducing fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines. Each piece of pipe and each fitting shall be carefully inspected to see that there is no defective workmanship on pipe, or obstructions in pipes and fittings. Anchor piping subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be evenly distributed. Sleeves for branches through walls from adjacent mains shall be of sufficient size to allow for free side motion of covered pipe in sleeves. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS A. General: October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 12 Piping Valves and Accessories 1. Install and adjust supports for each pipeline such that the pipeline is true to the indicated line and grade. 2. Locate anchors and braces for any single support on a continuous structure; that is, not on two sides of a structural expansion joint. 3. Tighten clamps to develop full friction along the pipeline except where loose fitting clamps are called for. B. Electrolytic Protection: Pipe supports serving copper pipe or tubing shall be dielectrically insulated from the pipe by dielectric sleeves or plastic pipe wrap at the point of contact. 3.04 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Identify all exposed piping in this project by painting, banding, system name labels, and direction arrows. The color and banding shall be as selected by the Engineer. Identify all buried valves with tags as specified below. B. Exposed Pipe Identification: Before painting, banding and labeling, pipes shall be identified by the Contractor with temporary wired -on cardboard tags showing the proposed marking for review by the Engineer. C. Piping: Paint all exposed pipes with the appropriate paint system as specified in Section 09960 and provide pipe markers per the schedule specified in Section 10400. D. Valves: Provide each buried valve with a valve tag identifying the pipeline contents, and either its valve number, or the area or item served by the valve for valves without a valve number. Contents shall be as designated in the Piping Schedule. 3.05 CLEANING A. Prior to testing, thoroughly clean the inside of each completed piping system of all dirt, loose scale, sand and other foreign material. Cleaning shall be by sweeping, flushing with water or blowing with compressed air, as appropriate for the size and type of pipe. Flushing shall achieve a velocity of at least 3 feet per second. The Contractor shall install temporary strainers, temporarily disconnect equipment or take other appropriate measures to protect equipment while cleaning piping. 3.06 FIELD TESTING A. General: Perform leakage tests on all pipe installed in this project. Furnish all equipment, material, personnel and supplies to perform the tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary connections. The test pressure, allowable leakage and test medium shall be as specified and as shown in the following Schedule. Test pressure shall be measured at the highest point on the line unless specifically noted otherwise. Leakage tests shall be performed on all piping at a time agreed upon and in the presence of the Engineer. • B Buried Piping: The leakage test for buried piping shall be made after all pipe is installed and backfilled. However, the Contractor may conduct preliminary tests prior to backfill. If the Contractor elects to conduct preliminary tests, provide any necessary temporary thrust restraint. October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 13 Piping, Valves and Accessories • C. Exposed Piping: All supports, anchors and blocks shall be installed prior to the leakage test. No temporary supports or blocking shall be installed for final test. D. Encased Piping: The leakage test for encased piping shall be made after all pipe is installed and encased, and before any structures are constructed above it. However, the Contractor may conduct preliminary tests prior to encasement. If the Contractor elects to conduct preliminary tests, provide any necessary temporary thrust restraint. E. Accessories: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to block off or remove equipment, valves, gauges, etc., which are not designed to withstand the full test pressure. F. Testing Apparatus: Provide pipe taps, nozzles and connections as necessary in piping to permit testing including valves to isolate the new system, addition of test media, and draining lines and disposal of water, as is necessary. These openings shall be plugged in a manner favorably reviewed by the Engineer after use. Provide all required temporary bulkheads. G. Pneumatic Testing: Piping tested by air or another gas shall show no reduction of pressure during the test period after corrections have been made for changes in temperature in conformance with the following relationship: Pf_ P T1 T Where T and T2 are the absolute temperatures of the gas in the pipe and P and P2 are the absolute pressures. The subscript "1" denotes the starting conditions and the subscript "2" denotes the final conditions. H. Precautions for Pneumatic Testing: Where air or another gas is called for as the test medium, the Contractor shall take special precautions to protect personnel. During the initial pressurization of a pipeline to the specified test pressure, personnel shall be protected by suitable barricades or shall remove themselves to locations where portions of the concrete structure itself are between them and the pipeline under test. I Correction of Defects. If leakage exceeds the allowable, the installation shall be repaired or replaced and leakage tests shall be repeated as necessary until -r _ the leakage s specified h h been fulfilled. conformance to rle leafage test requirements specified !lCICIl1 have been iea������2'...,. All visible leaks shall be repaired even if the pipeline passes the allowable leakage test. J Drying. Gas lines tested with water shall be drained and blown dry with air or oil -free nitrogen gas. K. Reports: The Contractor shall keep records of each piping test, including: 1 Description and identification of piping tested. 2. Test pressure. 3. Date of test. 4 Witnessing by Contractor and Engineer. 5 Test evaluation. October 2000 006017.01 15n5n - 14 Piping. Valves and Acressories 6. Remarks, to include such items as: a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repairs made on leaks. 7. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. - L. Venting: Where not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor may install valved "tees" at high points on piping to permit venting of air. Valves shall be capped after testing is completed. M. Testing Specifics: Piping shall be tested as indicated in the following Schedule. All other piping systems shall be tested as required for the pipe type used. Unless specified otherwise, test each system for four hours. 1. Polypropylene Pipe (single and double contained): a. Duration: 4 hours. b. Pressure: 50 psi. c. Medium: Water. d. Allowable Leakage: None. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: a. Liquid Service: 1) Duration: Four hours. 2) Pressure: 150 psi. 3) Medium: Water. 4) Allowable Leakage: None. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.01 15050 - 15 Piping, Valves and Accessories SECTION 15800 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements of Section 11001 form a part of this Section. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals required to provide complete, integrated, and operating, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems for the buildings and structures in this project. Materials and equipment to be supplied shall be new, of the best quality as specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Work Included in This Section: 1. Fans 2. Electric unit heaters 3. Ductwork. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide shop drawings and technical literature covering all equipment and accessories being furnished under this Section. The data shall include information to demonstrate compliance with all of the requirements of these Specifications. B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication and maintenance manuals, bulletins and parts lists. Furnish separate list of recommended spare parts. C. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers stating that the equipment has been properly installed and tested and each is ready for full time operation. 1 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Comply with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work specified herein. B. Permits and inspection shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these Specifications. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall: (1) be of a design and manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the equipment; and (2) be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. D. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of ducts and pipes including general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. October 2000 Heating, Ventilating 006017 01 15800 - 1 and Air Conditioning 1.04 SEISMIC PROTECTION A. Equipment specified in this Section is classified as essential for seismic protection as specified in Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CORROSION RESISTANT DUCTWORK A. Ductwork shall be either fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product Standard PS 15 -69 except where fittings are not covered, then use the geometry of SMACNA as specified above. a. The fabricating firm shall be experienced in the fabrication of FRP ductwork. b. Prior to fabrication, the fabricator shall provide certification to the Engineer from an independent testing laboratory of the following: 1) The fabricated duct will have a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 -69. 2) The fabricated duct will meet UL Standard 181. 3) The test shall be based on the same material to be used in the fabrication of the ducts. c. The resin shall be a biphenyl A polyester, that provides high chemical resistance. A certificate from the resin manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition and characteristics of the resin being used in the ductwork shall be provided by the Contractor. This certificate shall also indicate the expected resistance to acids, alkalines and organic compounds. d. The FRP ductwork shall be rated to withstand a minimum of 10 -inch water vacuum using the same safety and design factors and minimum properties of the duct materials as listed in Standard PS 15 -69. e. The FRP duct shall be flanged where required to mate with devices, equipment or to provide flanges for supporting the ducts. Provide flange gaskets to make ductwork airtight. f. All duct joints shall be of the butt type where not flanged. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual for 10 - inch W.G. negative pressure on suction sides of fans and for 10 -inch W.G. positive pressure on fan sc�+ Duct uc supports, joints access doors a fl joi distill doors a7 s. IV flanged VV VI � shall conform to the details of construction as described this manual. The plastic sheet from which the duct is fabricated shall meet ASTM D1927, specification for rigid PVC plastic sheet. The flame spread of the PVC shall be a maximum of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 -69. B. Volume Dampers: All volume dampers shall be made of material (similar to the ductwork) two gauges thicker than the duct in which the damper is located. Each damper shall have an operator with indicator handle and a locking mechanism. Damper operator shall be Young Regulator Company "Valcalox" No. 403B; Ventfabrics Inc. "Ventloc" No. 637; or equal. Volume dampers for rectangular corrosion resistant ductwork shall he of the opposed blade type with Inrking quadrants. October 2000 Heating, Ventilating nnf+n A'f f\A A GOf1f1 rt ....1 Air l�w...�:�: u...:.... 0060 17 .0 1 aovv '• and Ai Conditioning 2.02 FANS A. In -Line Centrifugal Fans: In -line centrifugal fans shall be factory fabricated assemblies having fan, fan motor, and fan housing. Fan capacities, electrical characteristics, special features and accessories shall be as indicated in the fan schedules. Where indicated, corrosion- resistant, factory applied coatings shall be "Eisenheiss," or air -dried "Heresite," applied in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. Fans shall bear the AMCA seal. Direct drive fans shall be Carnes type AMDA; Greenheck type SQD; or equal. Belt- driven fans shall be Greenheck type SQB; Peerless Electric type "Centrifan;" or equal. FAN SCHEDULE SP IN. Fan Motor Volts Remarks Fan Location CFM WG RPM Type HP Phase (See Notes) F -1 Flouridation 966 .125 1265 In -line Centrifugal 1/4 120/1 1,2,3 Building Notes: 1) Fan is controlled by wall mounted on /off switch. 2) All one phase fractional HP motors to be furnished with factory mounted disconnect switches. 3) Provide corrosion resistant coating. 2.03 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall be wall- mounted, fan forced, electric heaters Heaters shall include and three -pole disconnect switches. Provide manufacturer's wall and ceiling mounting bracket. Reznor, Q -Mark, or equal. UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE Output Throw Volts Fan Location (kW) CFM (ft.) Type Phase EH -1 Pump Room 20 1700 35 Electric Unit 480/3 Heater B. Provide a 2- stage, 24 VDC digital thermostat to control the heaters as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Protection: Fully protect all unfinished parts of the materials and equipment against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work and until final completion. All materials and equipment shall be covered while in storage and during construction in such manner that no finished surfaces shall be damaged or marred and all moving parts shall be kept perfectly clean and dry. October 2000 Heating, Ventilating 006017.01 15800 - 3 and Air Conditioning B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the best practice of the several trades and with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. All sheet metal ductwork shall be erected in a first class and workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the "Low Pressure Duct Standards" of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., and as specified above. No ductwork shall be fabricated or installed until it has been carefully coordinated with other trades. All transverse duct joints shall be taped airtight. Duct dimensions shown are "net" inside clear. Each air supply outlet and each air return or outside air intake shall have either an integral volume control device or shall be furnished with a volume damper. D. Testing and Adjusting Equipment and Controls: 1. The equipment and controls of this Section shall be completely tested, adjusted and placed in operating condition. 2. Retest equipment and controls, as necessary, during the progress of the work. No work shall be covered until it is properly tested and made tight. 3. Supply the testing apparatus and make all necessary connections for applying the tests. 4. When about to turn the apparatus over to the Owner, put all parts of the apparatus in perfect working order and thoroughly clean out all parts of the equipment. END OF SECTION October 2000 Heating, Ventilating nnRn ni ,Conn __� A:. /'��_J.1:__:__ VVVV i i V IJOVV — and All Conditioning SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for electrical work. a. Systems Descriptions b. Area classifications c. Submittals d. Records e. Coordination B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. General Conditions. 2. Division 1 - General Technical Requirements. 3. Division 2 - Site Work. 4. Division 3 - Concrete. 5. Division 11 - Equipment. 6. Division 13 - Special Construction. 7. Division 15 - Mechanical. 8. Division 17 – Field Instruments C. Installation of systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination drawings. 1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS A. Provide the labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install, and place into operation the power, lighting, instrumentation, control, alarm, and associated electrical systems of this Contract. B. Provide functioning systems in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, performance requirements specified or indicated, and modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawings and field coordinated drawings. C. Connect motors, instrumentation, controls, meters, and any other electrical device installed or provided as part of the project. D. Provide complete 480Y/277, and 120/240 volt power distribution systems including raceways, wiring, and power supply to equipment: November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017.01 16010 -1 Requirements E. Provide complete interior lighting system including all lighting equipment, raceways, wiring, and switching equipment: F. Provide complete building exterior lighting system including all lighting fixtures, raceways, wiring, photoelectric and switching equipment: G Test, adjust and calibrate equipment a nd s tart- u p all electrical equipment, V. 1 eSl, tUf UJl anU %aiiui atec ca � icy a and start-up all electrical c � w� � i equipment, and its associated mechanist attachments as necessary to place the project into operation. H. Mark and identify circuits, equipment, and enclosures with wire numbers, nameplates, and warning signs. 1.4 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A. Areas of the project are classified as "damp" or "wet" in accordance with Article 100 - Definitions of the NEC. Additional areas are also classified as wet or damp as listed below. 1. The following shall be considered a damp location. a. Interior of the fluoride building. B. Areas of the project may also be classified as corrosive. Corrosive areas are generally indicated on the drawings and /or noted in these specifications.: 1. Corrosive areas are those areas where equipment or devices will be exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents that have a deteriorating effect on the device or equipment. 2. The following shall be considered Corrosive Locations: a. Interior of the fluoride building. 3. Corrosive areas may also be considered wet and /or damp. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Outdoor Areas: 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally exposed to wind, dust, rain, snow, or similar natural environmental conditions. B. Indoor Areas: 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally protected from wind, dust, rain, snow, and similar natural environmental conditions. C. Shop Fabricated: 1. Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a NRTL test procedure has not been established. D. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. E. NEC: National Electrical Code November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017.01 16010 -2 Requirements 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When a specific code or standard has not been cited, the applicable codes and standards of the following code - making authorities and standards organizations apply: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES). 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 10. Joint Industrial Council (JIC). 11. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI). 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 14. Occupational, Health and Safety Administration (OSHA). 15. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, standards, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, drawings and specifications, or within either document itself, the more stringent condition governs. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01330. B. Make submittals as soon as practicable after the date of notice to proceed, but prior to purchase, fabrication, or installation of materials or equipment. Make submittals as a single package, with proposed products and materials grouped according to the sections specified in Division 16. C. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's product technical data, including, but not limited to: a Identification of the manufacturer. b. Manufacturer's product descriptive bulletin. c. Current, voltage, nameplate, Toad, impedance, and other electrical data pertinent to the Project and necessary to assure compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. d Equipment dimensions. D Shop Drawings Submit Shop Drawings containing detailed drawings, diagrams and instructions for installing, operating and maintaining the material and equipment proposed for installation in the electrical work. 1 See individual Division 16 sections for specific requirements. 2. Prior to submittal, coordinate the electrical equipment (particularly motor control equipment, control panels, and instrumentation) and materials, with other applicable equipment and systems of the contract documents, particularly process equipment and systems. Any modifications to the electrical equipment November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -3 Requirements or other equipment, due to the use or submittal of process or other equipment which is different from that specified, shall be reflected in the submittal of the electrical equipment so affected. a. Where electrical equipment submitted by the contractor is a different size than the scaled dimensions shown on the plan, section or elevation drawings of the Contract Documents, or requires clearance for ventilation (or other reasons), the Contractor shall mark and submit copies of the Contract Documents showing the actual size of the proposed equipment and its placement drawn to scale in red pencil on the copies. b. Where equipment dimensions, layout, conduit routing, or conductor and conduit quantities, sizes or types are required to be different than indicated on the contract drawings to accommodate the submitted equipment, the submittal shall clearly indicate the required changes (increased sizes, ratings of equipment or devices) and shall note that they are being provided to accommodate the submitted equipment without additional cost. The submittal shall indicate increased ratings, sizes. 3. Provide technical drawings as follows. Provide diagrams and drawings similar to the Contract Drawings and named in a similar fashion for all technical drawings submittals. Use diagrams and symbols shop drawings which conform to Joint Industry Conference (JIC) Electrical Standards for Industrial Equipment and /or NEMA, Industrial Control Systems, ANSI, and IEEE standards, latest revisions. Prepare drawings on size A, B or D sheets in a format similar to the Contract Documents or other nationally recognized drawing standard. a Provide electrical elementary wiring diagrams for the electrical control systems showing the wiring of electrical control items, such as starters, control systems, interlocks, switches, programmable controllers, microprocessor controllers, and relays. b Provide scaled and dimensioned panel or enclosure face layout drawing; panel / material of construction, dimensions, and weight; conduit and wiring access locations; and material wiring and terminal block drawings for each control panel. c. Provide schematic interconnection diagrams and /or Process Instrumentation Drawings (PID) diagrams for each separate control system or control panel. Each control diagram shall show a schematic representation of process equipment and locations of switches, meters, automatic valves, and indicators, controllers ar !4.! recorders. J. L Cl11 CC:C operating Se l!!1 IL A j. � cSr 1G.1 r cl1 IC�C3 for each control instrument shall be marked on these diagrams. E. Clearly indicate on submittals that equipment or material is NRTL listed or is constructed utilizing listed or recognized components. Where a NRTL standard has not been established clearly identify that no NRTL standard exists for that equipment. F. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See specific sections for information specific to each type of equipment which is to be included in O &M manuals. 2 Manuals for the electrical system consist of 3 -post, expandable metal hinge binders labeled with the job name and the Contractor's name with tab dividers for each major type of equipment. a. Provide manufacturer's installation, operation, maintenance, and service information for each item of equipment furnished under Division 16. November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -4 Requirements b. Assemble and index each section listing the contents individually on the tab divider for that section. c. Compile a spare parts list and a suppliers index for each section and assemble in the section provided. d. Assemble records of tests, measurements, and calibration settings made for each device. Provide Record ( "As Built ") Drawings of the work upon completion of the work. Fold, punch, and insert these records into the manual after they are reviewed by the Engineer. 3. Provide preliminary manuals to the Engineer for review in the quantities indicated in Division 1 no later than when the electrical equipment is shipped to the job site. Drawings and Bill of Materials included in preliminary manuals shall show "as shipped" wiring and components. Provide final manuals with Record Drawings of the work upon completion of the work, folded and punched for insertion into the manual after they are reviewed by the Engineer. 1.8 RECORDS A. Maintain and annotate on the job at all times a separate set of Record Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions. Show changes from the Contract Documents plan drawings including: routing of hidden raceways, stubouts, actual fixture and equipment locations, equipment sizes and dimensions and building outline changes. At the end of the project, forward to the Engineer a complete set of drawings marked in red pencil in a manner consistent with the Contract Drawings, indicating the changes made on the job. B. Equipment furnished under this Contract for use on future work and all concealed materials, including conduits, shall be dimensioned, on the record drawings, from visible and permanent building features. C Record voltage, current, and megohmeter and ground ohmer resistance test measurements made on the electrical work, the trip units, fuses, and overload relay elements installed in the equipment. Record the setting of all pressure, flow, level, and similar instrumentation and control devices. When the project is operating, turn over these records to the Engineer. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and schedule connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies B. Coordinate the interruption of electrical systems to any part of the facility in use by the Owner at least 48 hours before interruption of the system. C. Coordinate the cutting of existing structures with the new and existing electrical systems. Identify, locate, and protect existing embedded conduits where cutting of existing structures is to be performed. D. Coordinate the electrical work with the requirements of equipment provided under other Divisions. Portions of the electrical design are based upon the equipment specified in other Divisions. November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -5 Requirements E. Where modifications to the specified electrical system or systems are required to accommodate actual electrical requirements of equipment which is specified under other Divisions of the Contract but which has electrical requirements different from those specified for the equipment, make modifications to the electrical system or systems required to accommodate the equipment. F. Where changes in the work, or substitutions in material or equipment specified under this Division are proposed, ensure that sizes, weights, openings, etc., are provided that do not require changes in the work outside this Division. If changes to work outside this Division are required to accommodate substitutions or changes proposed by the Contractor, submit complete descriptions of these changes for approval by the Engineer, and pay for all such changes. No additional payment or "extras" are allowed for changes required to accommodate substitutions or changes proposed by the Contractor. G. Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades: 1. Arrange for the building in of equipment during structure construction. 2. Where equipment cannot be built -in during construction, arrange for sleeves, box -outs, openings, etc., as required to allow installation of equipment after structure construction is complete. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 01600. B. Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for storage - either inside or on top of enclosures. C. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment from defacing D. Repair, restore, or replace damaged, corroded and rejected items at no additional cost to the Owner PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 .1 ACCEPTABLE MA IE Ar'TI RERS �.. t mss L.t r? t.)I..L. txt r - e t.tsat r asa t sat stmt �v A. Refer to individual Division 16 sections. 1 Provide equipment, which is of a similar type, made by one manufacturer throughout the project unless otherwise noted in the Specifications. B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640 2.2 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide new materials and equipment which are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide similar items of equipment of the same manufacturer and quality. Where systems are specified, provide components of the system from one manufacturer. November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -6 Requirements B. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Drawings or Specifications to establish quality standards and basics of design: 1. Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal equipment may be acceptable. 2. If no other manufacturer is listed then any manufacturer of equal equipment may be acceptable. C. Provide material or equipment approved and labeled for the purpose for which it is to be used by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. 1. Where NRTL test procedures have been established for the product type, provide electrical equipment approved under that procedure and bearing the NRTL label. 2. When equipment is shop fabricated for the Project, use electrical devices and enclosures which are NRTL listed and labeled or recognized. D. Where voltage, current, power, temperature or other ratings are specified that do not correspond to standard ratings of the manufacturer selected by the Contractor, furnish the next rating level which increases the capacity of the device or material in question. E. Furnish materials, devices, equipment or supplies of materials that are inherently non - corrosive or are coated or covered in a manner, acceptable to the Engineer, which renders them non - corrosive. Do not provide materials which contain polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos or other hazardous or detrimental materials. Do not install materials in a manner, location or construction that produces galvanic action or any other materials corroding or eroding action. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth or concrete. Material that may cause rusting or streaking on a building surface shall not be used. F. Fabricate equipment or devices in the field equivalent in every respect to manufactured items used for the same purpose. Where cutting, drilling, grinding, or similar actions are performed on galvanized or painted metal, regalvanize or repaint, respectively, to match original finish. G. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Drawings or Specifications to establish quality standards and basics of design: 1. Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal equipment may be acceptable. 2. If no other manufacturer is listed then any manufacturer of equal equipment may be acceptable. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits, licenses, and inspections. November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -7 Requirements S. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, and applicable state and local regulations and ordinances. D. Equipment Dimencinnc and Clearances: 1. Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and dimensions indicated for the installation of electrical equipment are restrictive dimensions. Verify that equipment will fit within the indicated locations and spaces. Do not use equipment that exceeds the indicated dimensions: a. Except as approved in writing by the Engineer. 2. Do not use equipment or arrangements of equipment that reduce required clearances or exceed the space allocation. E. Equipment Access: 1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance. 2. Access to equipment shall not be blocked or concealed by conduits, supporting devices, boxes, or other items. 3. Do not install electrical equipment such that it interferes with normal maintenance requirements of other equipment. F. Equipment shall be installed plumb, square and true with the building construction and shall be securely fastened. G. Do not provide materials which contain polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos or other hazardous or detrimental materials. H. Do not install materials in a manner, location or construction that produces galvanic action or any other materials corroding or eroding action. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth or concrete. Outdoor wall- mounted equipment and indoor equipment mounted on earth or water bearing walls shall be provided with corrosion - resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between the equipment and the wall. Outdoor wall- mounted equipment and indoor equipment mounted on earth or water bearing walls shall be provided with corrosion- resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between the equipment and lle wa !- t tC wall. I. Screen or seal all openings into equipment to prevent the entrance of moisture, rodents and insects. J. Drawings indicate the approximate location and arrangement of electrical equipment and the approximate location of other equipment requiring electrical work. The general arrangement of a��elboards outlets and other equipment is diagrammatic 9 g p s y .., p and approximate as to locations. To avoid interference with structural members and equipment of other trades, it may be necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment. Where minor changes are required because of structural or finish conditions or for the convenience of the Owner, provide such changes without additional expense to the Owner. Unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may, at his discretion, make minor adjustments in equipment location November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017.01 16010 -8 Requirements without obtaining the Engineer's approval. Minor adjustments are defined as a distance not to exceed: 1. 1 FT at grade, floor and roof level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 2. 1 FT for equipment other than lighting at ceiling level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 3. 1 FT for lighting fixtures at ceiling level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 4. 1 FT on walls in a horizontal direction within the vertical plane. 5 Changes in equipment location exceeding those defined above require the Engineer's approval. 6. Particular attention shall be paid to door swings, piping, radiation, ductwork, and structural steel: a In general, waste and vent lines and large pipe mains and ductwork shall be given priority for the locations and space shown. b. Electrical lighting fixtures shall, in general, be given priority for ceiling space. c. No additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced outlets, wiring, or equipment. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Section 01650. B Provide assistance to the Engineer during the demonstration of equipment by operating devices and equipment, opening enclosures for inspection, checking record drawing information, and similar tasks, as necessary to verify all work provided END OF SECTION November 2000 Basic Electrical 006017 01 16010 -9 Requirements SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1 Supporting devices for electrical components 2. Electrical identification. 3. Electrical demolition. 4. Cutting and patching 5. Cleaning and finish touchup painting. 6. Testing 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item below according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, or equal, to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B. Comply with NEC for components and installation C. Listing and Labeling. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications. A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Accurately locate panelboards, outlets, switches, control stations and similar devices with respect to equipment, doors, partitions, cabinets and the finished work of others. November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017.01 16050 -1 and Methods Verify dimensions and locations with the architectural, civil, structural, mechanical, and processDrawings, shop drawings /suppliers and trades. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for electrical installations. Obtain approval from structural Engineer for penetration (drilling, cutting, shooting, punching) of structural components prior to penetrating the component. C. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connecting electrical circuits to components furnished under other Divisions. F. Coordinate and schedule connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. G Coordinate work under this DIVISION with work under other Divisions, and cooperate in locating equipment to avoid interference with work of others, and plan this work to harmonize with the work of other trades so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible. Coordinate the installing of built -in work, attaching items to buildings and cutting and patching. No extras are allowed because of moving work required to avoid interference with work of other Contractors. H Coordinate the locatio of m otors s p c onn e ctio ns a nd other points of connection with the equipment manufacturers or vendors prior to conduit installation, and route circuits to the actual connection point. Remove and reinstall conduit, outlet boxes and other electrical connections, even if removal and reinstallation of building materials is necessary, where electrical connections are not made to the appropriate equipment location. I. Coordinate installing electrical identification after co of finishing where identification is applied to field- finished surfaces PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and fasteners for secure support of electrical components. 1. Material. a. Outdoors, Wet and Damp locations Hot -dip galvanized steel, or stainless steel. b. Corrosive areas: PVC coated steel c. Other locations: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc coating, cadmium plating, or with treatment of equivalent November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017 01 16050 -2 and Methods corrosion resistance using approved alternative finish or inherent material characteristics. B. Conduit clamps: one hole or beam clamps 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: cast iron clamps with cast iron "foot ". 2. EMT: stamped steel damps C. Anchors: cadmium plated or galvanized steel in dry areas; stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized steel in corrosive, damp or wet areas. 1. lag screws or Type A tapping screws for wood. 2. Rockwell "well -nut" for Tight loads in masonry. 3. thru -bolt with fender washers for heavy loads in masonry. 4. toggle bolts with springhead for hollow partitions. 5. self drilling anchors with threaded studs for concrete. 6. clamps or U -bolts for structural steel. 7 self drilling anchors with extension rods for hollow tile over concrete. 8. hanger rods: 1/4 -inch diameter or larger threaded steel, except as otherwise indicated. D Sleeves: 1. PVC, schedule 40. 2 0 0276 -inch or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed with welded longitudinal joint. 3 ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 4 Cast iron, with weep rings. 2.2 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures for Use with Electrical Equipment: 1 Provide NEMA enclosure types as indicated on the contract documents. Where the enclosure type is not indicated on the contract documents provide enclosures as follows. 2 NEMA 12: Use in unclassified (non- hazardous and non - corrosive) indoor locations which are neither wet nor damp 3. NEMA 3R: Use with HVAC equipment in wet or outdoor locations. 4. NEMA 4: a. Use in unclassified wet indoor locations. b Use in unclassified outdoor locations except with HVAC equipment. 5. NEMA 4X: Use in all corrosive locations. 6. Standards. a. NEMA ICS -6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. b. UL 508, Rainproof Enclosures. c. UL 698, Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous Locations. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for a specified application, selection is Contractor's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13 1, NEC and these Specifications. November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017 01 16050 -3 and Methods B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self- adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide. C. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright - colored, continuous- printed, vinyl tape with the following features: 1. Size: Not Tess than 4 mils thick by 6 inches wide. a. Compounded for permanent direct - burial service. D. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl - cloth, self- adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. Color- Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self - locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. F Engraved, Plastic- Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched for mechanical fasteners 1/16 -inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face. G. Fasteners for Plastic- Laminated and Metal Signs: Self- tapping stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2 4 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment finish. B. For Non - equipment Surfaces Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish. C. For Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner employing workmen skilled in the particular trade and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and industry standards Maintain adequate supervision of the work by a person in charge at the site during any time that work under this division is in process or when necessary for coordination with other work. B. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated. Mount enclosures for individual units at fifty -four inches above floors to centerline of controls. C. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated. November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017 01 16050 -4 and Methods D. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. E. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware to the building structure. Attach enclosures with a minimum of three fasteners, and more if the manufacturer so recommends. 1. Attach enclosures mounted on equipment with machine screws or clamps as required. Do not drill equipment frames or sheets without permission of supplier /manufacturer or the Engineer. 2. Stand equipment off wall surfaces a minimum of one - quarter inch where enclosures are mounted on walls in wet areas (outdoors, below grades, etc.) with neoprene or plastic shim washers. 3. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or any other items. 4. Select fasteners so the Toad applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof -test load. F. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. G. Sleeves: Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except where core - drilled holes are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. H. Install concrete pads and bases according to requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." I. Make all penetrations of electrical work through walls and roofs water and weather - tight. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials, or stainless steel materials, and system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements: 1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing supports. 2. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 3. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. 4. Spare Capacity: Size supports for multiple conduits so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017.01 16050 -5 and Methods 5. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or clamps. 6. In vertical runs, arrange support so the Toad produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight Toad on raceway terminals. 7. Use double nuts or jam nuts with regular nuts on threaded rods and bolts. 8. Trim rod ends to within 1/4 inch after installation of last nut, clamp or similar hardware. D. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports: 1. Use supports as detailed on the Drawings and as specified: a. Where not detailed on the Drawings or specified, use supports and anchoring devices rated for the equipment Toad and as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Base rating and size of supports and anchoring devices on dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals. 3. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 4. Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. E Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment: 1 Floor- mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 4 IN high concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab. F Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. G Miscellaneous Supports. Install metal structure fabricated of structural shapes for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength. H. Support raceway, equipment, and devices from framing members or structure with sufficient clearance for maintaining and servicing. Provide backing plates, and /or framing material to support equipment, devices and materials which are located between the framing members which are part of the building or facility structure. I. Cable supports - provide cable ties and straps for clamping, tying, securing and banding wires and cables in all junction boxes, panelboards and terminal cabinets. Support each circuit independently; group phases of three phase circuits. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project. November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017 01 16050 -6 and Methods C. Self- Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. D. Tag or label power circuits for future connection and circuits in raceways and enclosures with other circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull box, junction box, and outlet box. Color coding may be used for voltage and phase indication. E. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above power and communication lines. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, use a single line marker. F. Provide engraved phenolic name plates (white with black background) on equipment enclosures giving the name and circuit identification of the enclosed device /equipment in one - quarter inch letters. G. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. H. Provide electrical danger, caution, warning or safety instruction signs in accordance with Section 10400. 3.4 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide temporary power to existing branch circuit panels, branch circuits, and /or directly to electrical devices as required to keep all portions of the existing facility, which are occupied by the Owner, or required for facility operation, in operation at all times. Obtain approval by all appropriate code authorities, including the Department of Labor & Industries Electrical Inspection Department, for any temporary connections provided. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. B. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. 3.6 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Clean dirt and debris from all surfaces. Thoroughly vacuum the interior of enclosures to remove dirt and debris. B. Replace nameplates damaged during installation. C. Apply touch -up paint as required to repair scratches, etc. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. Follow November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017.01 16050 -7 and Methods paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3.7 TESTING A. Test electrical equipment after installation but before it is energized and placed in service. Report all test results in writing. Where tests disclose a defect in the work, L 4 add ;t; 4 44.x. Owner d 4.-..4 4.•. i 44... rework or repair worn al no aadd;t; -3,J110. cn fJC� 10V w the vvv� �c� and retest w �. ^vi n it m the rework or repair until retesting confirms that the defect has been corrected. Test in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and testing instructions and the applicable electrical standards (i.e., NEMA, IEEE, ISA, ANSI, or other) for the class of equipment. 1. Test the equipment and electrical circuits for proper connection, continuity, and absence of undesirable shorts and grounds. Test wire and cable installation, when complete and seventy -two hours prior to energization of the system. Check for continuity, visual damage, marking, and proper phase sequence before performing insulation testing. 2. Megger equipment bus work, switches, breakers and circuits phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground disconnecting and reconnecting equipment which cannot be meggered as required. The minimum acceptable steady -state value is 50 megohms. Record ambient temperature and humidity during testing. 3 Test operation, calibration, and settings of the meters, relays and indicating devices. 4. Test all operating controls for proper operation. 5. Test auxiliary equipment, i.e., heaters, thermostats, lights, and illuminated indicating devices and lamps, and audible alarm devices which are an integral part of equipment to verify that they function properly. 6. Adjust installed equipment for proper operation of all electrical and mechanical components. 7. Take load readings on each panelboard after loads are connected. Record these measurements to give the maximum reading for each phase and neutral obtained with lighting, appliances, motors, and other loads, connected to the panels in service. 8. Check fuses with an ohmmeter; Ring out wiring and busing; Check operation of control and safety interlocks; Check grounding of potential transformers, current trnncfnrmerc lightning anri ci irgP arractarc' (he rnntrnl r nnnertinnc nt terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. 9. Test motor driven equipment motors before energization. Insulation test shall consist of megohmeter chck phase —to— ground, per IEEE Standard 43 or manufacturer's recommendations. a. Perform Toad tests of each motor showing the following 1) Nameplate Ratings (horsepower), (speed), (voltage), (phase), (ampere rating of motor at full load). 2) Measured Load in amperes on each phase b. Perform Toad tests for each pump /blower motor 1) Note the operating conditions at the time of the test. 2) Note the suction and discharge conditions (pressure, temperature, • humidity, where such conditions affect load). 10 After installation, all equipment shall be tested as recommended by the manufacturer November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017.01 16050 -8 and Methods B. Demonstrate to the Owner that the electrical installation is working by operating all electrical systems and equipment. Simulate control and emergency conditions, artificially where necessary, for complete system tests. C. Rework or repair equipment which performs unsatisfactorily during or as a result of testing at no additional expense to the Owner. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and retest: 1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it with products which conform with Contract Documents. 2. Continue remedial measures and retests until satisfactory results are obtained. 3. Remedial measures and retests will be done at no cost to the Owner. D. Additional testing requirements specific to other sections are specified in those sections. E. Testing shall be performed by a person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. END OF SECTION November 2000 Basic Electrical Materials 006017 01 16050 -9 and Methods SECTION 16060 GROUNDING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for grounding conductors 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1 Field tests and observation reports certified by the testing organization and indicating and interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA, or equal, to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B Comply with NEC. C Comply with UL 467 D Listing and Labeling. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. November 2000 006017 01 16060 -1 Grounding PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with Division 16 Section 'Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. C. Grounding- Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable, bare or varnish coated. D. Ground Rods: 3/4 inch diameter, 10 foot long, copper clad steel. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Pressure Connectors: High- conductivity - plated units. B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy -duty type. C Exothermic - Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. Burndy, Thermoweld, or Cadweld. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. 1 Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below. a. Service and Feeders. 1) Bond the conductor full size to the equipment to which the circuit connects and to the raceway if it is metallic. b. Single -phase motor or appliance branch circuits c. Three -phase motor or appliance branch circuits. d. Flexible raceway runs 2. Nonmetallic Raceways Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. Bond the conductor at each end to grounded metallic raceway or equipment. B. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph 250 -30. November 2000 006017 01 16060 -2 Grounding 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. B. Ground the secondary electrical system to the building structure, metallic piping system and supplemental grounding electrodes. Coordinate grounding connections made to the water system with the mechanical work and install bonding jumpers wherever deemed necessary. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1 Use electroplated or hot - tin - coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B Exothermic - Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Acceptable manufacturers are Burndy, Thermoweld, or Cadweld. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions Clean all varnish, oxide, scale, concrete, etc. from conductors before firing joints. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding -Wire Terminations Make the grounding conductor connections to motors or equipment ten horsepower and above, or twenty amperes and above, with conductor termination and a 5/16 inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing Ground connection to smaller motors and equipment may be made by fastening the conductor termination to a connection box. D Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a metallic, insulating grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated E Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. November 2000 006017.01 16060 -3 Grounding 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Testing Agency: Engage an independent electrical testing organization to perform tests described below. B. Tests: 1. Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at the fluoride building main disconnect enclos g termi Me g ro u nd re n ot main disconnect enclosure grounding VII terminal. Measure V 1 ground resistance not Tess than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2 -point method according to IEEE 81. 2. Equipment grounding connections shall be checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer with a Biddle ground ohmmeter. C. Maximum grounding resistance values are as follows: 1. Main Service (grounding electrode): 3 ohms. D. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer. Check connections of affected equipment and conductors. Replace, repair, or correct defective connections or conductors. Provide additional ground rods where the grounding electrode resistance is greater than specified. Revise and retest until resistance is within specifications. E. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. END OF SECTION November 2000 006017.01 16060 -4 Grounding SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full- member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor Person currently certified by NETA, or equal, to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7 C. Comply with NEC. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES A. UL- listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. B. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5. C Cross - Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 7. D. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 8. November 2000 006017.01 16120 -1 Conductors and Cables E. Conductor Material: Copper. F. Stranding: 1. Class B for power applications. 2. Class C for control applications. G. Size and Type: 1. Solid or stranded conductor for No. 10 AW ll G and smaller its; 1. Solid or stranded VV1144VLVI IVI IYV. 10 !lY �5 and allla gauge power circuits; 2. Stranded conductor for larger gauge than No. 10 AWG power circuits. 3 Stranded conductors for control circuits. 4. Grounding conductors: solid conductor in sizes No. 6 AWG and smaller gauge; stranded in No. 4 AWG and larger gauge. H. Cords. Type SO, size #14 or larger. 2.2 INSTRUMENTATION AND SPECIALTY WIRE A. Low voltage instrument wire: 600 volt rated, multi- conductor cable with overall neoprene or PVC jacket. Individual conductors PVC or polyethylene insulated, with or without nylon overcoat. 1. Unshielded instrument cable Beldon 9486 (18 gauge), 9488 (14 gauge) or equal, Alpha or NEC. 2 Shielded single pair instrument wire (2/C #18) Beldon 9341 or equal, Alpha or NEC. 3. Shielded three conductor instrument wire (3/C #18) Beldon 1121A or equal, Alpha or NEC. 4. Shielded multi -pair ( #18 gauge) instrument wire equal to Beldon 1048 (2 pair), 1049 (4 pair), 1050 (8 pair), 1051 (12 pair) or equal, Alpha or NEC. B. Specialty wire: As specified in the section describing the system it serves. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Provide UL- listed, factory- fabricated wiring connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. B. Conductor Taps. 1. Solid Conductors size 18 through 10 AWG: Twist on insulated spring connectors. 2. Stranded Conductors size 18 through 6 AWG: insulated, solid barrel, crimp type plated copper alloy connectors 3 Conductors size 4 AWG and larger: plated copper alloy compression splicing sleeves installed by high pressure compression tools and insulated with heat shrink Raychem sleeves. 4. Outdoors or wet areas wire splice kits, epoxy resin, hardener, and mold. 3M Scotchcast or equal. C. Terminations: suitable for 75 degree Celsius rated copper conductor. 1. Service and feeder circuits: compression indent barrel connectors with one or two hole spade lug ends. 2. Conductor size 18 through 10 AWG: insulated, solid copper barrel, crimp type, plated copper alloy spade tongue or post terminal, made for the wire size and November 2000 006017 01 16120 -2 Conductors and Cables terminal on which they are installed and crimped with an approved piier or tool for the connector. 3. Conductor size 8 AWG and larger: compression, indent, solid copper barrel, one or two hole lugs. D. Motor connections: insulated, solid barrel, crimp type, ring tongue plated copper alloy. 2.4 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Fillers: Scotchfill, or equal. B. Tape: 7 mil vinyl plastic tape, Scotch 33 +, or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Type USE /RHW /RHH, in raceway. B. Branch circuits Type USE /RHW /RHH, in raceway. Type THHN/THWN may be used for 120 volt lighting and receptacle branch circuits in sizes #12 AWG and #10 AWG. C Grounding Conductors (other than equipment grounding conductors): bare copper with varnish coat. D Equipment Grounding Conductors: Same type insulation and conductor as the circuit conductors supplying the equipment to be grounded. E Class 1 and 2 Control Circuits Type MTW/THWN, size #14 AWG or larger, in raceway F. Instrumentation Circuits: Shielded or unshielded instrument cable, as indicated on the Contract Documents. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wires and cables in raceway system, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", after raceway system is complete, and following "Examination" article of this section. B. Provide individual neutral conductors for each circuit. Common neutral conductors for multi branch circuits are not permitted unless specifically shown on the drawings. November 2000 006017 01 16120 -3 Conductors and Cables C. install service, feeder, and motor circuits continuously without splices from equipment terminal to equipment terminal or motor lead. 120 and 277 volt single phase branch circuits may be spliced at taps. Do not splice circuits at other locations without written permission from the Engineer. D. Install instrumentation and control circuits continuously except for termination on terminal strips in control panels or terminal cabinets. E. Color code conductors as follows: 1. Grounding conductors: Green. 2. 480/277 volt, three phase systems: a. Phase A - brown b. Phase B - orange c. Phase C - yellow d. Neutral - gray 3 208Y/120 or 240/120 volt delta, three phase systems: a. Phase A - black b. Phase B - red (208 volt), orange (240 volt, high leg) c. Phase C - blue d. Neutral - white 4. 240/120 volt, single phase systems: a. Phase A - black b. Phase B - red c. Neutral - white 5 Use wire with insulation of required color for conductors of #8 AWG and smaller. For wire larger than No.8 AWG which is not available in specified colors, use self - adhesive, wrap- around cloth type markers of solid colors to code the conductors. When conductors are marked in this manner, mark each conductor at all accessible locations such as panelboards, junction boxes, pullboxes, auxiliary gutters, outlets, switches, and control centers. 6. Do not use white or green color for any power, lighting, or control conductor not intended for neutral or grounding purposes. a. low voltage control circuits, or 18 AWG or smaller control conductors, may use green or white singly or as part of a trace color in addition to the base color. 7 use control w irin g of co lor s different th power wiring nr si unnlied with a trac_P of color in addition to the basic color of the insulation. Use the same color scheme throughout a given system for any control or signal wires performing the same function. 8. Connect circuit conductors of the same color to the same phase throughout the installation. Viewing all equipment from the front, make connections so phase color sequence is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, motor • control centers, etc. F Install wiring to equipment neutral and grounding blocks on the bottom or furthest back row first. Leave unconnected blocks accessible for future neutral or grounding connections. G. Leave six inches or more of free conductor at each connected device or equipment terminal and nine inches of free conductors at each unconnected outlet. Tape free ends of conductors at unconnected outlets and coil neatly in outlet box. November 2000 006017.01 16120 -4 Conductors and Cables H. Install wires neatly in enclosures. Bend or form wires in neat runs from conduits to terminals. Arrange wires so that they may be grouped by conduit or function in the enclosure. Install cable ties and straps to support and bundle wires in enclosures. Arrange wires to allow wire tags and numbers to be easily read without bending or flexing wiring. I. Install grounding conductors in non - metallic raceways, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. J. Pulling Conductors: 1. Make all cable pulls by hand. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire /cable grips, or wrapping extra conductor into an eye, that will not damage cables or raceway. 2 Use manufacturer - approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Install puliboxes where necessary to prevent exceeding manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cut cable or conductor ends off after pulling and clean all lubricant and /or pulling compound from conductors before terminating. K. Identify wires and cables according to Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1 At each connection, except at motors, tag for phase rotation. 2 At each motor tag for winding lead numbers Make all phase rotation changes for motor direction changes at the motor to maintain correct color phase sequence in equipment. 3. In each enclosure or box where more than one ungrounded power conductor is spliced or connected, tag for panelboard identification and pole number. 3 4 CONNECTIONS A. Use the proper high pressure compression tool for terminating indent type compression connectors or terminations on conductors of size #8 AWG or larger gauge. Use an approved pliers or tool for crimping connectors for conductors of size #10 AWG or smaller gauge. B. Make splices or bolted connections with filler, and tape that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Insulate to same thickness as connectors being spliced or connected. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. D Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer, and in compliance with other Sections of Division 16. E Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. November 2000 006017.01 16120 -5 Conductors and Cables F. Make connections so phase color sequence at equipment, when viewed from the front, is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, or other distribution equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality - control testing. B. Test installation of wires and cables before electrical circuitry has been energized. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Remove and replace conductors with visible damage on conductor insulation ends due to installation in an incomplete or damaged conduit system such as, but not limited to, missing bushings or burrs on conduit ends. C. Correct malfunctioning conductors, cables, and connections at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new materials and retest. END OF SECTION November 2000 006017 01 16120 - Conductors and Cables SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1. Raceways include the following: a. RMC. b. PVC externally coated, rigid steel conduits. c. EMT. d. FMC. e. LFMC. f. RNC 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following: a. Device boxes. b. Outlet boxes. c Pull and junction boxes d. Cabinets and hinged -cover enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceway and box supports. 2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes. 3. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for conductors installed in raceways and boxes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: No submittals are required. November 2000 006017 01 16130 -1 Raceways and Boxes 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation." C. Comply with NEC. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RMC: 1. Conduit: Hot dipped galvanized with threaded ends meeting ANSI C80.1. 2. Couplings: unsplit, NPT threaded steel cylinders with galvanizing equal to the conduit. 3. Nipples: factory made through eight inches, no running threads. B Plastic- Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. C. EMT: 1. Conduit: Galvanized steel tubing meeting ANSI C80.3. 2. Couplings: steel, cast iron, or malleable iron compression type employing a split, corrugated ring and tightening nut, with integral bushings and locknuts. No indent or setscrew type. D. FMC: 1. Conduit: flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway. 2. Connectors: galvanized steel, screw in, approved for grounding. F 1FMr• 1. Conduit: flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway, covered by a liquid tight PVC layer. Electri -Flex Type LA or American Sealtite, Type UA 2. Connectors: galvanized steel, screw in, grounding type with a ferrule which covers the end of the conduit inside and out. F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit/tubing materials. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. November 2000 006017.01 16130 -2 Raceways and Boxes B. Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. 2.3 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Dry (not wet, corrosive, or hazardous) Locations: Stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, meeting NEMA OS 1, and with plaster or extension rings to suit construction and application. B. Outdoors, below grade, or wet locations which are not hazardous: galvanized, cast iron alloy box, one piece, with threaded holes or hubs, and with neoprene gaskets and galvanized cast iron alloy cover. 1. Surface mount boxes have integral mounting lugs. C. Corrosive Locations (whether dry or wet): galvanized, cast iron alloy box, one piece, with threaded holes or hubs, and with neoprene gaskets and galvanized cast iron alloy cover. D. Hazardous locations (whether dry, wet, or corrosive): explosion proof, galvanized, cast iron alloy box, one piece, with threaded holes or hubs, and with neoprene gaskets and galvanized cast iron alloy cover. 2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Dry locations: Stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, meeting NEMA OS 1. Boxes 6 "x6 "x4" or larger may be code gauge fabricated steel continuously welded at seams and painted after fabrication. B. Wet locations, outdoors, or below grade: 1. FRP plastic with gasketed screw -down cover. 2. Cast -Metal Boxes meeting NEMA FB 1, with gasketed screw down cover. 3. Boxes 6 "x6 "x4" or larger may be code gauge fabricated steel continuously welded at seams and hot - dipped galvanized after fabrication with floor seams and rubber gasketed covers. C. Corrosive locations: NEMA 4X rated box with cover. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS 1. Conduit bodies for use with RMC or EMT shall be cast or malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized. Covers shall be of the same material as the fitting. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or equal. 2. Conduit bodies for use with RNC shall be PVC with gasketed covers. 3. Locknuts and conduit bushings shall be malleable iron. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or equal 4. Conduit sealing bushings shall be OZ Gedney Type CSM series. Cabinet sealing bushing shall be OZ Gedney Type GRK. 5. Conduit sealing fittings, drains and breathers shall be OZ Gedney Type EY and DB, or equal Appleton or Crouse Hinds. 6. Through wall and floor seals shall be OZ Gedney FS and WS series. November 2000 006017.01 16130 -3 Raceways and Boxes 7. Cord grip connectors shall be OZ Gedney CGA, or equal Appleton or Crouse Hinds. 8. Extemal Cable Grip: Woven wire mesh type made of high- strength galvanized or stainless steel wire strand and matched to cable diameter and with attachment provision designed for the corresponding connector. 9. Conduit spacers for direct buried or encased in concrete raceways shall be Underground Devices, Inc. "Wunpeece Spacers'. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and spaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Where the manufacturer of equipment provided by the Contractor recommends or requires rigid metal conduit for circuits associated with the equipment, provide rigid metal conduit for the entire circuit, even if other conduit types would otherwise be permitted under these specifications. B Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods 1 Exposed RMC. 2. Underground: RNC or PVC coated rigid steel, except use only PVC coated rigid steel where rigid steel conduit is indicated on the Contract Documents for underground circuits . Where RNC is used, transition to PVC coated rigid steel at stub up locations and at entrances to buildings or other locations where the raceway changes from buried to encased in concrete or exposed conditions. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor- Driven Equipment): LFMC. C. Indoor, non corrosive areas: Use the following wiring methods: 1 Exposed e pd r ,vay awls a k,r. arc dry', nrin a nd not exose ! 6�xpSd 3MM ! 4nb6 YY P� i! i areas YY! lib! ! Q! 6 M! i � , above F grS#LlF, h and not ex _ N�S� -+ to the process: EMT or RMC. 2. Exposed in other areas: RMC. 3. Damp or Wet Locations RMC. 4. Concealed: a. in wood frame walls EMT or RMC. b. in masonry walls RNC or RMC c in concrete slab floors or ceilings: RMC or RNC. d. in accessible building spaces: EMT or RMC. e below slab -on -grade floors: PVC coated RMC or RNC. 5 Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor - Driven Equipment) FMC; except where RMC is used, use LFMC. D. Indoor, corrosive areas: November 2000 006017.01 16130 -4 Raceways and Boxes 1. Use RNC. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide a raceway for each circuit indicated. Do not gang raceway into wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., without specific approval. Do not group home runs or circuits without approval of the Engineer. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/4 inch trade size for underground circuits and communications circuits, % inch trade size for other circuits. C. Install rigid metal conduit unless other raceways are shown on the Contract Documents, are required by Code, or are permitted under these specifications PVC rigid conduit may be used for straight runs embedded in concrete or run underground or under concrete slabs, except where rigid steel conduits are indicated for these runs. Provide PVC coated rigid steel elbows for all underground and underslab PVC runs. D. Install conduit as a complete, continuous system without wires, mechanically secure and electrically connected to all metal boxes, fittings and equipment. Blank off all unused openings using factory made knockout seals. E. Install conduit exposed unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Do not install raceway below grade /slab unless specifically shown on the Drawings as being installed below grade /slab. F. Install exposed raceways in lines parallel or perpendicular to the building or structural members lines except where the structure is not level. Follow the surface contours as much as practical. Do not install crossovers or offsets that can be avoided by installing the raceway in a different sequence or a uniform line Provide adequate headroom. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. G. Raceway concealed above ceilings, furred spaces, etc., which are normally inaccessible may be run at angles not parallel to the building lines. H Wherever practical, route conduit with adjacent ductwork or piping and support on common racks. Base required strength of racks, hangers, and anchors on combined weights of conduit and piping. I. Where several circuits follow a common route, stagger pullboxes or fittings, or if shown grouped in one box, individually fireproof each conduit. J. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot - water pipes or other heat sources operating at temperatures above one - hundred degrees Fahrenheit. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping November 2000 006017.01 16130 -5 Raceways and Boxes K. Where conduits cross building expansion joints, use suitable sliding or offsetting expansion fittings. Unless specifically approved for bonding, use a suitable bonding jumper. For sizes one inch and smaller, a half -loop of flexible conduit between boxes or fittings may be used. L. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1. Provide anchors, hangers, supports, clamps, etc. to support the raceways from the structures in or on which they are installed. Do not space supports further apart than ten feet. 2. Provide sufficient clearance to allow conduit to be added to racks, hangers, etc. in the future. 3. Support raceway within three feet of every outlet box, junction box, gutter, panel, fitting, etc. 4. Support raceway and boxes in an approved manner by: a. expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry; b. toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; c. wood screws on wood; d. metal screws on metal. 5. Raceway in "wet" areas shall have clamp backs or other appropriate spacers to hold them a minimum of 1/2 inch off the surface. Horizontal runs on the roof surface shall be blocked at every 5 feet to hold them a minimum of 2 inches above roof surface. M Install concealed raceway below the slab in a shallow trench. N. Embed conduit in concrete a minimum of two inches from the exterior of the concrete 1. Do not place conduit in concrete less than five inches thick. 2. Sizes larger than one inch are not permitted embedded in concrete; conduit may be placed below slab -on -grade in a shallow trench. 3. Conduit smaller than one inch embedded in concrete may run at angles to the structure or slab line. 4. Run one inch conduit parallel to main reinforcement. 5. Crossovers in concrete are not permitted. 0. Underground raceway runs 1 install direct buried rigid plastic or rigid steel conduit where underground runs are shown. Provide a half lapped wrap of Scotchrap No. 51 plastic tape or a coat of Kopper's Bitumastic No. 505 or factory PVC coating, 20 mils minimum thickness, for rigid steel conduit, underground or encased in concrete. 2. Install conduit run below slab in a trench. Do not run conduit just below the slab or at the edge of the slab. 3. Run as straight as practicable Make changes in direction and /or grade of sufficient length to allow a gradual change (three foot radius minimum). Make slight offsets with five degree couplings. 4. Provide conduit spacers for underground raceways where more than one conduit is placed in a trench 5 Run trench true, and clear of stones or soft spots Place three inches of fine sand in the trench bottom and tamp into place. Provide preformed plastic spacers on top of sand spaced five feet on center. After the raceway is placed in the trench, backfill six inches with sand, then with native earth backfill passing a November 2000 006017 01 16130-6 Raceways and Boxes No. 8 sieve, free of stones. Do not tamp on top of the conduit until the final backfill is placed. Tamp or water settle the final backfill to finish the grade. Compact the backfill as specified under Division 2 "Earthwork ". 6. Mark direct buried conduit by a one inch thick concrete ribbon painted red or yellow or a strip of yellow marking tape placed a minimum of twelve inches below grade during backfilling of the trench. 7. Clean underground and embedded conduit two -inch size and above with a wire brush or swab, followed by a mandrel not less than twelve inches long and approximately one - quarter inch smaller in diameter than the conduit internal diameter. P. Where raceway exits from grade or concrete, provide the following: 1. For equipment to be moved into place at a later date, install a coupling flush with the floor slab and a threaded flush plug. 2. In "wet" or corrosive areas, provide rigid steel conduit coated with 20 mils PVC for a minimum of 24 inches before exiting. 3. For runs exiting from grade, slabs or encasement, provide a rigid steel elbow and adapter In "wet" or corrosive areas, use elbows 20 mil PVC coated. 4. Do not extend plastic conduit into equipment. 5. Except in corrosive areas, do not extend plastic conduit above grade or into buildings. Q Stub -ups 1. Where conduits are stubbed up into open bottom equipment, do not extend the conduit, including end fittings, more than 3 inches above the bottom of the enclosure. Stub conduits to a uniform height (plus or minus 1/8 inch) and align conduit centers within plus or minus 1/4 inch in rows parallel or perpendicular to the building structure. 2. Locate stub -ups directly under the section gutter into which the conductors they contain are to be routed. Terminate conduit with an insulating, grounding type bushing bonded to the ground bus of the equipment. 3. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange stubups so that no curved portion of bends is visible above the finished slab. R. Bend and offset metal conduit with hickey or power bender, standard elbows, conduit fittings or pull boxes. Bending of PVC shall be by hot box bender and, for PVC two inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Make elbows, offsets and bends uniform and symmetrical. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. S. Support conduit connections to motors or other equipment independently of the motor or equipment. Rise or drop vertically to the nearest practicable point of connection to the unit. Run vertical drops to the floor and fasten with a floor flange. Unsupported drops are not permitted. Horizontal runs on the floor or on equipment are not permitted Drop or rise at the appropriate closest location. Run conduit on equipment frames or supports to closely follow the contours of the equipment. Locate conduit to maintain access to all equipment services and adjustment points and so as not to interfere with operation of the equipment. November 2000 006017 01 16130 -7 Raceways and Boxes T. Connect conduit to hubless enclosures, cabinets and boxes with double iocknuts and with insulating type bushings. Use grounding type bushings where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. Connect to enclosures, boxes and devices from below in wet areas. Make conduit connections to enclosures at the nearest practicable point of entry to the enclosure area where the devices are located to which the circuits contained in the conduit will connect. U. Penetrations for raceways: 1. Do not bore holes in floor and ceiling joists outside center third of member depth or within two feet of bearing points. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 2. Penetrate through building wall or surfaces with a PVC or sheet metal sleeve with at least 1/4" greater interior diameter (ID) than conduit exterior diameter (OD), set flush with walls, pack with fiberglass and seal with silicone sealant and cover with escutcheon plate. 3. Penetrate through poured -in -place walls and free slabs, with a cast iron or, (above -grade only) Schedule 40 black pipe sleeve with retaining ring or washer. Set sleeves flush with forms or edges of slab. Pack around conduit with fiberglass and seal with silicone sealant. For penetrations below exterior grade, provide a floor or wall sealing fitting on the interior of the building wall.. V. Raceway terminations and connections: 1 Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. 2 Make connections waterproof and rustproof by application of a watertight, conductive thread compound. Clean threads of cutting oil before applying thread compound 3 PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. • 4. Apply PVC adhesive by brush. 5 Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 6 Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw or pipe cutter. Ream cut ends to remove burrs and sharp ends. Make conduit threads which are cut in the field to have same effective length and came thread dimensions an d tape as specified for factory-cut threads. 7 Flexible Connections. Use maximum of 18 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Install flexible conduit in a straight length. Do not use flexible conduit in place of elbows offsets or fittings to attach to fixed equipment. With the Engineer's approval, longer lengths of flexible conduit may be used for connection to items of equipment which require longer lengths for installation and removal of the equipment for maintenance or replacement purposes. Recessed and semi - recessed lighting fixtures may use up to 6 feet of flexible conduit, or 11 feet of pre- manufactured lighting "whips ". Use liquid -tight flexible metal conduit in wet or damp locations. Do not strap flexible conduit to structures or other equipment. 8. Provide double iocknuts and insulating bushings at conduit connections to boxes and cabinets. Align raceways to enter squarely and install iocknuts with dished November 2000 006017.01 16130 -8 Raceways and Boxes part against the box. Use grounding type bushings where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. In "wet" areas, use Iocknuts of the sealing type or use Myers hubs. 9. Connect conduits to enclosures at the location of the gutter or device to which the contained conductors will be routed. Route or stub conduits to motors and/or mechanical equipment directly to the connection and locate as close as possible to equipment terminals. 10. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. 11. Place conduits at panelboards in the rear line of knockouts where possible. Install spare conduits from flush- mounted panels up to accessible spaces. Install a minimum of one spare three - quarter inch conduit for every three single -pole spare breakers or spaces, or fraction thereof (three conduits minimum). W Keep conduits clean and dry and close each end left exposed. When blowing through conduits, cover electrical components installed in enclosures to avoid blowing dirt or water into equipment. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. X. Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL- listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as the boundaries of air conditioned or refrigerated spaces and where conduits enter or exit buildings from outdoor areas, including underground ducts or conduit runs. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Y Device and Outlet Boxes 1 Coordinate box locations with building surfaces and finishes to avoid bridging wainscots, joints, finish changes, etc. 2 Attach boxes to building structure with a minimum of two fasteners. Provide attachments to withstand a force of one - hundred pounds applied vertically or horizontally 3. Set recessed boxes at the following heights to the bottom of the box, except where noted otherwise. a. convenience outlet receptacles in finished areas at sixteen inches; b. lighting switches, dimmers, etc. at forty -four inches above floor 4 Set exposed device boxes four feet above the finished floor to top of the box. 5 Set boxes for lighting switches at 44 inches above the finished floor and within one foot of the door opening on the strike or lock side of the door or on the side closing last. 6. Arrange boxes used in wet areas to drain moisture away from devices or enclosures for equipment and make conduit connections from below. November 2000 006017.01 16130 -9 Raceways and Boxes 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION November 2000 006017 01 16130 -10 Raceways and Boxes SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. No submittals are required 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEC for devices and installation. B Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1 Wring Devices: a. Arrow Hart Div., Cooper Industries b Bryant Electric, Inc. c Hubbell Inc. d. Killark Electrical Mfg. Co e. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. f. Pass & Seymour /Legrand. g Crouse -Hinds h Paragon i Mulberry November 2000 006017.01 16140 -1 Wiring Dvices j. Square -D 2.2 WIRING DEVICES A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices." R. Encclnsu urec: NEMA 1 eqi ivalent except as otherwise indicated. C. Color: Ivory except as otherwise indicated or required by Code. D. Receptacles, Straight -Blade and Locking Type: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with Federal Specification W -C -596 and heavy -duty grade of UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles." Provide NRTL labeling of devices to verify compliance. 1. General purpose Convenience Outlets a. Duplex receptacle configuration b. Nylon face c. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. d. Provisions for split bus e. NEMA 5 -15R or 5 -20R 2. Special Purpose Receptacles a. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. b NEMA configuration as indicated. E Receptacles, Straight — Blade, Special Features Comply with the basic requirements specified above for straight -blade receptacles of the class and type indicated, and with the following additional requirements: 1 Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," with integral NEMA 5 -20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect only the connected receptacle and no other receptacles connected on the same circuit. F Snap Switches: Quiet —type a.c. switches, NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 "General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W —S- 896. 1. Lighting Switches 120/277V ac only, rated 20 amperes. 2 Mntnr ratan switches: horsepower rated fnr annl i nd ica t e d G Wall Plates: Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices. Features include the following: 1. Color: Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated. 2. Plate— Securing Screws: Metal with heads colored to match plate finish. 3 For areas with concealed electrical construction: Lexan, except as otherwise indicated. 4. For areas with exposed electrical construction. Galvanized steel. H Device Box Covers: Cast aluminum or cast iron to match box to which installed. November 2000 006017.01 16140 -2 Wiring Dvices PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Arrangement of Devices: Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 1. See "Raceways and Boxes" Section for mounting height of devices. 2. Verify locations of outlets and switches in cabinetry with cabinet supplier and Architect prior to installation. B. Install devices and assemblies plumb, level and secure. Provide spacers on device screws to flush yokes or flanges to surface of wall within 1/16 inch where boxes are not flush with the wall surface. Install wiring devices such as receptacles to withstand 50 pounds force applied perpendicular to the device face with a maximum deflection of 1/16 inch. C. Install switches with the "Off' position down. Install three and four way switches so the load is "off' when all switch handles are down. D. Connect phase, neutral, and grounding wires to devices with full loops around screws installed to tighten with tightening of the screw. Trim insulation to within one - eighth inch of screw terminal. E Use corrosion resistant devices outdoors. 3 2 GROUNDING A. Connect receptacle or switch ground lug to device box for devices other than isolated ground type. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing. 1. Test wiring devices for proper connections, polarity and ground continuity. Perform this testing with testing equipment designed for testing polarity and connections. 2 Operate each operable device at least 6 times. 3 Test ground -fault circuit interrupter operation with local fault simulations, using a tester designed for such testing, and according to manufacturer recommendations. Testing with integral test switches on the receptacle is not sufficient for this testing. B Replace damaged or defective components, and retest. 3.4 CLEANING A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. END OF SECTION November 2000 006017 01 16140 -3 Wiring Dvices SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes switches and circuit breakers, whether individually mounted or group mounted in panelboards, and similar equipment. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap switches used for disconnect switches. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data for disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section B Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 16010. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full- member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). B. Source Limitations Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Comply with NEC for components and installation. D Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. November 2000 Enclosed Switches 006017 01 16410 -1 and Circuit Breakers PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide circuit breakers of the same manufacturer as the panelboard (either new or existing) into which the circuit breaker will be installed. B Available Manufactiurers: Subject to romnliance w ith r ma n u f ac t u r e rs offering circuit breakers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler- Hammer/Westinghouse Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. 2.2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle. B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated with interrupting rating to meet available fault current. 1. Main and feeder breakers shall be molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip 2 Motor circuit breakers shall be magnetic only trip with adjustable trip setting. 3 Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal- magnetic trip, trip -free with non - interchangeable, non - adjustable trip unless otherwise noted. C Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching lighting Toads (SWD) or heating, air - conditioning, and refrigerating equipment (HACR) D Lugs. Mechanical lugs and power- distribution connectors suitable for conductors of the material, number and size provided. E Enclosure: per application, as described in Section 16050, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Connect circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. C. Identify each switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." November 2000 Enclosed Switches 006017 01 16410 -2 and Circuit Breakers 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality - control testing. B. Testing: After installing switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION November 2000 Enclosed Switches 006017 01 16410 -3 and Circuit Breakers SECTION 16422 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ac motor — control devices rated 600 V and Tess that are supplied as enclosed units, or as individual units for mounting in equipment specified under other sections. B Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section 1 Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data for motor controllers and accessories specified in this Section B Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. C. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 16010. D Load — Current and Overload —Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full —load currents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain similar motor — control devices through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Comply with NEC C. Listing and Labeling: Provide motor controllers and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. November 2000 = 006017.01 16422 -1 Motor Controllers 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty cycle of the motor and Toad. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish 1 spare for every 5 installed units, but not less than 1 set of 3 of each kind. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 Allen - Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group. 2. Eaton Corp.; Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse Products 3. General Electric Co., Electrical Distribution & Control Div 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5 Square -D. 2.2 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum size NEMA 1. IEC rated devices are not allowed. B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer, unless otherwise indicated. include a control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity. C Combination Controller Factory- assembled combination controller and disconnect switch with or without overcurrent protection as indicated. 1 Circuit - Breaker Disconnect: NEMA AB 1, motor - circuit protector with field - adjustable short- circuit trip coordinated with motor locked -rotor amperes. D Overload Protection: Three overload elements of melting alloy type selected to provide Class 10 protection for the actual motor furnished. Units are manual reset November 2000 = 006017 01 16422 -2 Motor Controllers type with an external reset mechanism provided in the starter enclosure front. Provide two separate auxiliary contacts with each overload protection unit . 1. One normally closed for use in the motor starting circuit. 2. One normally open for signaling overloads to plant control system. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Description: Surface - mounted enclosures per the application as described in Section 16050. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Devices are factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide auxiliary devices meeting the requirements of Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ". PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load, and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. B Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled C Use fractional- horsepower manual controllers for single -phase motors, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install independently mounted motor - control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions B. Location Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled, unless otherwise indicated C For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on structural -steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks conforming to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3 3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify motor - control components and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between motor - control devices according to Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." November 2000 006017.01 16422 -3 Motor Controllers B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switch and other automatic control devices where available. 1. Unless shown otherwise, connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position. 2. Unless shown otherwise, connect selector switches with motor — control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety —type control devices such as low— and high — pressure cutouts, high— temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field— connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to manufacturer's published torque — tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing. After installing motor controllers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1 Procedures Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2 Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest. 3 7 CLEANING A R emove paint splatters a nd oth spots, dirt, and d T u p scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION November 2000 = 006017 01 16422 -4 Motor Controllers SECTION 16440 PANELBOARDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less. B Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 2. Section 16410 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for circuit breakers installed in panelboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified B. Shop Drawings: For panelboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following 1. Enclosure type and mounting. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings. 3 Short- circuit current rating. 4 Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. C Panelboard Schedules For installation in panelboards and inclusion in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Submit final versions prior to closeout of project. D. Maintenance Data For panelboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, or which is a full- member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. November 2000 006017.01 16440 -1 Panelboards B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with NEC. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Keys: Provide 3 spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following 1. Challenger 2. Eaton Corp., Westinghouse & Cutler- Hammer Products. 3 General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. 4 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5 Square D Co. 2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION A. Enclosures: Surface - mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA PB 1, 20" minimum width, of NEMA type complying with Section 16050 for the location installed. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps or screws. Front for surface - mounted panelboards shall be same dimensions as box. C. Directory Frame: Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door. D. Bus. Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. insulated, bondable, full size neutral bus unless otherwise indicated. E Mai an d N Lugs: Compression type. F. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch - circuit equipment ground conductors Bonded to box. G. Service Equipment Approval Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards where so indicated on the contract documents. H. Main Breaker: Vertical mounting. November 2000 006017.01 16440 -2 Panelboards 2.3 DISTRIBUTION, LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH- CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: 1. Dry locations: In panelboard front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike. 2. Wet locations: Gasketed doors, with stainless steel hinges. Secure with padlock. 2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. In accordance with Section 16410, except as modified herein. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. 1. Setup, adjust and fasten in place flush trim and interiors. 2 Install circuit breakers as shown on the "Circuit Schedule" for each panelboard. Record all circuit breaker installation deviations from the "Circuit Schedule" and show on the Record Drawings the actual size and pole position of all circuit breakers installed. B Mounting Heights Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Provide spacers of neoprene or fiberglass to shim out from irregular surfaces or from damp surfaces. D Circuit Directory: Prepare panelboards directories neatly typewritten in the same pole sequence as the panelboard stamping. Send a copy to the Engineer for his records. Prior to typing the final directories, verify room and equipment names and numbers with the Owner and modify circuit descriptions of areas /spaces to conform with the Owner's desires. Obtain approval before installing. E. Do not remove knockouts for breaker positions unless a breaker is to be installed. Where twistouts or knockouts are removed in error, provide a circuit breaker (one pole, twenty ampere) to fill each position removed. F. Provision for Future Circuits: Install panelboards in such a manner as to leave access to the box, knockouts, etc. for future circuit additions. 3 2 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved laminated - plastic or metal nameplates mounted with corrosion - resistant screws. November 2000 006017 01 16440 -3 Panelboards 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1 Make insulation- resistance tests of each panelboard bus, component, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. 2. Make continuity tests of each circuit. 3. Testing of circuit breakers shall only be required for circuit breakers 100 Ampere and larger B. Testing Agency: Provide services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing. C. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest. 3 5 ADJUSTING A. Set field- adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or requested by the Engineer END OF SECTION November 2000 006017 01 16440 -4 Panelboards SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures (including fixtures normally mounted on the building exterior), lamps, ballasts, and accessory materials such as frames, lenses, diffusers, hangers, spacers, stems, auxiliary junction boxes and other miscellaneous hardware as required for complete installation of all lighting equipment. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Fixture A complete lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. 14 SUBMITTALS A. General Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections B Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following 1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures. 2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. C. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard. Provide components that comply with NEC and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. B. Listing and Labeling Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project. 1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations, underwater, and recessed in combustible construction that are specifically listed and labeled for such use. November 2000 006017 01 16510 -1 Interior Lighting 2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled ": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 3. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ductwork, insulation, ceiling system and other items, including work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: Furnish one of each type. 3. Ballasts: Furnish one of each type. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. No visible labels, trademarks or monograms on the exterior of the lighting fixtures or on lens or diffusers B. Metal Parts Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating without the use of tools, intended for finger operation; free from light leakage at seams, joints or junctions visible in the installed condition under operating conditions; and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position Spring loaded latches for frames. E Reflecting Surfaces Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces. 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film 90 percent. F Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. November 2000 006017.01 16510 -2 Interior Lighting 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated. 3. Pattern for plastic lenses: K12 prismatic refractors. Pattern No. 12 is not acceptable. G. Provide gaskets on all trims and housings of "wet" location fixtures. Provide non- corrosive type plaster rings, hangers, trim and hardware in wet and corrosive locations. H. Fixture Supports 1. Provide hook hangers for fixtures where indicated or specified consisting of an integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking type plug. I. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic integrated circuit, solid- state, full - light- output, energy- efficient type compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. 1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P with automatic reset integral protector device set to limit cast temperature to one - hundred -ten degrees Celsius maximum under abnormal conditions, high power factor. 4 Sound Rating: "A" rating. 5. Voltage Match connected circuits. 6 Lamp Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 7. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent. 8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 12 percent. 9. Conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference. 10. Multilamp Ballasts and maximum ratings: Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multilamp fixtures where indicated, with maximum input wattage ratings per Ansi C82.2 as follows: a. 2 lamp F32T8 -62 watts. 11 Lamp- ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of lamps. 12. Low - Temperature Fluorescent Ballasts: Comply with above requirements, except ballast may be Class P electromagnetic type Starting temperature is minus 20 deg C or colder. 13. Manufacturers: a. Advance b. Etta c. General Electric d. Motorola J. High- Intensity- Discharge (HID) Fixtures Conform to UL 1572. K. HID Ballasts. Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4 Include the following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1 Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulating high - power- factor type, suitable for the temperature range in which they are to be operated. 2. Operating Voltage: Match system voltage. 3. Single -Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 30 deg C. 4 Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 40 deg C. November 2000 006017.01 16510 -3 Interior Lighting 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 6. High - Pressure Sodium (HPS) Ballasts: Equip with a solid -state igniter /starter having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter /starter case temperature of 90 deg C. L. Encapsulation: Manufacturer's standard epoxy - encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.3 LAMPS A. Provide lamps for each fixture which comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. B. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color- Rendering Index (CRI): 4100 K and 85 CRI, except as otherwise indicated. C. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life. Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid start circuits. D. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2 Phillips 3 Sylvania 2 4 FUSES A. Provide fuses in fixtures mounted more than eight feet above floor or operated at 277 volts 1 Fast acting, current limiting fuses, coordinated with the ballast and Tamp operating characteristics, so as to avoid false tripping, yet provide fault clearing before damage occurs to the fixture. Bussman Type HFL in -line fuse holder and Bussman Type GLR fuse, sized at two- hundred percent of the ballast current rating. 2.5 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion - resistant treatment or primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordination with other work. 1. Coordinate lighting fixture size and design, frame requirements, and hanging or mounting devices for project ceiling conditions before ordering lighting fixtures. Consult the Drawings for details of ceiling and wall construction; provide lighting fixtures suitable for the particular type of ceiling or wall at each location. 2. Adjust light fixtures as required - near piping, equipment, etc., to protect from physical damage and provide sufficient clearance to install lamps and to maintain November 2000 006017.01 16510 -4 Interior Lighting Tens, reflectors, ballasts, etc.. Where pendant mounted fixtures are in conflict with ducts and piping, coordinate the location and mounting heights of the fixtures to the available space left between the various ducts and piping. 3. Locate fixtures so that doors and other equipment will not damage them at any time. B. Fixture support 1. Install fixtures with supports, brackets and trim as recommended by the fixture manufacturer to suit the particular building construction and use. Align each fixture to ceiling structure. 2. Install surface mounted fixtures tight to the ceiling construction. Provide shims or spacers as required to keep surface mounted fixture from warping or twisting due to uneven surfaces. 3. Provide fixture hangers and attachments on bracket mounted fluorescent fixtures in addition to raceway connections. Provide a minimum of two per fixture at the quarter points for fixtures of eight feet or less. Install additional hangers where recommended by the fixture manufacturer. 4 Secure surface fixtures to ceiling system, roof structure or slabs with a fastener such as lag screw, lag bolt, toggle bolt, cinch anchor or stud to support the fixture plus one - hundred pounds at each support. Nails or similar fasteners are not approved for lighting fixture support. 5. Do not support fixtures from ceiling material other than structural or framing material. Provide supports, spacers, channels, etc., necessary to support lighting fixtures where fixtures are located so that they cannot be connected directly to structure members. Provide additional framing to directly support fixtures where construction is such that mounting channels, strongbacks or bridging is required to support fixtures Provide additional support material which matches the structure material 6. Provide outlet boxes or other supports for lighting fixtures which are of sufficient strength to support at least four times the weight of fixture or one - hundred pounds, whichever is greater. Support all fixtures weighing more than fifty pounds independently of outlet box. 7. Do not support fluorescent fixtures with forty -eight inches or longer lamps from outlet box ears. Provide suitable fixture stud in box for each fixture. 8 Support all surface mounted fixtures more than eighteen inches wide at or near each corner, in addition to support from outlet box. 9 For heavy pendant mounted fixtures, where support independent of box is required and where conduit and outlet boxes are installed on surface, use safety swivel hanger with fixture stud. For fixtures suspended indoors from sloping surfaces, provide suitable aligners C. Install fluorescent bi -pin lamps in sockets after polarity, voltage and connections have been checked with a bi -pin tester or volt meter. Fluorescent bi -pin lamps shall be installed with correct rotation of lamps as indicated by indents or tabs. D. Install fixtures in rows or grids true to line. Install fixtures in a common area at the same level or grade. Install continuous runs of fixtures straight and true with joining straps, couplings, and nipples. Maintain spacing for fixtures as dimensioned or shown on the reflected ceiling plan and do not arbitrarily change because of ceiling pattern, etc. Symbols on Drawings which are undimensioned show approximate November 2000 006017 01 16510 -5 Interior Lighting locations and care shall be used to locate fixtures on centers of spaces, at the quarter points, or as indicated. Any changes in fixture layout must be approved in writing by the Engineer. E. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.2' CONFECTIONS A. Ground the lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components. B. Tests: Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and - circuits have been energized with normal power source. C. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly D. Report results of tests. E Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period. F. Provide replacement lamps for all lamps which fail prior to completion of the work. 3 4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean fixture lens, diffusers, enclosures on fixtures. Dirty enclosures, lens or diffusers shall be removed, washed and rinsed as recommended by fixture manufacturer. O C INTER 1 IlGHTIAIP GIVTI IRG SCHED II C e._ ! ! tl ! !!1 !> ! . !!NV ! Er!! LAI Ni-- E.J le! lLy4J66 A. Lighting Fixture Schedule is shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION November 2000 006017 01 16510 -6 Interior Lighting SECTION 17110 FIELD INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provisions: Requirements of Division 1 and Section 17010 form a part of this Section. B. Work Included: This Section specifies analytical instruments for process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment and supplies directly related to the installation of and operation of these analytical instruments, to perform the required functions in conjunction with information and equipment specified in other sections of Division 17. See Section 17010; this is the Schedule referred to herein. This Schedule shall not be construed as Bills of Material or as a complete listing of all required devices. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings to be submitted in this Section shall be made in one package under the Product Review category of Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings: In addition to the requirements of Section 17010, shop drawings shall include for each type of instrument: supply voltage and frequency, electrical Toad, accuracy, description of operation, operating instructions, and calibration procedure. C. Installation Method: Provide proposed method of mounting sensors or probes and instruments with submittal. D. Parts List: Submit a Parts List with current net prices and a list of recommended spares. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: In addition to the requirements of Section 17010, analytical instruments furnished shall be manufactured by firms regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. B. Maintainability: All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. C Materials and Installation: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the October 2000 006017 00 17110 -1 Field Instruments same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. Capacities of all equipment shall not be Tess than that indicated on the Drawings or specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROTAMETERS A. General: 1. Provide a 2" Ball Type sight flow indicator with an accuracy of +/- 7 %. The float shall be made of 316 stainless steel and the flanged ends shall be made of brass. A polycarbonate shield shall surround a borosilicate metering tube. B. Model /Manufacturer: Rotameter shall be a type 20 -1340 manufactured by McCrometer, or equal. 2.02 FLUORIDE SENSORS AND ANALYZERS A. Fluoride measuring systems shall consist of the following: 1. Flouride element and extension cord with watertight plug. 2. Analyzer /transmitter, junction box with weathertight receptacle. 3. Receptacle and switch for local calibration. 4. Flouride element shall be suitable for mounting as noted or shown. Each element shall be provided with a nonelectrolyte consuming reference electrode or standard, a glass pH measuring electrode, a RTD temperature element, and an integrally mounted preamplifier /signal conditioner. Unit shall provide automatic temperature compensation for stream temperature variations of 0 to 50 °C. Preamplifier /signal conditioner shall be encapsulated and suitable for operation in 100% relative humidity. 5. Flouride elements shall be flow- through configuration, with 12 -inch NPT connections, and be capable of withstanding 100 psig pressure. Flow- through elements shall be provided with a 20 -foot cable with watertight plug. 6. Flouride analyzer /transmitters shall be suitable for field mounting unless otherwise noted. Cases shall be thermoplastic ( polycarbonate or polypropylene). On the face of each unit shall be a 4 -inch (minimum) indicating scale with range as noted, and a standardization adjustment. Where alarms are noted, face of unit lights. Alarms each ach i iii Si �aii contain � high i and low adjustment �e� �i knobs and d d..� � T; �.�� .1,, ;-�: :a : :: t� shall have adjustable deadband. In addition to energizing the two alarm lights, alarm- equipped units shall make contact closures, rated for 5 amps at 120 Vac. I a dditio n to receiving inputs from the field- mounted elements and locally indicating the measured value, the unit shall generate an electrically isolated 4- 20 mAdc signal in linear proportion to pH into loads in the range of 0 to 450 ohms without load adjustment. The unit shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz power. B. Manufacturer: Flouride sensor shall be Foxboro EP459A, or equal. Flouride transmitter shall be Foxboro 875PH, or equal. Sensor and transmitter shall be of the same manufacturer. October 2000 nncn17 nn 1711_2 I vvvv .vv Fialri n PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation, testing, calibration, validation, startup and instruction shall be in accordance with Section 17010. END OF SECTION October 2000 006017.00 17110 -3 Field Instruments APPENDIX A PROCESS DESCRIPTION Kennedy /Jenks Consultants City of Yakima Water Fluoridation System Control Description General The proposed fluoride feeding system will consist of a 7,500 - gallon fluorosilicic acid storage tank, a 150- gallon day tank, transfer pump and a metering pump with appurtenances. The system is intended to feed 23% fluorosilicic acid to provide a fluoride residual of 1.0 mg/L in the finished water. The background concentration of fluoride is normally about 0.1 mg/L. The average water plant flow rate is 12.5 mgd. The peak flow rate is 25 mgd. The minimum flow rate is 5.0 mgd. Reference City of Yakima Water Fluoridation System Plans, Sheet 12, Process and Instrumentation Control Diagram, Kennedy Jenks Consultants, August 2000 for identifiers used in the following descriptions. Process Control Day Tank Filling - A manual hand switch will be provided for operation of the transfer pump (P -1). The transfer pump is intended to transfer acid from the primary storage tank (T -1) to the day tank (T -2) and from the primary storage tank to a future storage tank. The hand switch shall be spring loaded so that the operator must be present during the filling operation. The day tank scale will provide a visual indication of the tank volume. Metering Pump Control — The pump will be started manually. An enable signal from the PLC will be provided to the pump controller. The enable signal will be set by the operator via the HMI screen. Three parameters will be checked manually by the operator before the metering pump is started: 1) The total effluent filter flow should indicate that aminimum plant flow exists. This will be checked on the HMI screen or on the filter control panel. 2) A visual check of the rotameter (FE 101) will indicate that carrier water is flowing through the injection system. 3) A visual check of the day tank scale (either at the tank or via the HMI) indicates that sufficient acid is available in the day tank. If conditions 1, 2 and 3 are met, the pump will be started by the operator and will be paced by the total filter effluent flow signal from the PLC. (The filter effluent flow rate totalizer is existing in the PLC and is not shown on the P &ID). Two sets of fluoride residual meters and signal transmitters (AT 301,AE 301 and AT 401, AE 401) sampling from the downstream portion of the filter effluent flume, and the Gleed Pump Station, respectively, will monitor the fluoride residual present in the finished water. A fluoride residual value outside the alarm set point will cause an alarm condition. If the residual value is above a not -to- exceed setpoint the feed pump will be stopped by removing the enable signal.. y \00prt\006017.01\specs1controt memo revised Conley tloc APPENDIX B APPROXIMATE LIST OF PIPES AND FITTINGS SCHEDULED FOR REPLACEMENT OF METER IN PUMP ROOM Schedule of required pipe and fittings: (All pipe and fittings to be schedule 40 GI) 3" nipple 3" 90 ell 3" nipple 3" 90 ell approx. 4 ft of 3" pipe (relocate existing grounding connections which are on the 1 -1/2" pipe) 3" x 3" x 3" tee 3" x 1 -1/2" reducer approx. 5 ft of 3" pipe 3" 90 ell approx. 8 ft of 3" pipe 3" 90 ell 3" nipple 3" gate valve (match existing type) 3" nipple 3" meter and meter adapters (City to supply, contractor to install) 3" nipple 3" gate valve (match existing type) 3" nipple 3" 90 ell approx. 8 ft of 3" pipe 3" 90 ell approx. 5 ft of 3" pipe 3" 90 ell 3" 45 ell approx. 10 ft of 3" pipe 3 "x3 "x3/4" (side out) tee approx. 10 ft of 3" pipe 3" x 3" x 3" tee w/ 3" x 1-1/2" reducer 3" nipple 3" gate valve (match existing type) 3" nipple 3" union approx. 1 ft of 3" pipe 3" x 3" x 3" tee (install in existing 3" pipe run which is to remain) Contractor is required to verify dimensions and alignment, as well as necessary pipe lengths and fittings. Contractor must modify pipe hangers and supports and /or provide new pipe hangers and supports as required to properly support the new piping. c:lyaWma spacalachadule of notated me and fRanpa.doc APPENDIX C GEOTECHNICAL REPORT Northern, Inc. • Consulting Engineers • Environmental Scientists • Special Structural Inspections • Construction Materials Testing 722 No. 16th Ave., Ste. 31 9757 Juanita Dr. N.E., Ste. 121 6713 W Clearwater, Ste. F 81006 Hwy. 395 No. Yakima, WA 98902 Kirkland, WA 98034 Kennewick, WA 99336 Hermiston, OR 97838 (509) 248.9798 (425) 825-0327 (509) 734-9320 (541) 564 - 0991 Fax (509) 248.4220 Fax (425) 825-0328 Fax (509) 734-9321 Fax (541) 564 - 0928 L CORPORATE OFFICE. E-mail. gnnorthcrn @ewa.net • 1.800.428.9798 • Web Site' http: / /www gnnorthern.com f � Prepared for: Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, Inc. 2828 SW Naito Parkway, Suite 350 Portland, Oregon 97201 REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION Yakima County Fluoridation Plant Expansion Naches, WA GN Northern Job No.: 200 -137 Prepared by: GN Northern, Inc. 6713 West Clearwater Avenue, Suite F Kennewick, Washington 99336 (509) 734-9320 j Imran Magsi, P.E. Frank Reinart Senior Geotechnical Engineer Staff Geologist July 17, 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY .1 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION .2 FIELD EXPLORATION 3 LABORATORY TESTING .4 SITE CONDITIONS .5 REGIONAL GEOLOGY 5 GROUNDWATER 5 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 6 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS .7 SITE GRADING 7 SPREAD FOOTINGS 7 CONCRETE SLAB -ON- GRADE .. 8 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK 8 RECOMMENDATIONS . .9 SITE GRADING .9 • SPREAD FOOTINGS 10 CONCRETE SLAB -ON -GRADE 11 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK ..12 GENERAL 12 CONTINUING SERVICES 13 LIMITATIONS 14 APPENDIX ASFE INFORMATION SHEET SITE LOCATION PLAN (Figure 200 - 137 -1) SITE AND APPROXIMATE TEST PIT LOCATION PLAN (Figure 200 - 137 -2) LOGS OF TEST PITS LABORATORY TEST DATA CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES UBC SEISMIC ZONE MAP PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION Based on our review of the preliminary site plan provided by Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, Inc., we understand the proposed construction will be a 900 - square -foot concrete masonry building, resting on a concrete foundation. Two above - ground storage tanks will be located in the east side of the building. The above - ground storage tanks will be 12 feet in diameter, and each will have a capacity of 8,500 gallons. A single underground storage tank will be installed east of the new building, between the building and the fence surrounding the water treatment plant property. The proposed capacity of this tank is a minimum 9,500 gallons. We understand that the underground tank will be made of double wall fiberglass or composite material. 2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF STUDY This report presents the results of a subsurface study for the proposed expansions of the Yakima Water Fluoridation Plant, located near Naches, Washington. These expansions include the construction of a concrete building, containing two above - ground storage tanks (ASTs), and the installation of one underground storage tank (UST). The site location is shown on Figure No. 200- 137-1. A subsurface study was conducted for the purpose of developing subgrade recommendations for the design and installation of the proposed underground storage tank, as well as design and construction of the adjoining storage tank building. A field exploration program, consisting of excavating two (2) exploratory test pits, was performed to obtain information on subsurface conditions. Samples obtained during the field investigation were tested in the laboratory to determine the physical characteristics of the on -site soils. The results of the field exploration and laboratory tests were analyzed to develop recommendations for subgrade preparation for installation of the underground storage tank, as well as recommendations for the construction of the adjoining storage tank building. The results of the field exploration and laboratory tests are presented in the Appendix. This report has been prepared to summarize the data obtained during this study and to present our conclusions and recommendations based on the proposed construction and the subsurface conditions encountered at the site. The design parameters, and a discussion of our geotechnical engineering considerations related to construction, are included in this report. t FIELD EXPLORATIONS The field exploration was conducted on June 26, 2000. An underground utility locate was requested and performed prior to our field exploration, and an employee of the water treatment plant was present to locate private utilities. A total of two (2) exploratory test pits were excavated with a backhoe. Figure No. 200 -137 -2 shall be referenced for the approximate test pit locations. Locations of the test pits were determined using a wheel counter device; with all distance measurements referenced to the existing on -site features. 3 LABORATORY TESTING Samples obtained during the field exploration were observed in the laboratory by our geotechnical engineer and were visually classified in accordance with ASTM D2487, based on the Unified Soil Classification System chart included in the Appendix. Representative samples were selected for testing to determine the engineering and physical properties of the soils in general accordance with ASTM or other approved procedures. Tests Conducted: To Determine: Grain -size Distribution Size and distribution of soil particles; i.e., clay, silt sand, and gravel. The results of all field and laboratory tests are summarized in reports included in the Appendix at the end of this report. This data, along with the field information, was used to prepare the test pit logs, also included in the Appendix. 1 5 4 SITE CONDITIONS The proposed construction is located at the Yakima County Water Treatment facility, which is located on U.S. Highway 12, near Eschbach Park, between Yakima and Naches, Washington. Access to the water treatment site is available from U.S. Highway 12, located northeast of the site. A 30- foot - diameter water storage tank is located immediately south of the proposed building footprint. The present grade of the site has been leveled, and the surface material consists of gravel with sand. Regional Geology The site lies on Pleistocene -age andesites from the nearby Tieton volcano. These andesites overly a portion of the western Columbia Plateau physiographic province. The Columbia Plateau is a series of massive flood basalts dating from the Miocene era that cover most of central and eastern Washington, as well as portions of Oregon and Idaho. Overlying the Tieton andesites are younger alluvial deposits from the nearby Naches River. Groundwater Groundwater was encountered at a depth of 11.0 feet below ground surface (BGS) during our subsurface exploration of the site on June 26, 2000. A shallow water table is to be expected, given the close proximity of the Naches River (approximately 2000 feet west from the site at the time of our field exploration). Numerous factors contribute to groundwater fluctuation and evaluations of such factors are beyond the scope of this report. f -- 5 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS • Due to the close proximity of the two test pits, the subsurface profile observed in each test pit was very similar. The soil at the surface of the two test pits was a well - graded gravel with sand, silt, cobbles, and boulders. This soil was dry to slightly moist, brown, and dense to very dense. Sloughing of the sidewalls was observed throughout the test pit excavations. At about 3 feet BGS, silt content was observed to be mostly absent in the well - graded gravel with sand. The moisture of the subsurface soil steadily increased with increasing depth, until groundwater was observed at a depth of 11 feet BGS. The maximum depth explored was 12.0 feet BGS. Reference should be given to the test pit logs included in the Appendix of this report for details of the soil profile. j 1 6 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS Site Grading Very little site grading will be required to level the site, as the surficial gravel has already been leveled. A small degree of cutting and filling may be required, for the purposes of leveling portions where boulders are removed during footing excavations and the preparation of the building pad. Structural gravel fill (3 -inch minus crushed rock) will =be required bene the footings and floor slab. The gravel soil found onsite is suitable for use -as a"struct iii Tfillbut must first be processed to remove material coarser than 4 inches in grain size. The structural fill should extend a minimum of 6 inches beneath the footings and 6 inches beneath the concrete slab -on- grade. The placement and compaction of structural gravel fill is described in the recommendations section of this report. • We recommend the subgrade be approved by our geotechnical engineer prior to placing the footings and the concrete slab -on- grade. Spread Footings Considering a minimum 30 -inch burial depth of the exterior footings for frost protection, we anticipate native gravel with sand will be encountered beneath the footings. Footings resting on a minimum of 6 inches of structural gravel fill underlain by compacted native gravel with sand can be proportioned for a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot. These allowable bearing pressures may be increased by one third for seismic 2 loading conditions. In our opinion, foundations constructed according to the above conditions will settle approximately 1 /2 inch, with differential settlement less than half that magnitude. The lateral resistance of spread footings placed on compacted structural fill is controlled by a combination of sliding resistance between the footing and the foundation materials, and passive earth pressure against the side of the footing. The project site is located in seismic zone 2B, as defined in the Uniform Building Code (UBC, 1994). Zone 2B includes the eastern and central portions of Washington and Oregon, and represents 7 an area of moderate seismic risk. The seismic zone factor (Z) as defined in the UBC code (Table 16 -I and 16 -J) is 0.2. The types of materials encountered at the site are classified as S (for dense gravel soils) per UBC code. An S soil profile corresponds to a seismic coefficient C, value of 0.32 and C value of 0.24. The UBC information used in this report is summarized and included in the Appendix. Concrete Slab -On -Grade We recommend that at least 6 inches of structural gravel fill (3/4- or 5/8 -inch crushed rock) be placed directly beneath the floor slab -on- grade to create a uniform bearing surface. This fill should be placed in a single lift and compacted as per item #2 of our recommendations. All surface material of cobble and boulder size should be removed from the building pad. The subgrade should then be compacted with a ten -ton smooth drum roller to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry • density as determined by ASTM D1557 method. Underground Storage Tank Considering the base of the underground storage tank will be located at a depth of approximately 10 to 15 feet BGS, we anticipate that gravel with sand will be encountered beneath the tank. The native gravel with sand is suitable for directly supporting the tank, although all coarse material of cobble to boulder size shall be removed from the base of the excavation prior to placement of the tank. Prior to placing the tank, a layer of leveling coarse sand or pea gravel should be placed beneath the tank per tank supplier's installation guidelines. The UST shall be properly anchored with concrete deadmen per manufacturer's guidelines. Anchors should be designed to take into account buoyancy effects generated by variable groundwater levels at the site, and tanks should be strapped to the concrete slab per manufacturer's guidelines. Due to the potentially shallow groundwater conditions generated by the nearby Naches River, dewatering may be required during the installation of the UST if groundwater is encountered in the tank basin at the time of installation. Sloping or shoring of the tank basin sidewalls will be required to prevent sloughing or caving of the well - graded gravel with sand. 8 • RECOMMENDATIONS Site Grading Site Preparation: 1. Only a small amount of cutting and filling may be required to level the site, prior to commencing construction activities. The subgrade within the proposed building pad should be compacted using a combination of static and vibratory compaction methods, and proof rolled, in the presence of a representative of our geotechnical engineer of record, with appropriate rubber -tire mounted heavy construction equipment. 2. All fill and backfill should be approved by our geotechnical engineer, placed in uniform lifts, and compacted to the following minimum compaction values as determined by ASTM D1557 method. a) Below Floor Slab 95% b) Below Spread Footings 95% The compaction should be verified in the field using a calibrated nuclear densometer in accordance with ASTM D2922. A correction factor should be • , applied during testing within trenches. The thickness of the loose, non - compacted lifts of structural fill should not exceed 6 inches for heavy equipment compactors and 4 inches for hand - operated compactors. Suitability of On -site Soils: 3. The native gravel soils on -site is suitable as a structural fill if it is processed first to remove all granular material greater than 4 inches in grain size. The native gravel can be unconditionally used as a general fill and backfill material. The placement of general fill and backfill should be performed in uniform lifts not exceeding 6 inches in loose thickness and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density per ASTM D1557 method. 4. If imported material is used as a structural fill, it shall be a well - graded, granular material meeting the following grading limits. 9 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3 inch 100 #4 35 to 45 #200 Less than 8 Spread Footings The design and construction criteria presented below should be observed for a conventional spread footing foundation system. The construction details should be considered when preparing the project documents. 5. Considering a minimum 30 -inch burial depth of the exterior footings for frost protection, we anticipate native gravel with sand will be encountered beneath the footings. Six (6) inches of structural gravel fill (3 -inch minus crushed rock) shall be placed beneath the footings in a single lift and compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Footings resting on a minimum of 6 inches of structural gravel fill underlain by compacted native gravel with sand can be proportioned for a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf). This allowable bearing pressure may be increased by one third for seismic loading conditions. 6. Minimum spread footing width for continuous footings and isolated column pads should be controlled either by applicable building codes or by the allowable bearing pressure cited above in item #5, whichever is more restrictive. a 7. All exterior footings should be placed at least 30 inches below exterior finished grade for frost protection. 8. Lateral loads on the foundations due to wind or seismic loading will be 10 resisted by friction at the base of foundations and passive earth pressure against the buried portions of the building. We recommend a passive equivalent earth pressure in compacted granular backfill of 250 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). In calculating this value, we have assumed footings will extend at least 30 inches below the lowest adjacent exterior grade and the backfill around the structure is compacted granular material. The above recommended lateral foundation resistance value includes a factor of safety of 1.5. 9. We recommend a coefficient of friction between the structural gravel fill and the cast -in -place concrete of 0.45. An appropriate factor of safety should be used to calculate sliding resistance at the base of the footing. 10. Granular foundation soils should be compacted with a smooth vibratory compactor. 11. A representative of our geotechnical engineer of record should monitor and document the placement and compaction of all fill and backfill material. 12. While it is the responsibility of the contractor to provide safe working conditions in connection with subsurface excavations, the native soil at the site, for excavation planning purposes, is classified as Type C in accordance with the OSHA Classification system. Sloughing, particularly in the excavation for the underground storage tank, should be expected and countered by either shoring or maintaining a stable slope. For excavation purposes, a safe slope of 2(H):1(V) should be implemented for all excavation activities. Concrete Slab -On -Grade 13. We recommend that at least 6 inches of structural gravel fill (3/4 or 5/8 inch crushed rock) be placed directly beneath the floor slab -on -grade to provide 11 a uniform bearing surface. This fill should be placed in a single 6 -inch lift and compacted as per item #2 of our recommendations. All surface rocks of cobble and boulder size should be removed from the building pad. The subgrade should then be prepared, and compacted with a ten -ton smooth drum roller to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 method. Underground Storage Tank 14. The underground storage tank should be supported on compacted native gravel with sand. All coarse material of cobble or boulder size should be removed from the completed tank basin prior to placement of the UST. The UST should be properly fastened and anchored with concrete deadmen on each side of UST, in accordance with the manufacturer's installation guidelines. Anchoring should take into account the buoyancy effects from the potential groundwater possible at the site. The tank should also be strapped to the concrete slab, per manufacturer's guidelines. A qualified engineer should properly design UST anchor system. 15. If groundwater is encountered in the tank basin at the time of UST installation, dewatering of the tank basing will be required during tinstallation of the UST. j 16. UST excavation walls should be supported by adequate shoring system or it can be adequately sloped. The lateral shoring system should be designed by a qualified geotechnical engineer. General 17. Backfill should be sloped to drain away from the building at a minimum grade of 3% for a distance of at least 10 feet. 18. Site grades that will rapidly drain surface and roof runoff away from 12 _; foundation and subgrade soils should be developed and maintained both during and after construction. Continuing Services Two additional elements of geotechnical engineering services are important to the successful completion of this project. 1. Consultation with GN Northern during the design phase. This is essential to ensure that our findings are appropriately incorporated in the final design considerations related to the project and any changes in the design concept consider geotechnical aspects. 2. Observation and monitoring during construction. GN Northern should be retained to observe the earthwork phases of the project, including site grading and foundation excavations, to determine that the subsurface conditions are compatible with those used in our analysis and design. During site grading, placement of structural fill should be observed and tested to confirm that proper compaction has been achieved. In addition, if environmental contaminants or other concerns are discovered in the subsurface, GN Northern professionals are available for consultation. 13 LIMITATIONS This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted soil and foundation engineering practices in this area for use by Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, Inc. for design purposes. The recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from two (2) exploratory test pits completed at the site. The nature and extent of subsurface variations across the site may not become evident until construction. Also, subsurface conditions may differ at other locations and may change at these locations with the lapse of time. If during construction, fill, soil, rock, or water conditions appear to be different from those described herein, we should be advised immediately. { / / ' Frank D. Reinart Imran Magsi, P.E. Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engineer r .. P o ' G. '9 • 4c , 4 ,O tEXFifES 11 1/- 0/ J 14 1 1 _ APPENDIX t 1 J ..I • ASFE INFORMATION SHEET 1 vt IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT More construction problems are caused by site subsurface conditions than any other factor. As troublesome as subsurface problems can be, their frequency and extent have been lessened considerably in recent years, due in large measure to programs and publications of ASFE/ The Association of Engineering Firms Practicing in the Geosciences. The following suggestions and observations are offered to help you reduce the geotechnical - related delays, cost - overruns and other costly headaches that can occur during a construction project. A GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT IS BASED ON A UNIQUE SET OF PROJECT- SPECLj 1C FACTORS A geotechnical engineering report is based on a subsurface exploration plan designed to incorporate a unique set of project - specific factors. These typically include: the general nature of the structure involved, its size and configuration; the location of the structure on the site and its orientation; physical concomitants such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities, and the level of additional risk which the client assumed by virtue of limitations imposed upon the exploratory program. To help avoid costly problems, consult the geotechnical engineer to determine how any factors which change subsequent to the date of the report may affect its recommendations. Unless your consulting geotechnical engineer indicates otherwise, your geotechnical engineering report should not be used: • When the nature of the proposed structure is changed, for example, if an office building will be erected instead of a parking garage, or if a refrigerated warehouse will be built instead of an unrefrigerated one; • when the size or configuration of the proposed structure is altered; • when the location or orientation of the proposed structure is modified; • when there is a change of ownership, or • for application to an adjacent site. Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility for problems which may develop if they are not consulted after factors considered in their report's development have changed MOST GEOTECHNICAL "FINDINGS" ARE PROFESSIONAL ESTIMATES Site exploration identifies actual subsurface conditions only at those points where samples are taken, when they are taken. Data derived through sampling and subsequent laboratory testing are extrapolated by geotechnical engineers who then render an opinion about overall subsurface conditions, their likely reaction to proposed construction activity, and appropriate foundation design. Even under optimal circumstances actual conditions may differ from those inferred to exist, because no geotechnical engineer no matter how qualified, and no subsurface exploration program, no matter how comprehensive, can reveal what is hidden by earth, rock and time. The actual interface between materials may be far more gradual or abrupt than a report indicates. Actual conditions in areas not sampled may differ from predictions. Nothing can be done to prevent the unanticipated, but steps can be taken to help minimize their impact. For this reason, most experienced owners retain their geotechnical consultants through the construction stage, to identify variances, conduct additional tests which may be needed, and to recommend solutions to problems encountered on site. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS CAN CHANGE Subsurface conditions may be modified by constantly changing natural forces. Because a geotechnical engineering report is based on conditions which existed at the time of subsurface exploration, construction decisions should not be based on a geotechnical engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by time. Speak with the geotechnical consultant to learn if additional tests are advisable before construction starts. Construction operations at or adjacent to the site and natural events such as floods, earthquakes or groundwater fluctuations may also affect subsurface conditions and thus the continuing adequacy of a geotechnical report. The geotechnical engineer should be kept apprised of any such events, and should be consulted to determine if additional tests are necessary. ASFE THE ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING FIRMS PRACTICING IN '1`HE GEOSCIENCES IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES ARE PERFORMED FOR SPECIFIC PURPOSES AND PERSONS • Geotechnical engineers reports are prepared to meet the specific needs of specific individuals. A report prepared for a consulting civil engineer may not be adequate for a construction contractor, or even some other consulting civil engineer. Unless indicated otherwise, this report was prepared expressly for the client involved and expressly for purposes indicated by the client. Use by any other persons for any purpose, or by the client for a different purpose, may result in problems. No individual other than the client should apply this report for its intended purpose without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer. No person should apply this report for any purpose other than that originally contemplated without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer. A GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT IS SUBJECT TO MISINTERPRETATION Costly problems can occur when other design professionals develop their plans based on misinterpretations of a geotechnical engineering report. To help avoid these problems, the geotechnical engineer should be retained to work with other appropriate design professionals to explain relevant geotechnical findings and to review the adequacy of their plant and specifications relative to geotechnical issues. BORING LOGS SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED FROM THE ENGINEERING REPORT Final boring logs are developed by geotechnical engineers based upon their interpretation of field logs (assembled by site personnel) and laboratory evaluation of field samples. Only final boring logs customarily are included in geotechnical engineering reports. These logs should not under any circumstances be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings, because drafters may commit errors or omissions in the transfer process. Although photographic reproduction eliminates this problem, it does nothing to minimize the possibility of contractors misinterpreting the logs during bid preparation. When this occurs, delays, disputes and unanticipated costs are the all- too - frequent result To minimize the likelihood of boring log misinterpretation, give contractors ready access to the complete geotechnical engineering report prepared or authorized for their use. Those who do not provide such access may proceed under the mistaken impression that simply disclaiming responsibility for the accuracy of subsurface information always insulates them from attendant liability. Providing the best available information to contractors helps prevent costly construction problems and the adversarial attitudes which aggravate them to disproportionate scale. READ RESPONSIBILITY CLAUSES CLOSELY Because geotechnical engineering is based extensively on judgment and opinion, it is far less exact than other design disciplines. The situation has resulted in wholly unwarranted claims being lodged against geotechnical consultants. To help prevent this problem, geotechnical engineers have developed model clauses for use in written transmittals. These are not exculpatory clauses designed to foist geotechnical engineers' liabilities onto someone else. Rather, they are definitive clauses which identify where geotechnical engineers' responsibilities begin and end. Their use helps all parties involved recognize their individual responsibilities and take appropriate action. Some of these definitive clauses are likely to appear in your geotechnical engineering report, and you are encouraged to read them closely. Your geotechnical engineer will be pleased to give full and frank answers to your question. OTHER STEPS YOU CAN TAKE TO REDUCE RISK • Your consulting geotechnical engineer will be pleased to discuss other techniques which can be employed to mitigate risk. In addition, ASFE has developed a variety of materials which may be beneficial.. Contact ASFE for a complimentary copy of its publications directory. ASFE THE ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING FIRMS PRACTICING IN THE GEOSCIENCES • • SITE LOCATION PLAN \ 1 1 i 1 1 i J i"*'.1 / _ ' p - mom _ j ' ca h "OOft • • ,r Ra: 1r, 0 .>,/ ' 4. . : 5 --, c ; l ~•- \ ,) \ Cif }} t J fi r # � y rs/�, 'r c / p ‘ Approximate Site Location v in (2 °, U �- r \ , y c '.u. , N it, 0 Eschbach --\ d N ‘� .. 1 t \, 1 _ i _____. 7 x - 01800 M1apGuastcom Inc.: ©1000 GDT. Inc- 1 i 2 1 s GNNorthern, Inc. SITE LOCATION PLAN Water Fluoridation Plant Site N Job No. : 200 -137 Naches, Washington l'' Date Mounted By: Reviewed By: Figure No. 07 -00 FR FR 200 -137 -1 SITE AND APPROXIMATE TEST PIT LOCATION PLAN J 1 A . . • . • 1 , • \ I : ,.........■.:4 . . \ 7 •I ...'"'....'. / .0 .... .........A. A A..» AAA.— ....=..........." FII TEF . ..• .--. i .. ..-'" .............. _..L....... ...: , !• 1 i .• •• I t .• • . A ... • . , / ..... .• .......... OVIMOR 110 . 1 .....----..,. . . . : • ...''''. i i •.\ ./- • . . i ../ • . 1••• . i V i 1 1 i i 1 E•1 i \ 1 . - • geS.X....J. i . • 1 TANK ) , \ / , • ... • .. • i \ S ' , . • ,, . . . , '• • ■ Ii I °•.. _...„..• ... '`......................"'" \ • • . . :. • 1 I L( TANK AM VALI ‘ ....■*"..' \ .■ , . t l , .. . .. MIMI 0/111111MMIENIMMISIMMIli '."".'"'.4"''"... l , . ' ' . • . 11....___ • • ; 1 ____........... 1 0 1 \...; V - -1 * TP-2 ...• , .. ...SNOV:etal£K ASH MICH 1, • •; i • . . .. '.'• : • • .4 1 k NO • r P1.1. STAITM • . ,.. . , . . . n t , • 1 1 1 * TP-10 pi , t. .• 1 , • 1 . % . ,Y - -.4 - - 4. — . ..........r...1 • • i e • \ \ : . • 4 .• I • If • •• . 1 I • . g " - . .' MCI% , . • • . _ • \ • V.,....._ . .• ' I. . . Ii • / i s .---.44 • . Pan, •• • • ! : . . -........) 4 • . . , . : 1 • • • •- , .• ' - :'' 3 ' ' 'I'l • 3 • • . . . • .11_ • . • ■ • \ i' • I • t.' • ‘44 • . • .Y. .. I N . ...• ''• ..........L...........• ....-------.....---.....................L. a •111 • • t I \ •\. • 0 . .e , . : .. - . \ ,,,` • . ' 4 V--- 4.4 4i CP fe\ • -rp4‘Isca...A. 4.k este: trC) I■.74 *-, • • . La ,• • ... . •fr . --- triA k * Test Pit Location t Test Pit Locations GN Northern, Inc. Kennedy/Jenks Fluoridation Plant Job No.: 200 Naches, Washington Date Mounted By Reviewed By: Figure No. 07-00 ST FR 200-137-2 i . .,. LOG OF TEST PITS 1 1 TEST PIT TP -1 Project Yakima Cty. Fluoridation PlantExc. Date: 06/26 /00 Project No: 200 -137 Exc. Depth: 12.0' BGS Client: Kennedy /Jenks Consultants Logged By: FR Location: Neches, WA Plotted By: FR Elevation: ND Water Level: 11.0' BGS Description Soil Gra hic Soil w Ti Type ?aril Depth EE CO fa , Well- Graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Silt, Cobbles & Boulders, dry GW wc=== - . — 0 to slightly moist, dense to very dense, brown, sloughing of the K — r —o- � �. _ sidewalls. ,} .O. ._ T •a- — 2 .g. — .ter --v �O■ - , Well- Graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Cobbles & Boulders, dry to GW '� - slightly moist, very dense, brown, sloughing of the sidewalls. t.-- •` 0./— 4 II ... ..... R- r S... v Well- Graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Cobbles & Boulders, moist GW "'��'' (wet at 8.5 feet BGS), very dense, brown, sloughing of the -___ 6 sidewalls. —O " ' _ D. It 1 t �- � - . .., .- . -�- �G7i .�_. _ o- Cam- .-,., r cam e 10 •ice OM, 1 ".== = i � Well- Graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Cobbles & Boulders, 1 GW t} - saturated, very dense, brown, sloughing of the sidewalls. l �_. _ 1—' - °; Test pit completed at depth of 12.0' BGS END r 12 O _ . .t U - N i° —14 S Test Pit IR Civil Tech Software Page 1 TEST PIT TP -2 Project Yakima Cty. Fluoridation PlantExc. Date: 06/26/00 Project No: 200 -137 Exc. Depth: 6.0' BGS Client: Kennedy /Jenks Consultants Logged By: FR Location: Naches, WA Plotted By: FR Elevation: ND Water Level: NE ■ .� d Description Soil Graphic Pit De t0 E Type Depth co co • 0 • Well - graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Sitt, Cobbles & Boulders, dry GW -sue} to slightly moist, dense to very dense, brown, sloughing of the '' sidewalts. } } _ r — -,====- o— v. _ f� } - �. ... a. �•� - a ...COW 11 =11. -ems r. 2 . i ..p. Cam. } a NC_ � 4 i } ir_ -.1=- •= 3 Well- graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Cobbles & Boulders, slightly GW " 1 moist, very dense, brown, sloughing of the sidewalis. t — o - oO� c= �- 4 T - '. .�.. J. - C L - } - te r �• Well- graded GRAVEL w/ Sand, Cobbles & Boulders, moist, GW Ej ...... very dense, brown, sloughing of the sidewalls. _ ■-+P* li s ` .. 1 =1 jz 6 T est pit completed at depth of 6 .0 feet BGS. END O ., - N 10 7 10 ! Test Pit 1 la CivilTech Software Page 2 LABORATORY TEST DATA f J J _J Northern, Inc. Ku W Clearwater, Ste. 1r Ke■aew ki, WA 9!334 (509) 734 -9320 Fax (509) 734 -9321 • Consulting Engineers • Environmental Scientists • Construction Material Testing 722 No. 16th Avt,, Ste. 31 Yakima, WA 98902 (509) 241 -9791 Client: Kennedy /Jenks Consultants, Inc. Date: 07 -12 -00 Fax ('°9)'4s an° 2828 SW Naito Parkway, Suite 350 Job Number: 200 -137TC 9757 Juanita Dr. N.fi, Ste. 121 Kirkland, WA 98034 Portland, OR 97201 Invoice No.: 20698TC (425) Z25-0327 Fax (425) 823-032* Sample No.: 202056 81006 Project: Yakima Water Fluoridation System Hermiston, arasrmn, O ORR 97838 (541) 364-0991 Fax (541) 564-0921 Material Description: Well Graded Gravel w/ Sand Sample Location: Test Pit 1 at 9.0' - 9.5 Subgrade Surface Sampled By: F. Reinart Date Sampled: 06 -26 -00 Date Received: 06 -27 -00 Sieve Analysis Test Results Standard(s): ASTM D1140 & D422 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3 inch 87 2 inch 72 1 I inch 61 1 inch 51 4 inch 44 I inch 38 s inch 35 No. 4 32 No. 10 26 No. 20 11 No. 40 3 No. 80 0.5 No. 200 0.2 , Reviewed By, //LL , _� i'T�' Gerald G. Harper Division Manager ■ _ CORPORATh9FF1C1: i •ma11: gnnnrth0rnonwti,nut • 1.100.428.9798 • Wtlb Situ: http : / /www,gnnnrthurn,nnm CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS FOR ENGINEERING PURPOSES j 1 J 1 Northern, Inc. I I I 11,S; Kirkland, Yakima, Kennewick, Hermiston (OR) KEY CST - ra- : r. •:� si:"a:i ' c.�w`'ii.��y!i?`' � _ : o _ ..4c1: =::: ate.:- - - .t':�' � ::ze rti ,� �. ,'kN: • '. ti :., : z i ,.r,:`. i�s : c:. Y e " f 3 a $I�)):i' el(�h��b•.`.. t,`1C?E' �;�..„, ?` 4� } '��" ]. .'� ,_,,, ,,,, • •i O, :Y a'. - ti. a w : „ . ..,, , �L Y �t,,,..�k A ty -. .. . '{. ,.. =-0 �...:C.. 7 ,3.,..,..- 4'..�L%„a�. _:.r .:. .. ��s":-:: ��y '`�•.= r:�'.t:..•'^, •r+c,•..�.; _1;�. , _c� ?_.et.°a. r. :,.^_ -1 t�• .�,.>Y�._i?w....,...,:. ;� .. COARSE- GRAINED SorLs F NE- GRAINED SolLs DENSITY 1 N (BLOws/rrr) FIELD TEST CONSISTENCY N (BLOwshrr) FIELD TEST I FASiIy penetrated with '.4 -inch reinforcing Easily penetrated several inches by Very Loose 0 — 4 rod pushed lay hand Very Soft 0 — 2 thumb Difficultto penetrate with Vi -inch Loose 4 —10 reinforcing trod pushed by hand Soft 2 — 4 Easily penetrated one inch by thumb Medium -Dense 10 — 30 Easily penetrated with i4 -inch rod driven Medium -Stiff 4 — 8 Penetrated over i/i -inch by thumb with 1 with a 5-lb hammer moderate effort III Dense 30 — 50 Difficult to penaaate with 4 -inch rod Stiff 8 — 15 Indented about iii -inch by thumb but driven with a 5-lb hammer penetrated with gent effort penetrated only a few inches with 4i -inch Very Stiff i 15 — 30 I Readily indented by thumb Very Dense > 50 rod driven with a 5-lb hammer Hard I > 30 I Indented with difficulty by thumbnail _+rk, S,'. _ - --r :, .l; /: \'a - . ,' ; g o y — �• ,-! F .r."" J -, s: ' t:t �inr ,t,. .1,,,,;. ,y 1r- ': t.,,•<,.. • Y g q- ♦ t, a y ''?- i a r .4 At t . 1ii -s i',.�1 6 Q!, („i? V4 3� i't (0,.,..-.: . - t :� -. f t • ' .. i.,: C, O . E . I a A L . ., ,.. R `' '1 MAJOR DIVISIONS GROUP DESCRIPTION I 2S V OD Split Gravel and Gravel j GW Well- graded Gravel Spoon (SPT) 35 3' OD Split Gravelly Soto (with little or no fines) GP Poorly Graded Gravel I Sp oaa Coarse- <50% coarse Glued ¢ P asses Gravel GM Silty Gravel El NS Nan - Standard Soils #4 sieve (with >12% fines) ' GC Clayey Gravel Split Spoon %d <50% Sand and Sand ';y' SW I Well - graded Sand N ST _Shelby Tube passes #200 Sandy Soils (with little or no fines) ; sP Poorly gra ded Sand ❑ CR Core Run ;heve >50%coarse t: fraction passes Sand ,%. SM Silty Sand #4 sieve (with >12 % fines) f S Clayey Sand BG Bag Sample ✓ Torvane ML Silt a TV Reading Fine- Silt and Clay Grained CL Lean Clay PP Penetrometer Liquid limit < 50 Soils OL I Organic Silt. and ay (low plasticity) Rending Clay >50% I MH Inorganic Silt ❑ NR No Recovery passes #200 Silt and Clay - Liquid I unit > 50 CH Inorganic Clay 2. sieve — OH Organic and S EER med. to hi GW Groundwater �8en �y ( 8h plasticity) Table Flighty Organic Soils PT Peat Y. • ✓,4. ik t + +V` s �` ,I l` ,s :4 L p .e ,l I l t` -�` r G IS'!'F i et, . P r` r 'z' e 1 a" s r X Gl,f .* . , +,_.!s a yl /�@)!i1''r h . ,. .�' s.,t .,. .. .�5., .^. . 7 ,. r y., F. !. 1 f.`.... _. ._ ... ... [. .. . . ._ . ��Si .'. C � -� .• .2... .<- .t•F.42i rM.. .<jrv( ,,��}'. " _Z ! � � DESCRIPTION RANGE DESCRIPTION FIELD OBSERVATION .}, DESCRI x ` .f.1,..1H 6: dt�,�� " ''� ' ire • • D 1 Trace <5% Dry I Absence of moisture, dusty, dryto the touch 1 ittle 1 5% — 12% Moist 1 Damp but not visible water Some 1 >12% Wet 1 Visible free water 1. Group Name 2. Group Symbol �`� ' '��q� "��S:.r ,. fi :�: i; ? �Tc:[i y l Z a, ',7... �..y_ . �M %.�)k i1!rai� ,u r•hy..y_y „.a�. 't.. 3. Color ti •. r, -,, m I " n` t ya �e ". 1 F.ac. 1 .,. ; . F ;,, car h r ,x .! l� �� 9 -- s-pl 1lLRFa r ` ,....”1r Y {'.i.fa.:re h ` i .�. it R'.�' 1 ;i ° °:. •vs. %:;;;ip; ?: yy+ .::a'�:'= i`•Z'ii2:'.�'•%�5�%:' ..r + .. ? v -,x t4 y(: v '�f-;:� +s a -r'�n :. �w�k.~5.._'Ir),;:.i',,. +.�.i��:r.'.'i�'" -.. 4. Moisture content r SIEVE SIZE 5 Density /consistency 12' 3' 3/4 4 10 40 200 GRAIN SI7n, (INCHES) 6. Cementation 1 12 I 3 0.75 0.19 0.079 0.0171 0.0029 I 7 Particle sir (if applicable) I Boulders Cobbles I Gravel Sand Silt and Clay I 8. Odor (if present) l Coarse Fine Coarse Medium Fine 9 Comments .Conditions shown on boring and testpit logs represent our observations at the time and location of the fieldwork, modifications based on lab test, analysis, and geological and engmeermg judgment These conditions may not exist at other times and locations, even in close proximity thereof. This information was gathered as part of our mvestigation, and we are net responsible for any use or interpretation of the information by others. CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS OF UNLFIED SOIL SYSTEM CLASSES FOR SOIL CONSTRUCTION* `�• .Y- 5 i a i' Wit ti � ... : t , ..l.. �u.>`�` } � L ; .fit k ' 4t J i; C, :{ • . r • -� , .z ,}. a .. �1 tff K � a' 5. .r-C''7.: ,, ', :9. • . , �� � .. . > �,�f,7'}. ,. '�I1 { l 4 't r J� .e . ��' lt_ _ '-^t; •; ,�.�'t�.. C, ; .�: _ i _ gi 5. , 'd . , y r > .}i i"`~ . `1'a ' 11 • 1, k"`4i: ?•{. ki , t:.tk J+ :Y"IF f ` , 1}I.. :5. t >.J, , •�,,.�: � '� �±- >, � -�r�. -i,, � �ydJ � .-� � � � c ,..,�.i1'- f��lfCi� r . �` � _ ,_�... r •� -- = t ,. .�5��..;a, ".` ! .`i` _ i e• i r.j ']If?�i t k 1 it1 - 1 It d >.S i1P - t. gy "y.', M� • > , 6 :3 � .: n . d ..t: .s . :5 " , ' s +' � ' tr ( g e , _ 1,. ii , : . . t. i�1 � �w t.'f!F, � 'T �� . �, rs�^ �•k:�• Y� i �. - .y.. iI 3 L �i 17'{ 7 �Ft 5 �.f �3� �t r :s. ik a'< . 'i' � . - � : .. �. ' '� : ' t •. .y Y . }�* ��r: `� % . . :1;'�,? ,.....,,-,:,,,...-...5-:. � r � �.. ). � Y� �-, �•� ✓.., ���, t � ' "2 7 ill '^l• � / •i tri'� � �..�:1 -:� ' �SS�>�`e�� ,�. .. — .e � - L..1'.���..].1i•�..:: � 'j•r.ii�•Lfi� GW Good: Tractor, rubber- tired, 125 -135 Almost None Good Excellent Excellent Good Fair to poor Excellent steel wheel or vibratory roller Pervious GP Good: Tractor, rubber- tired, 115 -125 Almost None Good Reasonable Excellent to good Fair to poor Poor steel wheel or vibratory roller Pervious GM Good: Rubber tired or light 120 -135 Slight Poor Reasonable Excellent to good Fair to poor Poor Fair to poor sheepsfoot roller Semi pervious Ge Good to fair Rubber -tired or 115 -130 Slight Poor Reasonable Good Good to fair** Excellent Excellent sheepsfoot roller Impervious SW Good: Tractor, rubber tired, 110 -130 Almost None Good Excellent Good Fair to poor Fair to poor Good or vibratory roller Pervious Good: Tractor, rubber -tired, Good Reasonable SP or vibratory roller 100 -120 Almost None Pervious when dense Good to fair Poor Poor Fair to poor SM Good: Rubber tired or 1 10 -125 Slight Poor Reasonable Good to fair Poor Poor Fair to poor sheepsfoot roller - Impervious when dense SC Good to fair Rubber tired or 105 -125 Slight to Medium Poo Reasonable Good to fair Fair to poor Excellent Excellent sheepsfoot roller Impervious ML Good to poor Rubber -tired 95 -120 Slight to Medium Poor Poor -High Fair to poor Not Suitable Poor Poor or sheepsfoot roller - Impervious Density required CL Good to fair Rubber -tired or 95 -120 Medium None Reasonable Fair to poor Not Suitable Poor Poor she psfoot roller _ Impervious OL Fair to poor Rubber -tired or g0 -100 Medium to High Poor Unstable - Should Poor Not Suitable Not Suitable Not Suitable sheepsfoot roller Impervious not be used MI I Fair to poor Rubber -tired or Poor Poor - Should 70 -95 High Poor Not Suitable Very poor Very Poor sheepsfoot roller Impervious not be used CH Fair to poor: Sheepsfoot 80 -105 Very High None Fair - May soften Poor to very poor Not Suitable Very poor Not Suitable roller Impervious on expansion 01I Fair to poor: Sheepsfoot 65 -100 High None Unstable - Should Very Poor Not Suitable Not Suitable Not Suitable roller Impervious not be used Should not pt Not suitable Very High Fair to poor be used Not suitable Not Suitable Not Suitable Not Suitable * The Unified Classification. Appendix A: Charachteristics of soil groups pertaining to roads, airfields, and Appendix B. Characteristics of soil groups pertaining to Embankments and foundations ", Technical Northern Inc. Memorandum 357, U.S Waterways Experiment Station, Viksburgh, 1953. •s Not suitable if subjected to frost Kirkland, Yakima, Kennewick Hermiston PR) • 1 UBC SEISMIC ZONE MAP l A 1 3 1 .1 UBC SEISMIC MAP AND SOIL TYPE PROFILES . ----.. I \ V IL I . k 1 Al II 1 ) 4 e.1 - r - 1 • 6 _ 5 10 T 1 + I ` l �r }� 1 \ I --- l t u l r f 1 _ 40 0:( a I ' __ - , - I l _ a 1 L . 1 \ -+V r o' 4N„Y .13t..03 , FIGURE 16-2- SEISMIC ZONE !AAP OF THE UNITED STATES For areas outside of the Un States, sae App•ndtx Chapter 16. _ .�.ep-- .. . ; + y .. : +.� ^ : �. . e` .. �' =c':'h;.:.'.". ""w. :�: :t�l:i°••'_J`St.. ``:rFf.:w"•- 't.'•V . w .�". - '.••r' ...: ;; w-..±� , s yz, r1 ":a.. rr4. ?-%; 1•:h' +1'- c-«. •:i= - 7...•.+;4''eire; ax-. ,";;� .•..'• f. . S +i •a�:;�M�vi'?. +t.: r �' � '�� ti 6:4 :at.. , °'1....N �.'a... _ . J:S :. � .... ,�, :+a'!f. % va2:.'�;�.. ,-ti ?tom :t7 :'rt .et: � .. r.. ;':',,fi :J. '! 4...r:. - ='.;s� 's > `+. etl7 S . e ' ,?; 1.; :1 �. ,-,• 1 c, A ti ?'.'t + � {�� l .,( m ot. » " s. .i vtir t :i�� \`��)`i �.. .. . ..:. �� _ .. ��._ i•, w' r. _,' :. 4 ` , .. h': Ll_ t -w...`Qtw3.'.:C'..�.1 �SuL. _.... :"6 i " =.:=ri 1 2A 2B 3 4 'r .,..:1 . -. _ y: ? 0.075 0.15 0.2 0.3 0.4 The zone shall be delimited from the seismic zone map above. _�.e..., �. . "tF;- °'.+a "` "•..`.r.::.;.: -r. _:. :. . ... t�� -? ^�.' x4.t'r4Y? 'c ..�. :rrWit^, ' .` t .- _ 7.7 .. ..•c x - "�i °`- t « t' rn .,!,, ,' «1 t., ,.., ( � ' - .'si.« •F, .r _ � ti� r� ' _ '.,��• Vii• "r .r5 }.'�, �:.::4 . 1'• :ice �4`;.y S ,r- + q . 1 r: n 4 ' C s :�i�0.- tt::d �J'Stiyr '��. ;� fr^e�^e�,,.. . . t . .... r- a . l G,+ ���' 'y -s.. }:� a,� h' >,..y r 4 ^�. -'Sr r\ yr�f r L'Le" .'•c; . z }..r 14 . ,_,,._,. ,_ �. a 4.til.f.._ .._ ._. .. _ ... .. ... , }. _ ..__ .. _ _ i.._ �. L Y.. 1: Y?Z; � ^ :,G:: %e'•.J� .i,:.__!.a:.4.Lu 7a.r MFG r . M1•�, 9 . - , - : :i ce . .... • . .;*,' , . ? Average Soil Properties for top 100 Feet of Soil Profile k1:.. _.': `- Y '' � � t!,,,,..., : ,:,.. Soil Profile Name '' w `� Jr `;5r'`�r P. ; Standard Penetration Test, i .,4-i" -:..1c -- .1' Generic Description Shear Wave Velocity (V Untrained Shear Strength , , 4; . :; N (or N 4 r ;� for cohesionless rr _ , �' � t � (feet/sec) (Psi) 1 ?..,. r ,.�l soils layers) (blows/foot) " ' " ,:..-:::1:.',:-7:>,1 Hard rock >5000 LLYY t:', =; s ` ; ry , , 'rt j Rock 2500 - 5000 ; ' •,,, � '::.t ' '„ ,, - 4 +.rid- Very dense soil and soft rock 1200 -2500 > 50 > 2000 s- � t ._.: iS.::t�: t °a; r "_sue ;t -'• - 'a Stiff soil profile 600 -1200 15 - 50 1000 - 2000 7 ; ; `' " "� ern'' 7 Soft soil profile <600 < 15 < 1000 M N Soil requiring site- specific evaluation. See section 1629.3,1 of the 1997 Uniform Building Code Soil Profile Type S$ also includes any soil profile with more than 10 fed of soft clay defined as a soil with a Plasticity Index, (PI >20, w ?40% and s psf. The Plasticity Index (PI) and the moisture content. (w shall be determined in accordance with approved national standards. ' , , :a• t.: a?,. • � c- :r«... y+ � t ' •• _ "•a+rd4aG7•'y�* .. «, .4 ' • ta l4 ii';, `+ ,x ' ' rp,,,,..,: },' %� Seismic Zone Factor (Z) ^". "4' , ff � to 2=0.075 Z 1=02 Z =0.3 Z=0.4 4 ,,; :Y± sr ?i,.`.3 S?; Cv I Ce Cv ! C C\r 1 C, C 1 C, C 1 C. ��y.;, i,:4 3iMa :,3:�' ' 4 ;w 0 06 .06 1 0.12 0.12 1 0.16 1 0.16 0.24 l 0.24 0.32 Nv 0.32 N, VTlwd+� .n::: c-�r °' 0 08 .08 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.30 0.30 0 40 Nv 0.40 N t7 -, ":2 740 % 0.13 09 0.25 0.18 0.32 0.24 0 45 0.33 0.56 N 0.40 N. c"rt;� .<i `b � - ;5 `'' 0 18 .12 0.32 0.22 0 40 0.28 0.54 0.36 0.64 Nv 0.44 N ,1. ``;3 � ,, ' 0.26 0.19 1 0.50 0.30 0.64 0.34 1 0.84 0.36 0.96 N 0.36 N. r M: Fi3• * :ii? , 3:77, See footnote 2 , ` Site - specific geotedtnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis shall be performedto determine seismic coefficient for Soil Profile Type S,.